HAY UNLOADING TOOLS
DAIRY BARN EQUIPMENT
HORSE STABLE EQUIPMENT
LITTER AND FEED CARRIERS
BARN DOOR HANGERS
SPECIALTIES

■ ■
■

■ •

^"H^TABLISHEO

rAIRFICLD
IOWA

1

3 9090 013 407 230

GENERAL INDEX

Complete Index, Pages 222-224

Hay Tools

Hay Carriers and Fittines

Power Hoists

Hay Forks, Slings, and iiitings

Pulleys and Other Sfsecialties .

Barn and Garage Door Hangers and Specialties

Dairy Bam Equipment

Cow Stalls and Fittings

Mangers and Manger Divisions

Stanchions . .

Water Bowls

Steel Pens, Gates, Hinges, Etc.

Miscellaneous Supplies and Information. ......

Cupolas, Ventilators, and Window Ventilators.

Manger and Gutter Drains

Paint

PAGES

8-32
33-35
38-48
49-56
59-67

76-97

98-106

109-114

115-119

120-133

134-139

141-146

147. 148, and 212

149

Litter, Feed, and Other Carriers

General Information

Litter Carriers

Feed Carriers and Trucks

Harness Carriers

Merchandise Carrlcr^

Milk Can Carriers. .

Track and Fittings, Swinging Cranes, Switches, Etc.

Arrangements for Barns

Horse Stable Equipment

Hay Rack

Feed Boxes

Watering Troughs

Horse Stalls, Partitions, and Supplies

Harness Hooks and Salt Roll Holders

Cess Pools

Higbie Oats Cleaner

Barn Plans

General Information.
Specimen Plans. ...

152-155
157-166
167-171
171
172
173-174
175-190
191-193

198-203

204-206

207-208

208-211

210

212

213

217-220
220-221

Vine

\hu:.

1^ y-i '^^st^ru^ •?"""

t t
t \

LOUDEN

HAY UNLOADING TOOLS

BARN AND GARAGE DOOR HANGERS

DAIRY BARN EQUIPMENT

LITTER, FEED, MERCHANDISE. AND MILK CAN

CARRIERS
HORSE STABLE EQUIPMENT
CUPOLAS, VENTILATORS, DRAINS, ETC.
HARDWARE SPECIALTIES

GENERAL CATALOG No. 46

Issued November, 1916

The largest factory in the world devoted exclusively to the
manufacture of Barn and Stable Equipment.

MAIN FACTORY, FAIRFIELD. IOWA

BRANCH HOUSES

The Louden Machinery Company, St. Paul. Minnesota

The Louden Machinery Company. Albany. New York

The Louden Machinery Company. Chicago, Illinois

The Harbison Manufacturing Company. Kansas City, Missouri

CANADIAN FACTORY
HK The Louden M

achinerv Cornpany. Guelph, Ontario

BSfeTdlM OFFICE ffi

32 SO. MAnKET FT. §

H.E WRIGHT £i SONS "

THE LOUDEN MACHINERY COMPANY

PAID UP CAPITAL, $750,000 ESTABLISHED 1867

FAIRFIELD. IOWA

/ k

COPYRIGHT 1916 BY THE LOUDEN MACHINERY COMPANY

INTRODUCTORY

The num-
ber of barns
equipped with
Louden prod-
ucts runs into
the millions
and these
goods have
been sold —
not as a result
of advertising,
not as a result
of a superior
selling organi-
zation, but as
a result of the
sterling worth
of Louden
quality.

We are
/ determined that

every Louden product

will go out in working

order; that it will work easily;

that it will work safely;

that it will fulfill every

claim made for it

and more.

During its entire history
— nearly fifty years —
this compeiny has held to
■'this determination, and this
determination Is the founda-
tion of its success.

LOUDEN HAY TOOLS

PAGE

Hay Carriers (Fork) 8-13

Hay Carriers (Sling) 14-24

Round Barn Equipment 25-27

Cable Ricker 28-29

Track and Track Fittings 30-32

Power Hoist : 33-35

Balance Grapple Forks 38-39

Harpoon Forks . . 40

Slings and Sling Fittings 41 -48

Pulleys 49-51

Specialties 52-56

frnTTTTTl nTtnTTnTrmTTTflTl

I — t EH irr>

)^!T3 gii n 0 ?^.^i: ^Ti> { i i.^i =>> r^y <>in^m(

CHOOSING HAY UNLOADING TOOLS

While a majority of our friends who receive this catalog are
posted on the subject of Hay Unloading Tools, we believe that
a few words, outlining in a general way the different points to
be considered in choosing an outfit, will be of interest to many.

Kinds of Barns

Barns may be divided into four classes:

1. The Single End Hoist Barn. In this type of barn the
hay is taken into the mow at one end of the barn.

2. The Double End Hoist Barn. Hay may be taken into
this type of barn from either end of the building.

3. The Center Drive Barn. This type has a driveway run-
ning through the center; hay is lifted up to the necessary height
and carried into the left or right mow as desired.

4. The Round Barn. This type of barn requires special
equipment. (See pages 25 to 27.)

Forks or Slings?

After classifying your barn, the next point to consider is whether you
want to use a Fork or Slings to remove the hay from the wagon. This
must be very largely a matter of individual choice, and a careful reading
of the descriptions of Forks, pages 38 to 40 and of Slings, pages 41
to 44, will help in the solution. Either Forks or Slings can be used in
any type of barn.

The Carrier For You

A Hay Carrier is classified either as a Fork Carrier or Sling Carrier.
A Fork Carrier can. by using our Self-Locking Sling Pulleys (see page
46) be used with Slings and a Sling Carrier can handle Forks, if a Fork
Clevis (see page 45) is attached.

We recommend, that, insofar as possible, a choice be made between
Forks and Slings before choosing a Carrier.

The following short descriptions give an idea of the different carriers:
Junior Fork Carrier

There are more Louden Junior Fork Carriers in use than any other
carrier made. They meet all conditions and requirements
for a fork carrier. They can be used in either center-
drive or end-hoist barn. They can be depended upon
to do their work at all times and under all reasonable

conditions. (See page 8.)
Senior Fork Carrier

This is the strongest Fork
Carrier made and is easy to
operate. It can be used in
Center Drive or End Hoist
barns and is specially recom-
mended where heavy loads
are to be handled. (See
page 10.)

Page Six

Carry-All Sling Carrier

This Carrier is the heaviest, strongest and easiest working
SHng Carrier manufactured. It is adapted for use in any
style barn. For a large barn where there are large loads of
hay to be mowed the Carry-All will handle half-ton loads
safely, and will not cut or break the fibre of the rope, and will
give satisfaction under all reasonable conditions. (See page! 4.)
Iowa Sling Carrier

The Iowa Sling carrier is adapted for use in any style
barn. It is not so heavily built as the Carry -All, but for all
general work it gives entire satisfaction. (See page 18.)
Cross Draft Carrier

This carrier can be used in any type of barn but is recom-
mended for barns where hay is taken up in the center. The
carrier works on a new principle — the horse walks away from the
barn to elevate the load and turns back toward the barn to pull
the load back into the mow. This saves one half the travel of
the horse. (See page 22.)
Round Barn Outfit

The special Round Barn Carrier operated with a Louden
Triple Drum Power Hoist makes the most satisfactory outfit for
unloading and mowing hay in a round barn. (See page 25.)
Carriers for Wood Track

Louden Junior Fork Carrier is recommended for use with forks.
(See page 13.) Reversible Sling Carrier is recommended for use
with slings. (See page 21.)

Louden Specialties

^i

mi

Louden Barn Door Hangers. Our line of barn door hangers is well
known, and our leading hanger, the Bird-Proof, is the most popular made.
(Page 60.)

Louden 's Cable Ricker (pages 28-29) is an eco-
nomical and satisfactory method of stacking hay in
the field.

A Louden Power Hoist (pages 33-35) will save
money during the haying season if there is a gasoline
engine or other power on the farm, and will be of great
service whenever a "powerful lift" is needed.

Louden's Hoisting Singletree is a great con-
venience wherever a horse is used for
hoisting. (See page 53.)

Louden Hay Rack Clamps enable
any farmer to build a strong, service-
able hay rack with little expense. (See
page 54.)

Louden Combination Rack Irons lu ^r / "^

are useful when an all-purpose rack is \ jW\\4ii'yA

desired, as it is easily changed for hay,
wood, or hogs. (See page 55.)

Louden Offset Hinge is the best
solution for the gable-end mow door.
(See page 53.)

^

%i

M

I'/'

'M

'W. vi

Page Seven

Louden Junior Hay Fork Carrier — Fig. 430

Illustration shows our
patent End Stop for Lou-
den Double Bead Steel
Track. Two are furnished
with the Junior Carrier.

Fig. 7 is an end view of the upper
frame of all the Louden Swivel Carriers,
showing the great strength. The sides
carrying the wheels are joined together
by two end pieces. These end pieces
have upwardly extending arms (as seen
in cut), which are secured to the sides
above while a bolt holds them together
at the bottom, thus making the strong-
est possible frame, and at the same
time saving space, as all the space taken
up below the track is the thickness
of the end pieces. This is a distinc-
tive Louden feature.

The wheel arms are thoroughly
braced and will never spread with a
heavy load and let the carrier off the
track.

Trip Block Furnished
Part of Carrier

Specifications

For use in any style of barn. Especially
desirable in barns where hay is unloaded
from a center driveway or at both ends.
Built to operate on Louden Double Bead
steel track.
Diameter of rope wheels, 4 inches.
Diameter of track wheels on tread. 2 '4 inches.
Bearing surface on track (distance between front and rear

axles), 1032 inches. Total length of carrier, 13 inches.
Carries fork within 12 inches of track.
Frame of carrier of refined malleable iron.
Rope and track wheels special quality gray iron.
Safe working capacity, 1 ,000 pounds.
Three-quarter inch best manilla rope is recommended.

Thirteen-sixteenths or Jg inch rope can be used.
One fork pulley, I trip block, 2 end stop blocks, I rope swivel
furnished with carrier. Weight, 25 pounds.

The Louden Junior is the most popular and the biggest selling
hay fork carrier. Its construction is simple and compact. More of
these carriers are in use in the barns of the country than any other
hay carrier made. For twenty years it has been standard and doing
its work safely and surely on thousands of farms.

This carrier is suitable for use in any style of barn. Where hay
is taken up at the end of building it works easily and smoothly as a
one-way carrier. It is a "Louden swivel" carrier and where hay is
unloaded from a center driveway it is quickly reversed. The pulley
through which draft rope works in the end of the barn is changed
from one end to the other. The carrier can then be swiveled around
by giving a swinging pull on the draft rope. No climbing up to the
carrier necessary. In long barns where hay is unloaded at both ends
the carrier can be changed from one end to the other without changing
a rope or pulley.

The carrier has the wide flaring mouth and the round topped fork
pulley that have made all Louden Carriers popular with hay growers.
The fork pulley never fails to enter the carrier at the proper time.
It is not necessary that the wagon should be directly under the carrier.
The wide flaring mouth receives the round fork pulley no matter from
what angle the fork is drawn and regardless of swinging load or
twisting ropes. No failure, no backing up of the team to make the
second trial.

Page Eight

'-^ 7 ^ ss "T* -^^^ ^a. 1 . I ^ i — t e: r^

Louden Junior Hay Fork Carrier — Continued

The end of the rope is fastened in the carrier with our patent swivel
iron knot. (See S in Fig. C 430.) The rope is placed through the tilting
eye S and the iron knot, resting loosely on the eye, makes a complete,
durable and simple swivel. This swivel allows all twists and kinks
of the rope to escape. Many times when a new rope is first put in a
carrier it will twist and kink so badly as to cause delays and
annoyance. Sometimes it is necessary to take the rope out and turn
it end for end. The swivel iron knot with the Louden Junior Carrier
does away with all that trouble.

The rope wheels in the carrier and in the fork pulley are 4 inches in
diameter and are heavy and strong. The wheels revolve on heavy
malleable iron bushings recessed into the main frame. The short,
heavy bushings sustain the weight of the load while the bolt passing
through holds the frame of the carrier together. The wheels are
perfectly formed and so smooth that the wear on the rope is reduced
to a minimum.

The hook in the fork pulley which carries the fork is attached to the
pulley by a strong swivel connection. Even should the load of hay
turn around while being raised the ropes will not twist. This swivel
hook in the fork pulley makes it practical to set the fork in the hay
at any angle desired.

The grappling hooks in the carrier take a deep grip in the frame of
the fork pulley. They grip the pulley securely, at the same time per-
mitting the pulley to swing freely. This is of immense advantage as it permits filling the mow up to the
track with no risk of breaking the carrier or the pulley. This also makes it practical to take a large fork-
ful through a small door or over high beams.

The wheel arms are short and thick, reinforced by wide ribs. The wheels are equally strong; they are
2^ inches in diameter on tread. The web is directly under the tread where the support is most needed.
The track wheels operate on large, heavy axles, three-fourths of an inch in diameter, flared at the shoulders
to give additional strength and prevent the wheels from binding on the frame. The track wheels and
axles are milled true, insuring little wear. On special orders this carrier can be equipped with eight wheels
and oscillating engine trucks, same as shown with Iowa Sling Carrier, Fig. 821, page 18. A small charge
will be made for this change.

Cut A Fig. C, 430

The end of the Showing the wide
rope is fastened in flaring mouth,
the Carrier with

our patent swivel iron knot, as shown
in A. The rope is placed through the
tilting eye, S (Fig. C 430), and the
iron knot resting loosely thereon makes
a complete, durable and simple swivel,
which lets all kink and twist out of
the rope.

shown on opposite page.

would be when pulling hay into a. well filled mow.

Fig. 830

Illustration Fig. 830

shows the Junior Fork

Carrier with oscillating

\\^ ^ J engine trucks to give a wider bearing

^~^ J on the surface of the track. Otherwise

this carrier is the same as Fig. 430

In illustration the fork pulley is swung back as it

CutW

Cut B

Cut W represents Louden's improved
Track Wheel, having the web of the wheel
directly under the tread T, which makes
it strong and durable. It also shows the
wheel axles, which are of solid malleable
iron (more durable than steel) rounded out
where it joins the carrier frame, so as to
give it the greatest possible strength.

Cut B shows how the large rope wheels
are protected by shields which makes it
easy on the rope. The bearings are chilled
and run on large malleable bushings recessed
into the sides and bolted through. This
feature is patented.

Page Nine

^■^Yl " '^^^*- ^-^^ ■ * *- * ^ '^I^

Specifications

For use in any-
type or size of
barn.

Built regularly
to operate on
Louden Dou-
ble Bead Steel
Track. (See
pages 30 and
31 for Track
and Track
Fittings.)

Furnished regular
manilla rope.

Louden Senior Hay Fork Carrier — Fig. 1100

with Rope Wheel

Furnished on special order with Rope Wheel

for wire draft rope.
Diameter of Rope Wheel in carrier and Fork

pulley, 7 inches.
Rope Wheels are roller bearing.
Diameter of Track Wheels on treads 3 inches.
Track wheels are not roller bearing.
Bearing surface on track (distance between

front and rear axles), 15 inches.
Total length of carrier, 2 1 inches.
Carries fork within 20 inches of the track.
Frame of carrier of refined malleable iron.
Rope and Track Wheels special quality gray iron
Safe working capacity, 1,500 pounds.
5^-inch best manilla rope is recommended.
Any size rope from i*4-inch to I inch may be used.
One fork Pulley, I Trip Block, and two End Stop

Blocks are furnished with the carrier.
Weight, 34 pounds.

Fig. 523
Illustration shows our patent
End Stop for Louden Double
Bead Steel Track. Two are fur-
nished with the Senior Carrier.

1100

Fig. 1123

Trip Block Furnished as

Part of Carrier

Each year there are more and more large
barns built, and each year there is an
increasing demand and necessity for extra
heavy hay-unloading outfits. Hay growers
have been asking for a heavy fork carrier,
a carrier that could be used for handling a
hay fork in the usual way, and that could
also be depended upon to handle extremely
heavy loads when necessary. The needs
and call for such a hay carrier led us to
design and put on market the Senior Hay
Fork Carrier.

This Carrier throughout is built strong
and sturdy and in addition, its mechanism is simple and sure. It has the wide flaring mouth and the
round-topped fork pulley that has been a distinctive feature of Louden Carriers for years. The fork
pulley will never fail to register from whatever angle it may be drawn, and the grappling hooks take a
deep, sure grip on the pulley.

The Louden Senior is a "Louden swivel" frame carrier and is equally efficient whether hay is taken
up from the end of the barn or from a center driveway. When used in a barn having a center drive,
when one end of the barn is filled the pulley at the end of the barn, through which the draft rope passes,
is carried over and hung in place at the other end. When this is done a swinging jerk on the draft
rope from the wagon or ground will reverse the carrier and it will be ready to work in the other end.

The Louden Senior has been tested in our factory under loads weighing 2,300 pounds. Operated
vigorously under this load, the carrier showed no signs of weakness. We guarantee that it will handle
a load weighing 1 ,500 lbs. continuously and with safety.

The bearing surface on the track — the distance from center to center between front and rear track
wheels — is I 5 inches. This wide bearing distributes the load along a greater surface, making it possible
for the track to carry large loads without strain.

The Rope Wheels of the Senior carrier are roller bearing. This large wheel (7 inches in diameter),
together with the roller bearing, 7-inch fork pulley, reduces friction to a minimum, and makes the hoisting
of the load from wagon much easier than with an ordinary carrier.

Page Ten

^^iT?1*J"'^'^-*>^^^*>'**-*^'^*^

Louden Senior Hay Fork Carrier — Continued

Showing Swinging Fork Pulley

Loads can be dragged over beams or other obstructions

without endangering carrier.

The Track Wheels are 3 inches in diameter
on tread, are heavy and of great strength. They
are not roller bearing, as it takes very little power
to pull the carrier along the track compared with
the power necessary to hoist the load. Too great
an ease of propelment would be a disadvantage
through the tendency of the carrier to "run away"
when leaving the trip block.

With the Louden Senior Track Carrier the
barn can be filled clear to the track. There is
no danger of breaking any part of the carrier, as
the load can swing back directly behind carrier
when necessary. This feature of the Swinging
Fork Pulley also makes it easy to pull large fork-
fuls through small doors and over high beams
without danger of breakage.

The round top of the Fork Pulley and the
wide flaring mouth of the carrier is a big advan-
tage in busy hay time. The wagon can be unloaded

from any angle, not having to stand directly under the carrier, and the Fork Pulley will always register
true. This feature, together with our patented rope swivel, which lets the kinks and twists run out of
the rope while forkful is being hoisted, saves a world of time that is worth many dollars in haytime.

The rope swivel on this carrier is built into the carrier and is a big improvement over any rope swivel
before offered. You simply pass the end of the rope through the swivel and tie a knot in the rope.

With a good, solid knot in the end of the rope, everything is sure to hold, and the swivel works free,
permitting the twist to run out of the rope.

The Locking Dog has a new, distinctive feature, in that it is pivoted by means of a bolt. The Locking
Dog may be easily taken out of the carrier without disturbing any of the other parts.

The Rope Wheel in the Fork pulley is 7 inches in diameter. The outer pulley casing is extra strong as
it has four ribbed spokes and the outer circumference has two heavy ribs running parallel with each other.
These, together with the cross ribs, make an exceedingly strong frame.

The carrier is built for use with any
size of rope 5:j-inch to 1 inch. We rec-
ommend a 3^ -inch manilla rope as it is
easier to handle, and costs less than a
larger rope. Some users prefer. ^|, }&, |f ,
or I inch rope, and where a large rope
is preferred the new carrier handles it
perfectly.

Fig. 7 is an end view of the upper frame of
all the Louden Swivel Carriers, showing the
great strength. The sides carrying the wheels
are joined together by two end pieces A. These
end pieces have upwardly extending arms (as
seen in cut) , which are secured to the sides above
while a bolt holds them together at the bottom,
thus making the strongest possible frame, and
at the same time saving space, as all the space
taken up below the track is the thickness of the
end pieces A.

The wheel arms are thoroughly braced and
will never spread with a heavy load and let
the carrier off the track.

Fie. 7

Page Eleven

_LL

A big sling load goinc Into a barn
in Germany. I.oud>Mi Hay T00I3
'are used all over the world.

Waukesha, Wisconsin.
Aug. 11. 1914.
Louden Machinery Company,
Gentlemen:

We harvested 150 acres of alfalfa in 1913
and I9I4, and are the largest alfalfa growers
in Wisconsin. Our engine hoist, slings,
horse forks, tracks, cars, and pulleys are
all Louden hay tools. Goods of other
makes were replaced by Louden make,
because we found Louden goods to be
more durable and convenient.

Durability of haying machinery means
so much to us as we have so much hay to
handle. Good reliable machinery is very
important because one has extra help
around, the weather is warm, and hay
should be handled quickly and easily, and
tools should be made to be handled by
men conveniently, thus saving time, labor,
expense, and worry in taking care of the
hay crop when it is ready for mowing or
stacking. No one can afford to spend the
time for repairs or repairing poorly con-
structed or faulty in operation hay tools.
Yours very truly,

SWARTZ BROS..

Per P. C. S.

1 louden Grapple Fork llftlns a ble7
1( ad of bj\ I . ii,J. n iorks meet

TheLOUDEN MACHINERY COMPANY

Louden Junior Hay Fork Carrier for Wood Track

Fig. 441

Fig. 1127
Trip Block

One furnished with
each Louden Junior
Wood Track "
her.

Fig. 441 (Capital)
Specifications

Operates on 4x4 wood track.

For use in any style of barn.

Diameter of Rope Wheels 4 inches.

Diameter of Track Wheels 3}_l inches.

Bearing surface on track (distance between front and rear axles)

1251 inches.
Total length of carrier 16 inches.
Carries fork within 1332 inches of the track.
Frame of carrier of refined malleable iron.
Rope and Track Wheels special quality gray iron.
Safe working capacity, 1 .000 pounds.
Three-fourths inch rope, best manilla is recommended,
ti or Jg inch rope can be used.

One Fork Pulley. 1 Trip Block, 1 Rope Swivel furnished with Carrie
Weight, 28 pounds.

In the past 4x4 Wood Tracks for hay
carriers were installed in a considerable
number of barns. This was when wood
was cheap and steel high in price. At the
present time a wood hay track is rarely
placed in a building. The steel tracks are
as cheap as wood, they occupy less room
and hay carriers work so much easier and
smoother on the steel that it is a mistake
to put wood track in a building.

Where track is already in the building
or where for some special reason it is de-
sired to use a Wood Track, no better carrier
can be put into service than the Louden
Junior Wood Track Carrier.

This carrier is built exactly like the
Louden Junior Fork Carrier for steel track
(Fig. 430, page 8). except it is built to
operate on a 4x4 wood track instead of
on steel track.

The carrier is suitable for use in any
style of barn. Where hay is taken up at
the end of building it works easily and
smoothly as a One- Way Carrier. It is a
Swivel Frame Carrier and in barns having a
center driveway it is easily and quickly re-
versed to work on either side.

The carrier has the wide flaring mouth
and the round top fork pulley of all Louden
carriers. The fork pulley never fails to
enter the carrier at the proper time. The
wide flaring inouth of the carrier receives
the pulley no matter from what angle the
fork is drawn and regardless of swinging
load or twisting ropes.

The grappling hooks in the carrier take a deep grip in the frame of the fork pulley. They grip the
pulley securely, at the same time permitting the pulley to swing freely. This permits the mow to be filled
clear up to the track without danger of breaking the pulley.

The frame of the carrier is of refined malleable iron built sturdy and strong to handle heavy loads.
The members are clamped securely together with bolts; there is no possibility of the frame spreading or
breaking under the strain of heavy loads.

Page Thirteen

mTnTDmrmrmTmrTTTnii

Louden Carry- All Sling Carrier Fig. 1103

Specifications

The heaviest and

s t ron gest Hay

SHng Carrier made

For use in any type

or size of barn.
Built to operate on

Louden Double

Bead Steel Track.
Diameter of Rope Wheel in carrier, 10 inches.
Diameter of Rope Wheel in sling pulleys, 4 inches
Rope Wheel in carrier is roller bearing.
Diameter of Track Wheels on tread. 3 inches.
Track wheels are not roller bearing.
Bearing surface on track (distance between front and

rear axles), 191 2 inches.
Total length of carrier, 22 'i inches.
Carries slings within 26 inches of the track.
Frame of carrier of refined malleable iron.
Rope and track wheels special quality gray iron.
Safe working capacity. 2,500 pounds.
Seven-eighths inch best manilla rope is recommended
Three-quarter inch rope may be used.
Two Sling Pulleys. 1 Trip Block, 2 End Stop Blocks furn

with each earner.
Weight. 77 pounds.

(See pages 30 and 31 for Track and Track Fittings.)

The Carry-All Hay Sling Carrier, as its name
implies, was built to carry big loads of all kinds of
hay. The importance of the hay crop and its
increasing value from year to year is resulting in a
larger acreage and more tons of hay in all the hay-
growing regions. The necessity of being prepared
to handle the hay with speed and safety when the
weather is right and the hay is right has developed
the need for heavier equipment.

In many of the heavy hay-growing sections
farmers are building larger barns and with roof
construction strong enough to permit an entire
wagon load of hay to be handled at a single lift.
With a desire to furnish a carrier that would do
this work in the big hay barns and at the same
time be suitable for use in the ordinary farm barn
we designed the Carry-All Sling Carrier.

This carrier has been tested under loads weighing
3,200 pounds. It has been tried with horse power,
engine power, and electric power. It has been tried
out in barns of all sizes and under all kinds of conditions. It is already
barns and in every test the carrier proved its efficiency, its strength, and its

Fig. 523

Illustration shows our
patent End Stop for Double
Bead Steel Track. Two are
furnished with the Carry-All
Sling Carrier.

Fig. 1103 (Heavy)

Patent ^ending

Fig. 1123
Trip Block for Carry-All
Sling Carrier. One is fur-
nished as a part of each
carrier.

making good in hundreds of
perfect working mechanism.

Non-Wear Rope Lock

The Rope Lock in this carrier is positive and sure. There is no chance for the rope to slip. The lock
will not wear the rope as it grips it evenly. The Rope Lock castings have a bearing of 9 inches on the
rope. They conform to the diameter of the Rope Wheel and when the Rope Lock goes into action engaging
the rope for a distance of 9 inches and bending it around the outside of the Rope Wheel the rope cannot
slip. Handling a dead weight (steel pipe) of 3,200 pounds the rope did not slip the fraction of an inch.

The end of the draft rope is knotted into the cup-shaped rope swivel which rests in the fulcrum lever.
The fulcrum le^er exerts a direct pressure on the rope lock. When carrying a load the weight of the load
is held on top of the rope lock. The heavier the load the more securely does the lock hold.

Page Fourteen

William Louden, Pioneer Hay
Tool Inventor and Manufacturer.
Is Popularly Known as "" The
Man Who Made High Barns
Possible." Imagine, if You
Can, Filling These Mows with
Pitchforks.

':^

^^^^Effi

Ctoss Section View and Description of Locking
Mechanism in Carry-All Hay Sling Carrier.

A portion of tlie frame is broken away to show
the arrangement of the grip to hold the hoisting
rope and prevent the sling load from dropping down
while the carrier is running along the track.

Carry-All Sling Carrier — Continued

The work of the Rope Lock is supplemented by a ratchet lock on the Rope Wheel. When the Rope
Lock goes into action the ratchet lever drops into place and prevents the Rope Wheel from turnmg
backward. This aids the Rope Lock and prevents wear on the rope.

Ten-Inch Roller-Bearing Rope Wheel

The Rope Wheel in the Carry-All Carrier is 10 inches in
diameter and is roller bearing. This is the largest Rope
Wheel used in any hay carrier and is an important improve-
ment. The large roller-bearing wheel reduces friction and
makes it possible to lift heavier loads with less power.
Also the empty sling can be brought back to the wagon
with less effort and pulling on the ropes than any other
sling carrier.

The frame of the carrier is of the Louden Swivel Type.
The same principle is used in the swivel as in use on all
our swivel carriers. (See Fig. 7, page II.) It will work
with equal satisfaction and efficiency in barns having a
center driveway or where hay is taken up at one end. In
center-drive barns the change from one end to the other is
easily and quickly made. The pulley in one end of the
barn is changed over to the other end; the carrier can then
be swiveled around from the barn floor. No climbing up
to the carrier necessary.

The track wheels are 3 inches in diameter on tread and
are heavy and of great strength. There are eight track
wheels on each carrier working on oscillating "engine
trucks". This distributes the load evenly on the track
and insures that every wheel is going to run true and carry
its share of the load.

The sling pulleys carry the load at right angles to the
track. This is important as the hay is delivered into the
mow just as it comes from the wagon. When the hay is
dropped it spreads out broadly at right angles to the track,
requiring less labor and time to mow it back.

The locking dog in the carrier has a square catch which
engages the trip block bolted to the track. The carrier is
held positively on the trip while the load is being elevated.
When the load is pulled up and the sling pulleys strike the
trip stirrup the carrier automatically releases from the trip,
the rope lock is thrown into action holding the load so it
cannot slip back. When the carrier leaves the trip it runs
easily and steadily and after the hay is dropped in the mow
the carrier is returned to the trip block with scarcely an
effort. (We recommend using a weight return for returning
the empty carrier. See Fig. 529, page 1 9.)

The Louden Carry-All Hay Sling Carrier, the Louden
Carry-All Hay Sling (see Fig. 984, page 42), and a Louden
Power Hoist (page 34), make the best hay-unloading outfit
ever offered for handling big loads of hay.

Closing The

Hay Door With A

Sling Carrier

When it is desired to close the hay mow door
with the Carry-All. or any similar sling carrier, the
sling pulleys should be attached to the door in the
manner shown by Fig. 1302.

The door should be lifted from about the middle
instead of from a point near the top; otherwise the
pulleys will be drawn so far to one side that they
will not release the carrier properly.

A short piece of rope, with a loop at the free end
to hook the pulleys into, should be attached to the
doors by means of an eye-bolt or U-bolt. 1 1 should
be long enough to permit the sling pulleys to trip
the carrier when the door 's at an angle of about 45
degrees. For the Carry-All Sling Carrier about 4
feet of rore is required for a 10-foot door, and 5
feet for a 12-foot door.

When the carrier leaves the trip it is drawn
along the track far enough to close the door.

Page Seventeen

Louden Iowa Sling Carrier— Fig. 821

^

Fig. 523

Illustration shows our patent Ejid
Stop for Double Bead Steel Track.
Two are furnished with each Iowa Sling
Carrier.

Adjustable Trip. Fig. 1128
Illustration shows our patent Adjust-
able Trip. One is furnished with each
Iowa Sling Carrier.

Fig. 1123
Illustration shows Trip Block for
Iowa Sling Carrier. One is furnished as
a part of each Carrier.

Fig. 821 (Chariot)
Specifications

For use in einy style of bam.

Built to operate on Louden Double Bead Steel Track.

Diameter of Rope Wheels in carrier and sling pulleys, 4 inches.

Diameter of Track Wheels on tread, 2 '4 inches.

Bearing surface on track (distance between front and rear

axles), \A14 inches.
Total length of carrier. \9}4 inches.
Carries slings within 26 inches of track.
Frame of carrier refined malleable iron.
Rope and Track Wheels special quality gray iron.
Safe working capacity. 2.000 pounds.

Rope Lock is adjustable to different size ropes.

Three-quarter inch best manilla rope is recommended

Illustration shows carrier with Right-angle Sling Pulleys
which we recommend.

Parallel Sling Pulleys (Fig. 649. page 48) may be used if pre-
ferred.

Two Sling Pulleys, I Trip Block, 1 Trip Adjuster, and 2 End
Stop Blocks are furnished with each carrier.

Weight, 47 pounds.

(See pages 30 and 31 for Track and Track Fittings.)

Page Eighteen

■■.U.'lJ».i{h.'t

ELD. IOWA

Louden Iowa Sling Carrier — Continued

For simplicity of design and mechanism and for positive, dependable action the Iowa SHng Carrier
ranks with the foremost. It was designed for heavy, everyday work in the hay barn. It has gone through
a dozen or more hay harvests; is doing satisfactory service in thousands of barns, and is pleasing its users.

The carrier is of the Louden swivel frame type. It can be
used with perfect success in any type of barn and is particularly
well adapted for use in barns having a center driveway. In center
drive barns the carrier can be changed from one side to the other
in a minute's time and without climbing up to the carrier or
pulling the ropes through. The pulley in the end of the barn is
changed from one end to the other and the carrier frame swiveled
around on the stop from the barn floor by a swinging pull on the
ropes.

The frame of the carrier is of refined malleable iron. Heavy
strengthening webs are used where strength is necessary. At all
points where heaviest strain is exerted castings are reinforced to
give needed strength. The mechanism of the carrier (the rope
lock and the latching dogs and parts) is extremely simple. There
is nothing to get out of order and the parts are all easily accessible.

There are eight track wheels on each carrier operating on
oscillating "engine trucks." This distributes the weight of the
load evenly on the track and insures that every wheel will do its
full share of the work. The wheels are bored smooth and true
and turn on ^-inch milled axles and will not bind or run hard.

The rope lock has a long bearing surface on the rope. When
the carrier is tripped the rope lock instantly grips the rope and
holds it firmly. There is no slipping, nor wear on the rope. The
rope lock is adjustable to different size ropes.

Each carrier is provided with an adjustable trip. This trip is placed on the draft rope (see illustration)
and is adjustable to different heights. By this means the carrier may be released and the load carried into
the mow at any height. Unless, on account of beams or hay already in the mow, it is not necessary to lift
the load clear up to the track.

In opt ration, when the sling pulleys or the adjustable trip strikes the release lever, the locking device
drops down and the carrier moves away from the stop smoothly and steadily. In the same operation the
rope lock is thrown on and holds the load until the sling is tripped. When the carrier is brought back to
the stop the rope lock is released and the weight of the pulleys and sling brings them down to the wagon.

Hay forks may be used with this carrier by using the fork clevis described on page 45, Fig. 633.

Fig. 528

Fig. 528 is a sectional view showing the
locking mechanism in the Iowa Shng
Carrier and also how the carrier is
threaded. Pulleys G and J are mounted
on Tilting Frame E pivoted at P. The
Brake F is pivotly connected with the
tilting frame, forming a knee joint, which
grips the rope between the Brake F and
Pulley J when the carrier is tripped. Brake
F is held free from the rope while the load
is being elevated by Bolt B attached to
Locking Dog A, which operates with the
track stop.

Louden Weight Return

r^s^uas

Fig. 5Z9> Weight 3 pounds.

Specifications

Weight, 3 pounds.

A Weight Return for returning the carrier to the trip
block after the load has been deposited in the mow is
desirable with all hay carriers, especially so in long or high
barns.

The Weight Return brings the carrier back to the trip
block promptly, and always with enough force to securely
latch the carrier.

Fig. 529 shows End Weight Return attached to carrier
and arranged for End Hoist barn. It shows our improved
Return Pulley R on wire guy. Clamp Hook H and Pulley P.
A wire guy is preferable to a rope guy.

In ordering, state kind of track used to get Hook H to
fit it. A bag of sand is the best weight to use.

Page Nineteen

Louden Reversible Sling Carrier — Fig. 315

(For Wood Track)

Fig. 315
Specifications

Operates on 4x4 wood track.

For use in any style of barn.

Diameter of Rope Wheels. 4'^ inches.

Diameter of Track Wheels, 3 inches.

Bearing surface on track (distance between front and rear axles), 1 5

inches.
Total length of Carrier, 18 inches.
Carries slings within 19 inches of the track.
Frame of Carrier refined malleable iron.
Rope and Track Wheels special quality gray iron.
Safe working capacity. 2.000 pounds.
Three-fourths inch best Manilla Rope is recommended.
One pair Sling Pulleys. 1 Trip Block, I Rope Hook. I Comb Pulley,

I Lift Link furnished with Carrier.
Weight, 52 pounds.

The Reversible Sling Carrier is a
strong, dependable carrier built to
operate on 4x4 wood track. In the
illustration the carrier is shown with
parallel sling pulleys rigged triple
draft.

The mechanism of the carrier is
very simple and compact. There is
a double rope lock, each lock having
a long bearing surface on the rope.
When the load is elevated, and the
sling pulleys strike the trip stirrup, the
rope locks go into action holding the
load secure. There is no chance for
the load to slip back and wear on the
rope is reduced to a minimum.

The Carrier is fitted with eight
track wheels. The wheel arms are
heavy and strong and will not spread
under the weight of heavy loads.

The Trip Blocks are adjustable.
Two or more trips can be used on the
same track and as many of them as
desired can be lifted up to allow the
carrier to pass through. The frame
of the carrier is of the straight reversi-
ble (not swivel) type. To reverse the
carrier for work in the opposite mow,
the draft rope is pulled through the
carrier. The end of the rope at D is
carried through pulley at end of barn
and from there, on down to the horse
or team. The other end of the rope
is fastened in the eye, A, in the sling
pulley.

Fig. 435 (Perch)

One Comb Pulley Furnished with Each Revers-
ible Wood Track Carrier.

Fig. 383 (Excelsior)

One Rope Hook Furnished

with Each Reversible

Wood Track Carrier.

One Trip Block Furnished
with Each Reversible
Wood Track Carrier.

Page Twenty

LOUDEN HAY TOOLS

Have Proved Their Wortli In

Field and Barn. They Have

Been the World's Standard

for Fifty Years.

Louden Cross Draft Hay Carrier—Fig. 817

(For Sling or Fork)

The Louden Cross
Draft Hay Carrier is built
compact and strong
enough to carry the
heaviest sHng load, and
at the same time is en-
tirely practical for fork use.

This carrier works on a differ-
ent principle from that of ordin-
ary hay carriers. The draft rope,
instead of running parallel with
the track, runs at right angles to
it, passing down to the team or hoist in the most
direct manner. The draft rope is used for one
purpose only — to elevate the load. After the
sling or fork is elevated to the desired height,
the carrier is pulled along the track by means
of a shift rope, which runs along the track to ,_ ,
the end of the barn and over pulleys down to t^"^ ^,*°P ^1°''^'

...U^ 4.L J. L • L 1 Two are furnished with

where the team or hoist works. ^^,h Cross Draft

With this plan the team travels only half Carrier

as far as with the ordinary carrier. When the team is walking
out from the barn, it is hoisting the load; when the load
reaches the proper height, the shift rope is hooked to the team
and as the return to the barn is made the carrier is pulled
along the track into the mow. As there is a shift rope on
each side of the carrier, one is always ready to use to return
the empty carrier, no matter into which mow the hay has
been carried.

For handling slings the carrier should be rigged with sling
pulleys, as shown in the illustration. For fork use the sling
pulleys would be replaced with the Louden Fork Pulley. (See
Fig. 366, page 51.) If a Louden Fork Pulley is not at hand,
any common pulley can be used.

The carrier is provided with an automatic lock. This lock
will hold' the hay suspended at any height. When the load is
elevated high enough to pass into the mow, the team is stopped
and turned back toward the barn. The end of the idle shift
rope is attached to the singletree and as the team returns
to the starting place, the carrier is drawn along the track to
the end of the barn.

The Cross Draft Carrier has many advantages over ordinary
carriers. The draft is more direct, it requires about one-half
less draft rope and as it passes over only one large sheave in
the Carrier there is less friction, thus requiring less power to
elevate the load. The horse has to walk only about half as
far and gets back quicker, thus saving time and also space in

Fig. 817 (Chaste!

Patented July 25, 191 1

Specifications

Recommended for use in barns where hay is

elevated from a center driveway.
Built to handle hay slings, but will handle hay

fork with equal satisfaction.
Operates on Louden Double Bead Steel Track.
Diameter of the Rope Wheel in carrier, 6 inches.
Diameter of the Rope Wheels in sling pulley or

fork pulley, 4 inches.
Diameter of Track Wheels on tread, 3 inches.
Bearing surface on track (distance between

front and rear eixles), 16 inches.
Total length of Carrier, 21 inches.
Carries slings or fork within 2 1 inches of the track
Frame of the carrier of refined malleable iron.
Rope and track wheels special quality gray iron.
Safe working capacity, 2.000 pounds.
Seven-eighths-inch best manilla rope is recom-
mended, and urged for use with this carrier.
Thirteen-sixteenths-inch rope can be used, but

'g-inch is better.
Two-Sling Pulleys. I Release block, 1 3-Part

Rope Hitch. 2 Swivel Rope Hooks, 2 End

Stop Blocks, furnished with each carrier.

Unless otherwise specified sling pulleys will be

furnished with the carrier.
If Hay Fork is to be used, fork pulley (Fig. 366,

page 51) will be furnished instead of sling

pulleys.

Weight for sling use, 49 pounds.

Weight for fork use. 42 pounds.

Page Twenty-two

Louden Cross Draft Hay Carrier — Continued

Fig. 822

the barnyard. The lock is entirely automatic and will hold at any
height, so the load does not have to be elevated any higher than is
necessary to let it pass into the mow. The empty Sling comes down
easier and quicker than with ordinary sling carriers. It does not
start into the mow with a jerk and cause loose hay to shake off,
but goes in smoothly and steadily.

Cross Draft Carrier in Center Hoist Barn

Fig. 822 shows our Cross Draft Carrier at work in a center hoist
barn. The sling load has been elevated by the Draft Rope D until it is high enough to pass into the
mow, the automatic lock in the carrier holding it at any desired height. The Shift Rope C has
been connected to the trip of the Rope Hook, the horses have been turned back toward the barn and
the Sling load is being drawn into the right-hand end of the barn and the operator is ready to trip it
when it reaches the proper place. The draft rope is first secured to the Spring Clevis E of the Carrier
B by means of our patent swivel, then passed down through the Sling Pulleys P, then up through the
carrier and on through the Draft Pulleys F and G and is connected to the Rope Hook. The Shift Rope
C is fastened to one of the swivel eyes on the carrier, and is then passed through the Shift Pulleys I,
J, K, and L.

In elevating the hay the team is driven from the Pulley G to or past the Pulley L, as may be required
by the distance the hay is to be elevated, and in turning back, the shift rope is connected to the trip of
the Rope Hook, which draws the carrier with its load into the mow as the team is driven to
the barn. The shift rope is then tripped from the rope hook, the carrier is drawn back to the Release
Block A, by the Weight W, when the empty sling will descend of its own weight, and when
unhooked from the Pulleys P everything will be ready for another load.

The instant the horses stop, or if a singletree or anything else should break, the lock takes the weight
of the load and holds it securely without a particle of slipping. While loaded, the lock is always in
position to hold the load at any point of elevation.

The carrier will work without the Release Block A by removing the lock-latch, but it works much better
with it, as by this means the empty sling or fork can not drop down in the mow. This is a fault

Page Twenty-three

Cross Draft Carrier in Center Hoist — Continued

that all other cross draft carriers have and we have entirely overcome it by the use of this lock-latch in
the carrier and the Release Block A on the track. The carrier does not have to stand over the release
block in elevating the load, notwithstanding this is its usual position. It may stand on either side or be
drawn across it, without any effect when loaded, but it will always release the lock when the carrier
is empty. In this way the empty fork or sHng is prevented from dropping down in the mow, while the
lock will always be released to permit them to descend at the proper place.

The stake to which Pulley L is fastened should be set far enough out in the yard to permit the team,
after turning back, to draw the carrier to the end of the mow before getting too close to the Pulley G,
and there should be 10 feet extra to connect the shift rope easily and quickly to the trip of the Hook
H. The longer the barn, the farther away the Pulley L must be set.

To take the hay into the other end of the barn, remove the Weight W from the Shift Rope O which is
connected to the swivel eye on the other side of the carrier and is passed through the Shift Pulleys M
and N. Withdraw the Shift Rope C from the Pulleys K and L and attach to it the
Weight W. Now run the Shift Rope O through the Pulley K (as shown by dotted
line) and then through the Pulley L, and you are ready for business in the other end
\H of the barn. It may be better to use a separate rope out in the barn yard, which

may be done by using a hitch similar to A, Fig. 819. When this is done the Shift
Ropes C and O will only have to be long enough to pass through the Pulley K.

Louden's Cross Draft Rope Hook

Fig. 819 represents our Cross Draft Rope Hook, which is an important part of the
outfit, for upon its convenience and quickness of operation considerable depends.
^ The Draft Rope D is secured, as shown, to the main part of the Hook H, while the
BWyj^ /^ "^ Shift Rope C is fastened to the Hitch F, which in turn is hooked in the Trip Hook A.
y This is held in place and tripped by the Latch E, having an Eye B to which the Trip

"^ Cord T is connected. The shift rope is much more easily and quickly connected to

^^ and tripped from our rope hook than the devices used with other cross draft carriers.

When the hay reaches the proper height to pass into the mow, the team is turned
back toward the barn and the Hitch F is readily and quickly slipped over the Trip
Hook A; and when the hay has reached the point of deposit in the mow, a slight
D iSS! JBQi pull on the trip cord will disengage the Latch E, and release the Shift Rope C. In this

Tc way the hay will not be drawn beyond the proper place and frequently the hay

will be discharged, the carrier returned and the empty sling or fork brought down to
'^' the load by the time the team gets back to the barn.

Louden's Cross Draft Hay Carrier

Outfit for 60-foot barn, 40-foot peak

Fig. Page

1 Cross Draft Carrier 817 22

54 feet of Double Bead Steel Track 571 30

7 High-Grade Draft Pulleys 468 49

1 Upriglit Floor Pulley 364 50

30 Steel Track Hangers 498 30

30 Rafter Brackets 424 31

5 Rafter Pulley Hooks 390 52

1 Floor Pulley Hook 389 52

2 Hoisting Singletrees 344 53

I Rope Spreader Attacliment 345 53

Three slings are generally used, but in place of these, one sling and two harpoon forks or one grapple
fork may be used.

To get correct length of draft rope, multiply distance from floor to peak of barn by 3 and add 20
feet. To get right amount of shift rope multiply length of barn by 2; also distance from floor to peak
by 2 and add 20 feet. If extra rope is used out in yard make this the length of longest mow, with half
the width of driveway added. If not, add this length to total length of shift rope.

Five-eighths is best for the shift rope. Three-quarters will answer, but is more expensive and being
heavier makes the carrier harder to draw back. To get correct length of trip cord, take length of longest
mow and add 25 feet. Set post for Pulley L out 10 feet further than half length of barn.

Page Twenty-four

Thf LOUDEN MACHINERY COMPANY

Louden Round Barn Hay Unloading Outfits

Within recent years there has been much discussion regarding the advantages and
disadvantages of round barns. It is not our purpose in this catalog to enter into a dis-
cussion of the merits of such buildings. We know that in certain localities round barns
have come into favor and one of the problems in connection with these buildings has
been the hay unloading outfit. Operating a hay carrier on a straight-away track and
operating a hay carrier on a circle track are two entirely different propositions. It was
our business to provide successful tools for unloading hay on the circle track. We have
perfected hay unloading equipment to meet every condition in the round barn and with
which hay may be handled and stored as quickly, as cheaply, as easily, and as safely as
in rectangular barns.

Louden Round Barn Hay Carrier — Fig. 1104

(For Fork or Slings)
Specifications

The only suc-
cessful hay fork
and hay shng
carrier made for
circle track.

For use in
round barns of
all sizes.

Built to oper-
ate on Louden
Double Bead
steel track only.

Diameter of
rope wheel in
carrier, 6 inches.

Diameter of
rope wheels in
sling pulley and
fork pulley, 4
inches.

Diameter of track wheels on tread, 3 inches.

Track wheels are supported on heavy truck castings
attached to main frame of carrier by means of strong swivel
connection.

Bearing surface on track (distance between front and
rear axles), 16 inches.

Total length of carrier, 21 inches.

Carries slings or fork within 21 inches of the track.

Frame of carrier of refined malleable iron.

Rope and track wheels special quality gray iron.

Safe working capacity, 2,000 pounds.

Note: Five-inch link track hangers (Fig. 832, page 30)
should always be ordered for circle track for round barns.

Seven-eighths inch best manila rope is recommended
and urged for use with this carrier.

Thirteen-sixteenths inch rofje may be used but J g inch
is better.

Two sling pulleys, I release block, 2 end stop blocks, 2
swivel rope hooks furnished with this carrier.

Unless otherwise specified, parallel sling pulleys will
always be furnished with this carrier.

If hay fork is to be used fork pulley (Fig. 366, page 51 )
will be furnished instead of sling pulleys.

Weight for sling use, 57 pounds.

Weight for fork use, 50 pounds.

Fig. 1131 (Release Block)
One is furnished with each Round Barn Carrier.

Fig. 523 End Stop Block

Two are furnished as a part of
each Round Barn Carrier.

Fig. 1104
(Round)

Patented July 25. 1911.

Fig. 383 (Excelsior)

Two Rope Hooks
furnished with each
Round Barn Car-
rier.

Page Twenty-five

^^^^^o

Louden Round Barn Hay Carrier — Continued

Fig. 1135-A
Patent Pending
Illustration, Fig. 1135-A, shows a short section of track, a hay carrier, and a guide pulley
for round barn. The guide pulleys are placed just far enough away from the track so the hay
carrier will pass by. When the front shift rope pulls the carrier past the guide pulley, the follow-
ing shift rope (the tail rope) is brought into position in the pulley ready to pull the carrier in
the opposite direction.

The Round Barn Hay Carrier works on the same principle as the Cross Draft
Hay Carrier described on page 22. The main draft rope, instead of running
parallel with and along the track, runs at right angles to the track and passes
down to the team or hoist in the most direct manner. The draft rope is used solely
to elevate the hay and not to pull the carrier along the track. With the draft rope passing directly from the
carrier to the team or hoist, only about half as much draft rope is required as with an ordinary hay carrier.
This also greatly reduces friction, as the rope does not have to pass over so many pulleys, making it
possible to lift heavier loads with less power.

Independent shift ropes are used for pulling the carrier along the track. Good quality 5 8-inch rope is
suitable for shift ropes. Two of these ropes are necessary, one end of each rope being attached to opposite
sides of the carrier, the other end passing around the guide pulleys and continuing to the hoist or to the
team and weight return as the case may be.

Where engine or electric power is at hand, this outfit used in connection with a Louden Triple Drum
Power Hoist (see Fig. I 1 32, page 35) makes the most complete and perfect hay unloading outfit ever installed
in any barn. The lower end of the main draft rope is connected to the main drum of the hoist. The lower
end of each of the shift ropes is attached to the respective two smaller drums of the hoist.

The main drum of the hoist is used to elevate the load. It is not necessary to raise the load up to the
track unless beams or hay already in the mow interfere. The load can be stopped at any height and can be
carried in either direction from the driveway at will. The instant the tension is released on the draft rope
the rope lock goes into action and will catch and hold the load. If it is desired to carry the hay to the
right, the right hand drum, and if to the left, the left hand drum, is brought into action. This pulls the
carrier along the track and when the load is dropped the opposite drum is brought into play and the empty
carrier is returned to the release block. The entire operation is extremely simple and the hoist can be
handled by anyone.

Page Twenty-six

'^^iT^^')"'^^-*-^^^*^'**-*'*'^;^

Louden Round Barn Hay Carrier — Continued

We furnish the track bent to form a circle track of any diameter.
Each section of the track is put through a bending machine, and is
bent uniform and true, and without kinking the flange or injury to the
track. We furnish suitable hangers for supporting the track from
rafters or from purlin plate as desired. It should be remembered that
the higher up in the building the track is placed the easier it will be
to fill the mow full.

Special guide pulleys are used for holding the shift ropes in parallel
position with the track. These pulleys are furnished mounted on a
board (see Fig 1 1 35A, page 26), and are easy to put in place. The pulley
sheave or rope wheel is mounted in a malleable iron casing and sup-
ported by steel braces. The pulley is mounted in a slightly tilted
position ; also, the lower pulley casing extends beyond and slightly upward
in front of the rope wheel, thus holding the shift ropes in position. Even
should the ropes become very slack they will not fall out of the pulley.

Where a complete circle track is installed, seven or eight or more guide pulleys should be used. The
purpose of the guide pulleys is to carry the shift rope as nearly parallel with the track as possible. The
number of pulleys necessary is determined by the diameter of the track. Always enough pulleys should be
used so the carrier will be pulled straight ahead, not sideways.

Where there is a silo in the center of the building, it would be necessary to detach one shift rope from
the hoist and carry it around the silo when changing to work the carrier in the opposite mow. This change
is easily made, requiring only two or three minutes' time.

This rig can be used with horse power instead of the hoist and when so used the arrangement of ropes
would be only slightly changed. Instead of one shift rope passing around the complete circle, as shown
with hoist, both shift ropes would pass over pulleys and be arranged to correspond with the arrangement
in rectangular barns. (See Fig. 822, page 23.)

This special unloading outfit for round barns will do satisfactory work in barns of all sizes. Hay forks
or hay slings can be used and the rig will handle heavy loads of all kinds of hay.

Fig. 1135
Guide Pulley

Specifications

Length of mounting block. 36 inches.
Width of mounting block. 12 inches.
Depth of mounting block, 12' 2 inches.
Diameter of pulley. 6' 2 inches.
Weight, complete. 26} 2 pounds.

Garden City, Minn., June 6, 1916.
Louden Machinery Co., St. Paul, Minn.
Gentlemen: -ri u

We are well pleased with the entire outfit that we have of yours in our round barn. The Hay
Carrier outfit works to a " T." In fact the intire equipment is O. K.

Yours truly, Lester Fleming.

Fig. 430H

Junior Round Barn Fork
Carrier — Fig. 430t

Where it is desired to use an ordinary type of
fork hay carrier in a round barn, we recommend the
Junior Fork carrier, same as described on page 8,
except that it is fitted with special extra heavy
swivel trucks. The swivel trucks permit the track
wheels to adjust themselves to the bend of the
track so there is no excessive wear and no binding
on the track. Aside from the swivel trucks, this
carrier is exactly the same as the Junior Carrier,
Fig 430, described on page 8, and will give com-
plete satisfaction wherever used.

Pago Twenty-seven

FAIRFIELD. IOWA
=SS^

Louden Junior Hay Fork Carrier For Cable Track — Fig. 621

Specifications

For stacking hay in the field.

Built to operate on ^ g inch or

Diameter of rope wheels 4 inches.

Diameter of track wheels on tread. 3I4 inches.

Bearing surface on track (distance between

front and rear axles). 10 inches.
Total length of carrier, 14 inches.
Carries fork within 13 inches of the track.
Frame of carrier of refined malleable iron.
Rope and Track Wheels special quality gray iron.
J4 inch best manilla rope is recommended.
!l or J^ inch rope may be used.
Safe working capacity 1 .000 pounds.
One Fork Pulley, I Trip Block, I Rope Swivel,

furnished with carrier.
Weight, 24 pounds.

This Carrier was designed for use in
connection with the Louden CableRicker
for staciiing hay. It operates on a wire
cable track ( ^ j inch or 3 2 inch diameter)
and does its work as nearly perfect as
can be. It is built along the same gen-
eral lines as the Louden Junior Carrier

for steel track. _ It is compactly and stoutly built, its working parts
are extremely simple and it never fails to work right.

The poles at the end and the cable track above also act as
guides for building the stack. Stacks of any size up to 60 feet in
length can be built with the cable ricker. We furnish the cable in any
lengths desired. The cable should be allowed to extend to the ground, on the outside of the poles, at each end,
thus forming guys. Forty feet of cable should be allowed outside of the poles at each end. Where 30-
foot poles are used and a 50-foot stack is to be built, 140 feet of cable would be required. This allows
room to drive the load of hay inside the poles and thus secure a straight lift up to the carrier. Where
poles longer than 30 feet are used add 2 feet of cable for each added foot of pole length.

We do not furiiish poles as they cannot conveniently be shipped by local freight. Poles should be
5 to 6 inches in diameter at the top and 30 feet or more in length.

This cable ricker is easy to set up, easy to move from place to place, and when not in use the metal
parts can be stored in small space. With ordinary care the outfit will 'ast many years.

(Combine

Fig. C430-A

Patent Rope Swivel.
One is furnished as a
part of each Junioi
Carrier.

Trip Block. Fig. 801 (March)

One is furnished as a part of each Cable Carrier.

Louden Cable Ricker Outfit

For Stack 50 Feet Long

1 Louden Junior Cable Carrier Fig. 62 1

1 Louden 6-Tine Balance Grapple Fork (page 38) Fig. 35 1

140 feet 5'S-'nch Galvanized Steel Wire Rope Fig. 417

2 High-Grade Draft Pulleys (page 49 J Fig. 468

2 Cable Loop Clamps Pig 337

4 Cable Stop Clamps Fig. 3371/^

The H-inch size Galvanized Steel Wire Rope. Fig. 417. or the 'finch size Galvanized Wire Strand may be substituted
for the ^g-inch size Wire Rope specified above if desired.

170 ft. 5;4-inch Manilla Draft Rope and 90 feet Jg-inch Trip Rope would be required with this outfit.

We do not furnish poles.

Page Twenty-eight

Louden Cable Ricker — Continued

Galvanized Steel Wire Rope

Fig. 417 (May)

Fig. 418 (June)

Size, as may be desired. We recommend the heavier size.
Either Fig. 417 or Fig. 418 may be used as the track for the
Carrier. Fig. 417 maltes the best track, but is more expensive.
Five-eighth inch size: Weight per 100 ft.. 76 pounds. One-
half inch size: Weight per hundred feet, 61 pounds.

Galvanized Steel Strand, >^-in. Diameter

Fig. 418 is composed of seven No. 8 Wires. Estimated
breaking strain about four tons. This makes a cheaper track
than the Galvanized Steel Wire Rope and is used quite often.
Weight per 1 00 feet, 50 pounds.

Cable Clamps

Fig. 337 is our Wire Cable Loop Clamp and is used to make a loop at
the end of the cable. Two of these should be used with each stacker.
Weight each, \'l pounds.

The Wire Cable Stop Clamp, Fig. 337^, is placed on the wire cable
track at either side of the poles at the end of the stack to hold the upper
ends of the poles securely in position. Four of these Clamps are used for
each stacker. Weight each, I pound.

These clamps are made of malleable iron and are held together with two
good, strong bolts, which grip the cable firmly so that they will not slip.

Fig. 337 (Porto)

^^S

Fig. 337}^ (Rico)

Page Twenty-nine

. I— t e: C3

^^Sffly*^ rAlRFIELD. IOWA ^JVJI^Z:

Louden Steel Track and Track Fixtures

For Hay Carriers

Fig. 571 (Clara) Fig. 550 (Mohler)

Louden Double Bead Steel Track — Fig. 571

Fig. 571 shows a section of Louden Double Bead Steel Track. This track is a special quality high
carbon steel. It is 2 inches wide, i y\ inches high and, properly supported every 24 inches, it will safely
carry a load of 3000 pounds. Weight, per foot, 2 pounds.

Splice Clamp for Double Bead Steel — Fig. 550

Fig. 550 is the Splice Clamp for Louden Double Bead Steel Track. It is of malleable iron and is
held firmly in place on the under side of the track by four bolts. It is easily attached, holds the flanges
of the track level and makes it just as strong at the joint as at any other point. Care should be used to
see that the nuts on the four bolts are drawn tight. After the nuts have apparently been made tight,
the bolts should be set by striking them a heavy blow on the head with a hammer. After this is done
it will be found the nuts can be drawn still tighter and the clamps will hold securely.

Enough clamps for the track are furnished with every shipment.

Weight, each, I 'a pounds.

Louden Track Hangers

Fig. 498. I^ouden Standard Track
Bead Steel Track. Made of malleable
securely clamped together by short, heavy bolt

Weight, per dozen, 6 pounds.

Fig. 500. Louden Light Track Hanger for Double Bead
Steel Track. Made of malleable iron, in two parts, securely
clamped together by short, heavy bolt. The same style as
the Louden Standard Hanger except not so heavy.

Weight, per dozen, 43^2 pounds.

Fig. 832. Link Track Hanger (5-inch) for Double Bead
Steel Track. The clamp is of malleable iron, the link of steel.
This hanger is for use any place but is particularly adapted
to uneven ceilings. Standard length of link, 5 inches. Can
be furnished any length desired.

Hanger for Double
iron, in two parts.

Fig. 498
(Carson)

Fig. 500
(Camp)

Fig. 832
Pat. Sept. 1 . 1

908

Weight, 5-inch link, per dozen, 6 pounds.

South Haven. Minn.. July 2, 1916
The Louden Machinery Company,

Fairfield, Iowa
Gentlemen :

I would be pleased to get your new General Catalog.

I have replaced a . . . . Hay Carrier and track with the Louden Junior on account of jumping track and bad
registering when rope was twisty.

The Louden hugs the rail under all conditions. The swivel takes the kink out of the rope. It is hard to beat.

Yours truly,

Ph. Block.

Ruthton. Minn., June 28. 1916.
The Louden Machinery Company,

Fairfield. Iowa.
Gentlemen : ui t i J

I am pleased to say that 1 am well satisfied with your barn equipment. I bought from you Hay Track and
Carrier. Litter Carrier, Steel Stanchions, Cupolas, etc. Everything is handy and works fine. Will be pleased to
recommend it to everybody who wants to improve their barn with this modern equipment.

Yours truly.

Andrew Madsen.

Page Thirty

Track and Track Fixtures — Continued

Fig. 780. Straight Hang Hook for
wood track. Made of 5-inch steel rod'
and furnished in two lengths.

Weight, 1 4-inch size, per dozen, iOJ^

«

Fig. 372 (Cairo)

Jointed Hang Hook for
Wood Track

Fig. 780 14-inch (Canna)

Fig. 781 16-inch (Chestnut) pounds

Weight, 16-inch size, per dozen, 12 pounds.

Fig. 372. Jointed Hang Hook for wood track. Made of J^-inch steel rod. Total length, 14 inches.

Weight, per dozen, 13)4 pounds.

Rafter and Ridgepole Brackets

Fig. 424. Improved Malleable Rafter
Bracket, our strongest and best.
Weight, per dozen, 43^ pounds.

Fig. 425. Malleable Rafter Bracket,
common pattern.

Weight, per dozen, 3 pounds. Fig. 425 (Caesar)

Malleable Ridgepole Bracket

Fig. 465. Malleable Ridgepole Bracket, used when the track is
hung parallel to a joist or 2-inch timber.
Weight, per dozen, 3 pounds.

Fig. 675. Side Rafter Bracket, used for hanging track to rafters
on one side of the roof.

Weight, per dozen, 5J4' pounds.

Fig. 675 (Cute)

Fig. 465 (Cubeb)

Side Beam Bracket

Fig. 725. Side Beam Bracket for hanging track parallel '^
to the side of a timber.

Weight, per dozen, 6 pounds.

Barbed Chisel-Point Steel Nail

Fig. 373. Barbed Chisel-Point Steel Nail for putting <ip
rafter or ridgepole brackets. Cut shows actual size.

Fig. 373 (Cement)

Fig. 725 (Beam)

Other Hay Carrier Tracks

No. 3

No. 4

No. 5

No. 6

No. 7

We do not furnish these tracks, but we fit our Junior Carrier to run on them. In ordering Carrier
state the number and size of your track.

No. 3 is 2 inches wide; Nos. 4 and 5, 2J/^; No. 6, 2|8, and No. 7, 2% inches wide.

Page Thirty-one

Putting Up Hay Carrier Tracks

While a barn is being built and while the shingles or sheeting are within a couple of feet of the comb of
the roof, is the best time to install a Hay Carrier Track. At this time it is an easy matter to do the work,
as the sheeting forms all the scaffold necessary. To install a Hay Carrier Track after a barn is finished
means doing the work from below by scaffold or ladder, depending on the height of the barn.

The track may be hung perfectly level or it may be given a slight incline, making it lower at the point
where the track stop is attached and the hay is elevated. The track should always be hung straight and true,
and close up to the peak of the barn, but allowing room enough below rafters for the Carrier to run freely.
To do this stretch a line from one end of the barn to the other immediately below the peak of the rafters,
and nail the Rafter Brackets to the rafters in a straight line.

A collar beam should be spiked to the second pair of rafters from
each end, in which hooks are to be screwed for Pulleys, as shown
in Fig. 617. This will bring the ends of the track within about
a foot of the pulleys as shown in the cut. The collar beams may
be 2x6, or 4x4 — chamfered off thin at the ends so they can be
properly spiked to the rafters. When a piece 2 inches thick is
used, an inch piece should be nailed on the back of the center where
the screw of the hook goes through, so as to make it 3 inches thick
at this place. The collar beams should be about 4 feet long with
the ends cut the slant of the rafters, or long enough so the pulley
attached to it will let the rope run close to, but not rub on the
under side of the track.

(tslote — It is a poor plan to screw the hook into one of the rafters, as shown in some hay tool catalogs,
because in heavy work it is liable to pull out a single rafter.)

The track should be taken up in sections and hung to the brackets and then spliced together. The
Brackets and Track Hangers which support the track may be placed 4 feet apart for light work, but it
is better to have a support from every rafter, and for heavy work a hanger and bracket should be put on
each side of the rafters where the hay is taken up.

The bolts in the Hangers and Splice Clamps should be drawn up as tight as possible with a wrench,
then strike the head of the bolt with a hammer so as to set it, and tighten up the nuts again. When this
is done they will not get loose.

If the hay is to be taken in at end of barn, the track should be extended out 2' 2 to 3 feet when Fork
is used and 4 feet when Slings are used. In case the track is installed before the roof is finished, the best
plan is to use a good 2x6 or 4x6 long enough to extend out as far as necessary and back in the barn to the
third or fourth rafter. Let this extend between the rafters the same as a ridge pole. On this extension
support or ridge pole, use our Ridge Pole Brackets.

The extension may be covered if desired. Cut a brace to reach from the outer end of the extension
to a point on the rafters even with the side of the door and sheet and shingle over to this brace. This
not only serves as a roof, but also as a brace for the extension.

Fig. 617

About Rope

Many persons think they should use not less than 1-inch rope on a Hay Carrier. This is a rrustake.
Use the best grade of manilla rope and never use it heavier than |-inch in diameter and ^^-inch diameter
rope is better. Do not be persuaded to use either a large or cheap grade of rope. Cheap rope is usually
hard twisted and kinks badly. In our fifty years' experience with Hay Carriers we have learned that
the ?^-inch manilla rope is the best size to use and in no case should larger diameter than |-inch be used.
The Pulleys used with Hay Carriers are intended for these sizes of rope and larger will not work so well.

An inch rope should have not less than a 10-inch pulley, and when used on a smaller pulley the bend
will be so short that the strands will wear themselves out rubbing on each other, besides it will cost nearly,
if not fully, twice as much as three-quarter rope. According to government tests the following are the
approximate weights and strength of new manilla rope: Pounds

Three-eighths inch trip rope j •^jj'

Half-inch rope, i2}2 feet weigh 1 pound: strength i'lAo

Five-eighths rope, 7} 2 feet weigh 1 pound; strength ^ 070

Three-quarter rope, 6 feet weigh I pound; strength lonn

Seven-eighths rope, 41^2 feet weigh I pound; strength 7nqn

One-inch rope, 33^^ feet weigh 1 pound; strength 7,050

Page Thirty-two

Trrnfflin

Ofj^t,U,,}*ikit^'iMi*-.i^iU

FAIRFIELD. IOWA

Louden Power Hoist

Above illustrahon shows Louden Single Drum Power Hoist and four horse
power gasoline engine lifting 1,000 pounds of hay. The top of the load has been
removed with hay fork; a sling is being used for the last load,
pletely it cleans up the rack.

Note how corn-

There is a great need for time and
labor saving equipment in hay har-
vest, as the season is short and the
crop is valuable. A delay of a few
hours may mean a serious loss.

Louden Power Hoists are de-
signed for quick, efficient work.
They are so simple that anyone
may quickly understand and oper-
ate them, and the great numbers in
which they are manufactured en-
able us to put them on the market
at a price within reach of every
farmer.

The hoist may be used with any
kind of power — steam, gasoline or
electric. Under ordinary condi-
tions three or four H. P. is sufficient,
though five or six H. P. is better.
Engine and hoist may be located in
any convenient place.

The whole operation is extremely
simple. Five minutes' practice will
put the operator in perfect control
of the hoist and its load. 1 ts action
is positive and it always responds
to the levers.

The clutch on Louden Power Hoists is simple, powerful, and dependable. The contact blocks are of
hard maple and in operation are forced into the cone-shaped metal drive. They are accessible by removing
a single pin, and are mounted on eccentric benches, making them adjustable to take up the wear. One
set of blocks will last several seasons and they can be replaced for a few cents and in ten minutes' time.

When help is scarce and high priced, and all the horses are needed in the field, the Power Hoist comes to
the rescue and does the work of both a team and man. Not only that, but it does the same work in about
one-fourth the time.

Reduce these facts to figures and you will have the proof of our claim that a Power Hoist will easily
pay for itself in a single season.

There is nothing complicated about it — no delicate mechanism. It is just a plain, common sense,
sturdy machine built to handle big loads easily and to save time and labor in hay harvest.

There is as much difference between unloading hay with a hoist and with horse power as there is
between handling it with horse power and with a pitchfork. Try one out this season.

How long a Power Hoist will last is still to be proved, for the first hoists placed on the market by the
Louden Machinery Company, over ten years ago, though much inferior to the later models, are still giving
efficient, and satisfactory service.

The convenience of the hoist is increased for general farm purposes by mountirig it on the same truck
with a portable engine. In this manner it is easily moved from place to place and will be handy for practi-
cally all of the heavy lifting about the farm and elsewhere, such as removing wagon boxes and hay racks
from wagons, cleaning and digging wells, elevating roots from root cellars, and silage from underground
silos. It can also be used successfully for storing ice and for elevating grain with a dump box.

While the Louden Power Hoist is designed primarily for unloading hay, it has been found exceedingly
valuable for many other uses. Here is what a builder writes: "We used the Louden Power Hoist in build-
ing a concrete stack at the plant of the Iowa Malleable Iron Company. It was most satisfactory and
proved a great saving in time and effort. It handled the cement in 800-pound lots as fast as the power
mixers were able to deliver it. I am confident from the design and behavior of the hoist that it will handle
a ton.'

Page Thirty-three

Louden Single Drum Power Hoist — Fig. 965

Fig. 965
Specifications

Operation: Load carried in one direction by use of large drum. Empty carrier returned

by use of small drum.
Main Drum: Length, 20 inches; diameter, 6 inches; diameter of drum flanges,

13 inches. Capacity; 300 feet of J^-inch rope or 400 feet of j2-i"eh rope.
Return Drum: Length, II inches; capacity, 300 feet of 32-'nch rope.
Delt Wheel, pressed steel; diameter, 20 inches; width of face, 6 inches.
Total width, 25 inches.
Total length, 43 inches.
Floor space necessary, 25x36 inches. (Note: Where hoist is mounted on truck,

sufficient room for operator to stand should be allowed.)
Weight complete, 308 pounds (ready to ship).

Where the load is to be
carried in one direction
only, as in an end hoist
barn, the Single Drum
Power Hoist is used. This
hoist has one large drum
for elevating the load and
carrying it into the mow,
and a smaller drum for re-
turning the empty carrier.
It is equipped with adjust-
able friction clutch and
band brake.

One of the most valuable
features of the Single Drum
Hoist is the fact that it may
be controlled from the load
by means of ropes. There
are only two ropes to handle
— one to elevate the load
and run it back into the
mow, and one to operate
the return drum and bring
the empty carrier back to
the wagon.

There is iiO time lost, no
waiting, no changing of
team from wagon to draft
rope. All that is necessary
is to set the fork in the
load, or if slings are used,
to attach the sling pulleys,
then pull slightly on the
main friction rope and the
load goes up and into the
mow. When the load is
tripped, a slight pull on the
return rope will bring the
carrier back.

Page Thirty-four

IOWA

Louden Triple Drum Power Hoist — Fig. 1132

Specifications

Operation: Load hoisted to desired height
by use of large drum. Load carried
along track to the right by right hand
small drum, or to the left by left hand
small drum.

Main Drum: Lengtn, 20 inches; diam-
eter, 6 inches: diameter of drum
flanges, 15 inches; capacity, 300 feet
of j4-inch rope or 400 feet of j2-inch
rope.

Small Drums (Each): Length. 8 inches;
capacity. 1 75 feet of } j-inch rope.

Belt Wheel, pressed steel; diameter, 20
inches: width of face. 6 inches.

Total width, 48 inches.

Total length, 65 inches.

Floor space necessary for base, 38 x 65
inches. (Note: This is actual base.
Where hoist is mounted on truck,
sufficient room for operator to stand
should be allowed.)

Weight complete, 636 pounds.

Fig. 1132

In a center drive barn, where the hay is to be stored in mows on both sides of the driveway, or in a
Round barn, the Triple Drum Power Hoist should be used. With this hoist and a Cross Draft Sling Carrier,
hay can be picked up and carried into either mow at the will of the operator. One load can be put in the
right hand mow and the next in the left hand mow, if desired, without the changing of ropes or pulleys.

It is not necessary to carry the load clear up to the track. Unless cross timbers interfere, the hay
may be run back into the mow at any height.

The Louden Triple Drum Power Hoist has three complete hoisting drums mounted in the same frame.
They operate by friction clutch. Pull the levers to you and they force the clutch into contact; release
them and the power is released automatically; push them from you and the brakes are applied.

Complete Power Rigs for Barns

The Power Hoist can be used successfully with any kind of a Hay Carrier. We shall be glad to send
you specifications and prices for a complete power outfit for your barn, for either fork or sling use. Tell
us whether you take up hay from the end of the barn, or from a center driveway, and mention the carrier
and sling (or fork) you prefer. You'll be surprised to learn how little a Power Hoist will add to the cost
of your hay unloading outfit, as compared with the saving it effects.

T j' «« 1- 1^ ir • c u T Redstone, Mont., May 23, 1913.

Louden Machmery Company, t-airheld. Iowa. .xv. .=>. , j .

Gentlemen;

My barn is equipped with a Louden Hay Carrier and Slings which I bought of you the fall of 1910. The
slings are the largest you sold. I can unload 1.000 lbs. at each pull, easy. I have a very large door. 9x12.
I consider the outfit good in every way. Yours truly.

John H. Schlag.

Page Thirty-five

rrmrnnn

TheLOUPEN MACHINERY COMPAB^

Louden Balance Grapple Hay Forks

Louden Standard 6-Tine Balance Grapple Fork. Fig. 351. (Planet)

Specifications

Spreads when open, 58 inches.
Width between outside tines, 19 inches.
Tines go into hay 24 inches.
Weight, 45 pounds.

Louden Balance Grapple Hay Forks are in use in all parts of the United States and Canada and in all
kinds of hay. Wherever the fork is known customers are enthusiastic in saying it cannot be beaten in any
respect by any hay fork that has ever been made.

The arched support is covered by patents and is the greatest improvement ever made in grapple forks.
It secures a perfect balance, by means of which the fork can be either opened or closed with the slightest
touch. The fork is neat in dt.sign and perfectly balanced in all of its parts and adequately strong for any
work it will ever be called upon to do.

The material used in the construction of the fork is a special high-grade steel. The steel is very stiff
with just enough spring to it so it will not bend or break under the heaviest work. The tines of the cheaper
constructed forks soon become bent and twisted out of shape and the fork is made useless. Be sure to get
a Louden Fork. They are built of special steel that will hold its shape under the heaviest work.

For Timothy Hay

In long timothy hay, any kind of hay fork can be used with
fairly good satisfaction. Much of the success in using a harpoon
fork depends on the manner in which the hay is loaded on the
wagon. If the man on the wagon knows how and has the time
to load carefully, fairly good results are secured with a harpoon
fork. The best results, however, are always secured with the
Louden Grapple Fork. No difference how the hay is loaded on
the wagon, the Louden Balance Grapple Fork handles it right.
When using a harpoon fork, there is always a lot of hay that
will shake loose and fall back to the wagon or on the barn floor.
All of this litter and extra work is saved by using a Louden
Balance Grapple Fork.

For Clover Hay

It is annoying and expensive to try to use a harpoon fork

for unloading clover hay, and especially so if the hay has

become a little dry. As a rule, the fork will pull up through

Fig. A-351 — G-Tine Fork Closed the hay and lift only a very small load. It takes about three

Page Thirtv-eight

Mmi*\ii

Louden Balance Grapple Hay Forks— Continued

times as long and requires about three times as much hard work to unload a load of clover hay with a har-
poon fork as it does with a Louden Balance Grapple Fork. The fork puts Us arms, so to speak, around
a great bunch of hay and binds it in — » ^»=»^

Nature's own way, just as you would
pick it up and hold it in your arms.
Working in clover hay, the grapple
fork will pay for itself in two days'
use and will save a lot of hard work.

Alfalfa Hay

The Louden Grapple Fork will
make equally as good a showing m
one kind of hay as it does in another.
It handles them all as nearly the right
way as any fork could possibly do.
The Louden Grapple Fork, however.
is exceptionally strong in alfalfa. It
has an affinity for alfalfa hay. It will
take alfalfa hay from the wagon and
carry it into the hay mow or up on to
the stack in such big bunches that
users are astonished and delighted with
its efficiency. Another thing, when the
fork lets go of the hay it spreads it
out and makes it easy to mow away.

Fig. 686 (Farmer)

Extra large 6-Tine
Fork Closed

Louden Extra Large G-Tine Balance
Grapple Fork
Specifications

Spreads when open, 6 feet 7 inches.
Width between outside tines, 25 inches.
Tines go into hay 24 inches.
Weight. 50 pounds.

Fig. 648 (Prophet)
4-Tine Fork Open

Louden Standard 4-Tine Balance
Grapple Fork

Specifications

Spreads when open. 58 inches.
Width between outside tines, 19 inches.
Tines go into hay 24 inches.
Weight, 40 pounds.

It drops every straw and no hay is left clinging to
the tines and bothering in that respect.

Other Hay

The Louden Balance Grapple Fork will handle any
kind of hay. In the Far North where the Canada field
pea flourishes and in the Far South where the cow pea
blooms, the fork is handling the work successfully and
growing in popularity each year. The grapple fork
will successfully handle threshed straw. Many
Michigan customers are using the fork for putting their
bean crops into sheds preparatory to threshing. Where
there is hay or forage of any kind to handle, the
Louden Balance Grapple Fork will do it successfully.

At first thought it might seem a fork of this size
would be hard to handle. On the contrary, it is easy
to handle. When the hay carrier is returned to the
trip block and the fork pulley is released, the fork will
settle down to the wagon without any pulling or hauling.
The fork goes down open all ready to set into the hay.
The man on the load can grasp the fork as it comes
down and swing it into position and set it into the hay
just as easy and just as quickly as a harpoon fork.

The fork is furnished in three sizes. The Standard
6-tine size is the one most largely used. The 4-tine
fork is exactly the same as the 6-tine fork except the
center tine is left out on each side. The extra large 6-
tine fork is built heavier throughout than the other
forks. The Standard size 6-tine and 4-tine forks are
large enough for practical use under average conditions.
The extra large fork is desirable for clover and alfalfa
where extremely heavy loads are to be handled.

Page Thirty-nine

Louden Rocker-Bar Hay Fork— Fig. 1137

The Louden Rocker-Bar Hay Fork is an extra strong fork
constructed out of the best quahty high carbon fork steel.
The fork will enter the hay easily. The tines lock in position
either open or closed and the toes cannot double back when
entering green or tough hay.

The cross bar on the fork is placed near the top and it
gathers the hay or grain from the end of the point instead of
from two inches above the bottom. This fork, therefore, has
a larger capacity and will carry bigger loads than the ordinary
double harpoon fork. When the load is carried into the mow
the fork trips easy and will drop its load clean.

Louden Triple

Harpoon Fork

Fig. 350

The Louden Triple
Harpoon Fork is the
lightest weight and at
the same time the
strongest harpoon fork
made. The fork is all
fork. It will go down
into the hay clear out
of sight, will lift a big-
ger load and carry the
load closer to the track
than any other har-
poon fork made.

View B View A

Fig. 350 (Peerless)
Specifications

For use in any type of barn.

Can be used with any hay carrier.

For use in all kinds of hay.

Body and tines of special quality fork steel.

Lock lever of malleable iron.

Length of tines, 24 inches.

Weight. 12 pounds.

Nellis Single

Harpoon Fork

Fig. 356

Specifications

For use in any type of

barn.
Can be used with any hay

carrier.
Length of tine, 26 inches.
Weight, 13 pounds.

This is the old orig-
inal type of hay fork.
It will do good service
in long, heavy timothy
hay. I s not so success-
full in clover or alfalfa,
especially if the hay
is somewhat dry.

Fig. 356 (Poker)

Fig. 1137 (Tuttle)
Specifications

For use in any style of barn.

Can be used with any kind of hay carrier.

Will handle any kind of hay.

Length of tines under head (distance tines go in

hay), 31 inches.
The tines and main frame of the fork are of

special high carbon fork steel.
The rocker bar. toes and lock are malleable iron.
Weight, 20 pounds.
In Fig. 330, View A shows the fork open, ready to enter the
hay. The small tapering tines will enter the hay easily. The lever
is then pushed downward, forcing the tines into the position as
shown in View B. In addition to lifting big loads, the triple
harpoon fork will bind its load from top to bottom and prevent
the hay from shaking loose and falling back.

This fork can be used with any make of hay carrier and is so
strong and compactly built that it will give years of service.

Harris Double Harpoon Fork — Fig. 353
Specifications

For use in any type of barn.
Can be used on any kind of hay carrier.
Made in three sizes:
Standard size.

Length of tines under cross bar. 243-2 inches.

Width between tines, 15 J2 inches.

Weight, 19 pounds.
Intermediate size.

Length of tines under cross bar, 31 inches.

Width between tines, 15}^ inches.

Weight, 20 pounds.

Large size (Alfalfa).

Length of tines under cross bar, 32 inches.

Width between tines, 2 1 inches.

Weight, 32 pounds.

The Harris Double Harpoon is the
original harpoon fork. It has been on
the market for years and will do good
work under all ordinary conditions.

It is built of genuine fork steel, for use in any barn,
type of hay carrier and in any kind of hay.

Fig. 353

with any

Page Forty

,)iu\;k.'^^LUMHih:i*Aii\M.\

Louden Hay Slings and Fittings

The Use of Slings

Like everything else, some judg-
ment is required in using slings to
obtain the best results. The power
available, the length of rack, the
size of wagon-loads, and the space
above beams in the barn should all
be considered and the number of
slings estimated and their length
adjusted accordingly.

Slings require more room over
beams than forks, therefore it is
unwise to purchase a sling outfit
that hangs away down below the
track. We have always watched
this point carefully and our carriers
and sling attachments have been
made compactly so as to occupy
the least possible space.

Our experience has been that

the rack should not be over sixteen

feet long (and fourteen feet is

better) unless the barn, elevator

Fig. 319 and everything else are on a very

large scale. Slings spread the full length of a fourteen to sixteen foot rack require about ten feet of

space between the track and beams for the load to pass through.

Where a large amount of hay is to be handled, and there is sufficient clearance room through the hay

door and in the mow for the large loads, there is no plan that equals the use of slings. Generally three

slings are used to a wagon, taking the load into the mow at three drafts, and cleaning the rack perfectly

with no shatterings to pick up.

The first sling is placed on the rack, using care to draw the ends out where they can be reached when

the hay is piled on. One-third of the load

is placed, another sling laid on, again

using care to lay out the ends where they

will be in reach. Another third of the

hay is then loaded and the third sling

laid on, when the loading is completed.
In unloading the hay, the sling pulleys

are spread apart and one hooked into each

end of the top sling. The power on the

draft rope gradually brings them together

and rolls the hay up as shown in Fig. 319.

When the sling is tripped the spring of

the hay causes it to unroll and spread in

the mow evenly (See Fig. 320), and in

practically the same shape it occupied on

the wagon.

We were the originators of successful

slings and sling carriers, and we warrant

ours to be superior to any on the market.

Fig. 320
See How it Spreads the Hay

._ , .. „._^ ___ It is tripped in the center below the hay and separates into two parts.

We have made a special study of slings and letting hay drop out between them perfectly dear, and without tilting it

','."" '"*'" •■— >- — "f^ ^- ---—.7 -- --o ■ edffe as side trio shnes invariably do. The hay being first rolled up.

sling earners, and during the past twenty- °^ :^^:;„"lCe. UNROLLS when'^discharged and spreads out in the

five years we have thoroughly tested and „„„ „, o„ th^ gtack as wide as the length of the Sling, and in EXACTLY

greatly improved them. THE SAME SHAPE it lay on the load.

Page Forty-one

irnTTnTirnniTiTmTnTTTnnii

Louden Carry-All Hay Sling — Fig. 984

= ■M=S=jB«

Fig. 984 (Entire)
Specifications

For use in any type of barn.

Can be handled with any Sling Hay Carrier.

Standard width of shng. 6 feet.

Cross bars are of hard wood. 2"x2"x6'.

Length of shng is adjustable from 15 to 2! feet.

Main ropes. } 2 inch.

Center cross rope, Jg inch.

Outside rope, ys inch.

Trip rope. 3% inch.

Ropes clamped to cross bars with steel hook bolts

Sling coupling of malleable iron.

Safe working capacity, 2.000 pounds.

Weight, 36 pounds.

The Carry-All is the popular leader of the widely known and widely used Louden line of Hay Slings.
It is designed for hard, heavy work and yet it works so perfectly and so easily that it is adapted for use
anywhere that a hay sling can be used.

This sling is strong enough to permit unloading an ordinary load of hay at a single lift, and can safely
be used to handle ton loads. The design of the sling is new. The two cross bars in the center are held
close together and are connected by a strong double lock instead of one lock only, as generally used.

This is the ideal sling for handling short growths, such as threshed straw, headed grain, bound grain,
dry or short clover and alfalfa. On account of its close construction and the fact that it is connected at
two points in the middle, there is no chance for short hay or straw to shatter through or fall out. The
sling is equally adapted for handling the long and heavy growths.

The double lock works easily and perfectly. The trip rope attaches to one lock only, the other lock
being merely a hook and an eye. A slight pull on the single trip rope releases both locks simultaneously.
The lock releases as easy under a heavy load as a light one. In coupling the sling together the hook is
inserted in the eye and at the other end the catch is snapped into place. The connection is quickly made
and will hold securely.

Page Forty-two

...\^.'i.!feNi I >.'!»> iS^

Fig. 666 (4-ft., Moon; 5-ft., Mars)
Specifications

For use wherever a sling can be used.

Can be handled on any Shng Hay Carrier.

Furnished in 4-ft. width and 5-ft. width.

Cross bars are of 2-inch by 2-inch hard wood.

Length of shng is adjustable from 1 5 feet to 21 feet

Main ropes, J 2 inch.

Trip rope, Yi inch. , d 1

Ropes clamped to cross bars with Steel Hook Bolts,

Sling coupling of malleable iron.

Safe working capacity, 1 ,000 pounds.

Weight, 4-ft. size, I6J^ pounds.

Weight. 5-ft. size. 27 pounds.

Louden Three-Rope Sling

The Louden Three-Rope Sling is
very strong and dependable. There
are three main ropes on each side.
This offers a close, compact construc-
tion and makes this a desirable sling
for handling the shorter growths of
hay or threshed straw.

The coupling in the center is made
strong for heavy work. The latch
holds securely until the proper time
when an easy pull on the trip rope
will cause the coupling to separate
and sling to drop its load.

This sling is adapted for use any-
where that a sling can be used.

Louden Standard
Hay Sling

The Standard Sling is the first suc-
cessful type of hay sling placed on the
market. It is a serviceable sling for
general use and will give good wear and
service. For extreme short stuff we rec-
commend one of the more closely con-
structed slings described in these pages.

The Standard Hay Sling has the
strength and wearing qualities necessary
for satisfactory work, and the moderate
price at which the sling is sold has made
it very popular among hay growers. The
sling is adjustable in length from 1 5 feet
to 21 feet.

Fig. 324 (Moxie)
Specifications

For use in any type of barn. Can be handled with any Sling Hay Carrier

Will handle any kind of hay. Width of sling. 6 feet.

Cross bars are of hard wood, 2 inches by 2 mches by 6 feet.

Length of shng is adjustable from 1 3 feet to 21 feet

Main ropes, K inch. Center cross ropes, and outside ropes, f g mch.

Trip rope, ye inch.

Ropes clamped to cross bars with steel hook bolts.

Sling coupling of malleable iron. Safe working capacity, 1 .600 pounds.

Weight, 28 pounds.

Fig. 600 (Modern)
Specifications

For use in any type of barn.

Can be handled with any Sling Hay Carrier.

Standard width of sling. 5 feet. , r ,

Cross bars are of hard wood. 2 mches by 2 mches by 5 teot.

Length of sling is adjustable from 15 to 21 feet.

Outside ropes, ^2 inch.

Center ropes, 5 s inch.

Trip rope, y& inch.

Ropes clamped to cross bars with Steel Hook Bolts.

Sling coupling of malleable iron.

Safe working capacity, 1 .400 pounds.

Weight, 20 pounds.

Louden California
Hay Sling

The California Hay Sling is de-
signed for handling any kind of hay.
It is especially recommended for very
short hay or bound or headed grain.
It is called the California Sling be-
cause of the great demand for it in
the Golden State.

With the exception of the Carry-
All it is the heaviest and most compact
sling we make. The coupling in the
center is extra heavy and has a strong
catch that will hold securely until the
proper time when it trips easily.

The sling is adjustable in length
from 1 5 feet to 2 1 feet and by loosen-
ing the hook bolts the cross bars may
be adjusted to fit any rack.

Page Forty-three

imnrmrmimTTTTinTTTrTn

vHm ^tiii 0 a^.^i J m i i i^i a> :v«n:f^f^(

Fig. 516 (Mate;

Fig. 1106-i

Weight

2 pounds

Sling Coupling— Fig. 516

The coupling used with all Louden Slings except the Carry-All.

The coupling is made of malleable iron. The working parts are completely pro-
tected and the trip cord can be easily and quickly attached. While the catch is posi-
tive and secure, a slight pull on the trip rope will cause the coupling to unlatch.
Weight, 2}/2 pounds.

Louden Handy Hay Sling and Holder
Fig. 1106

(For Use With Shng Carrier Only)
Weight, Three-Rope Sling, 4 J pounds
Weight, Two-Rope Sling, 3i pounds

The ease and convenience with which this all-rope sling can
be handled has gained for it the appropriate name "Handy".
As the sling has no spreaders it can more easily be carried and
spread on the rack than slings having cross bars.

The sling trips at the end (or side) instead of in the center as do
other slings. The sling can be made up of two ropes or three ropes
as desired. The sling holder is provided with three latch hooks to
carry either style sling.

The Louden Handy Hay Sling is the only sling of its kind that
is made adjustable so it can be lengthened or shortened to fit any
length rack. It will handle any kind of hay or forage. The sling
is easily drawn out from under hay in the mow and can be used
in filling the barn full up to the comb. Three slings are generally
required for each wagon.

Only one holder (Fig. !I06-A)

Fig. 1106 (Handy)
The holder is made

is required for each carrie

of malleable iron. The holder is intended for use with
right angle or parallel sling pulleys. The latch or trip
in the holder is quickly set and is secure and will trip
easily at the proper time.

Side Trip Sling Holder

(For Use With Fork Carrier Only)

Fig. 328 represents our Side Trip Sling Holder, and
Fig. 329 is the same with ropes attached. The ropes
are laid crosswise on the rack under hay to be elevated
and the ends are drawn up by hand. The looped ends
are slipped over the trip Y, which is then locked. The
other ends are usually drawn through the hook H and
tied in a bow knot. Four sets of ropes to a wagon are
generally used.

Weight, 2}4 pounds.

Fig. 328 (Martyr)

Fig. 329

How To Securely Clamp Metal Parts Together

1st. Put all the clamps on loosely so the parts can be easily racked to line them up properly.

2d. After they are all in proper position draw the nuts up tight with a wrench.

3d. When tightly drawn, hit the heads of the bolts heavily with a hammer to set them.

4th. Tighten up the nuts again with a wrench as much as can be safely done.

When treated this way the bolts will not be liable to get loose but without hammering their heads so as
to solidly set them they will be liable to work loose under a strain and especially so under a jar. This
is important in attaching clamps of any kind, especially splice clamps for overhead track, couplings and
clamps for connecting the tubing of animal stalls and pens together, especially pens to hold vicious bulls
and for other purposes requiring solidity and durability of structure.

Page Forty-four

^^ZLUiikH;h:i\

FAIRriELP. IOWA

Louden Fork Clevis — Fig. 652

Specifications

Can be used with Parallel or Right-angle Sling

Pulleys.
Can be used with any style of fork.
Made of malleable iron.
Weight, 2J4 pounds.

Figs. 652 and 653 represent our Fork
Clevis attached to sling pulleys and by
means of which a hay fork can be used
with Louden Hay SUng Carriers. The
Fork Clevis is attached to the top of the
fork by means of a heavy bushing placed
between the two sides of the clevis and
held in place by a bolt. The clevis with
the fork attached can be hooked on to
the sling pulleys in a moment. There is
no loss of time making the change from
Fig. 652 (Maroon) sling to fork. Fig. 653 (M

This clevis is largely used where a sling carrier is in the barn and the practice is followed o
the top of the load with a fork and cleaning up the rack with a sling. The fork can be hung in
or one-third way from one end as may be necessary to balance it with double or triple draft,
shows the clevis in use with our Parallel pulleys and Fig. 653 with our Self-Locking Pulleys,
end of Louden Balance Grapple Fork is shown in the illustrations.

aroon)

f removing

the middle

Fig. 632

The upper

Louden Sling Binding Pulley — Fig. 332

Many farmers and hay growers follow the practice of removing
the top of the load with a fork and cleaning up the rack with a
sling. Or, sometimes, it is necessary to haul a load of dry, fine
straw that cannot well be handled with a fork, and it is desired to
use a sling.

The Louden Sling Binding Pulley is the tool to use for this
work.

It can be used with any Fork Carrier hav-
ing not larger than 4-inch fork pulley and
without any change of rope or re-threading of
carrier. In the illustration the Pulley A
represents the regular fork pulley used with
the carrier. The Pulley B is the Sling Binding
Pulley. The Fork Pulley A is slipped thiough
the Sling Pulley B, the two pulleys are then
spread apart and hooked into the two ends of
the s'ing. When the load starts to lift, the
Fork PuUeyA slips back through the Sling Pul-
ley B and registers in the carrier. This binds
the load securely and the carrier supports the
load as it is being carried back into the mow
the same as in ordinary work. The Pulley B
is the only extra part necessary to handle.
This can be kept hanging within easy reach of
the man on the load, so no time is lost in
changing from fork to sling.

Fig. 332 (Mentor)
Specifications

Frame made of malleable iron.
Wheels special quality gray iron.
Weight (part B cnly), 5 pounds.

Page Forty-five

4
i'^<i.

%
'^'

a*

Louden Self -Locking Sling
Pulleys— Fig. 330

(Right Angle Sling Pulleys)
Specifications

Furnished with registering head to fit any Hay Carrier.
Used with Louden Carriers, slings are carried within 20

inches of the track.
Pulleys are of malleable iron except the wheels.
Wheels are of special quality gray iron.
Weight, 10 pounds.

It is sometimes desired to use Hay Slings in

barns already equipped with Fork Carriers If

the track is good and the carrier is

strong and sturdy, this can be done.

Figs. 330-331 illustrate the Louden

Self-Locking Sling Pulleys. With

these pulleys slings can be handled

with any hay carrier, using a register-
ing head. We can furnish the pulleys

fitted with any of the registering heads

illustrated on opposite page and new

heads are made to fit other carriers

when there is sufficient call for them.
Our advice to customers who wish

to use Hay Slings and who have a

considerable amount of hay to handle,

is to buy a regular sling carrier built

for heavy work.

However, we sell thousands of these sling pulleys for use with fork carriers of all kinds and they always

give good satisfaction so long as care is used not to overload the carriers.

Fig. 422 represents a set of Louden Self-Locking Sling Pulleys in use with our Louden Junior Fork

Carrier. The pulleys are shown locked together but not yet registered
in the carrier. Fig. 330 is a front view of the pulleys locked together
and Fig. 331 is a side view of the pulleys spread apart to connect to
the sling. As the load is elevated, the two parts of the sling pulley come
together and lock as shown in Fig. 330. The
registering head then enters the carrier and is
engaged by the grappling hooks the same as the
fork pulley when a fork is being used.

Fig 422

July 30, 1914.
Gentlemen: — We find your goods unexpect-
edly satisfactory. The hay track and carrier
works like a charm, and the hanger and barn
door tracks are past reproach. Thanking you
for all past favors. I remain.

Yours respectfully,
H. 1. Armour,

Rising Sun, Md.

Fig. 330

Page Forty-six

Registering Heads for Louden Self-Locking Sling Pulleys

RHI

RH2 RH3 RH4 RH5 RH6

RH7

RK6 RH9

Louden Hall

Star Leader Church Porler

Milwaukee
Reversible

Milwaukee Burbanks
Swivel Eclipse

RHIO RHIi RHI2 RHI3 RHI4 __ RHI5 RHI6 ^RHI7

Ney and Osborn Jordan C.,B. &Q. Myers

Superior O. K.

Ashland Myers Ideal and Janesville Haymaker

Combination Jumbo Deadlock or Imperial

Porter*8 Boyd Diamond New

Swivel Diamond

Boyd
Reversible

Unloader
Clover Leaf

W. B. Acme
Ist Pattern

W. B. Acme
Improved

Louden
Senior

Meadow
King

Meyers Unloader
7-in. Sheave

The illustrations above show the Registering Heads
which we make for our Self -Locking Sling Pulleys.
These heads will fit the different carriers named.

When in doubt as to the head required, send the
fork pulley of your carrier by express, prepaid, and we
will fit the pulley with the proper head and return fork
pulley with order.

Page Forty-seven

^^^^^^

Fig. 649 (Mastiff)

Louden Parallel Sling Pulleys
Fig. 649

Specifications

Can 'o*- used with any Louden Hay Sling Carrier.
Can be used with any center-trip Hay Sling.
Frame of pulley of refined malleable iron.
Rope wheels of special quality gray iron.
Diameter of Rope Wheels, 4 inches.
Weight per pair (2 pulleys). 10)2 pounds.

The Louden Parallel Sling Pulleys are built for service and wear and for use wherever there is need
for a sling pulley. The frame of the pulley is of malleable ir m with heavy reinforcing ribs at points where
strength is needed.

The meeting edges of the pulleys are provided with wide flanges end the upper ends are closed so they
cannot run into each other. The rope wheels and the pulley frames are made smooth and free from sharp
corners so they will not wear the rope. The hooks are fitted with self-acting safety stops to prevent the
slings from becoming detached. Eyes are provided in the lower end of the pulleys into which the end
of draft rope can be fastened when it is desired to rig the pulleys triple draft.

Louden Senior Parallel Pulleys
Fig. 650

Specifications

For use with cable draft rope.
Can be used with any center-trip Hay Sling.
Frame of pulley of refined malleable iron.
Rope wheels of special quality gray iron.
Diameter of Rope Wheels, 5 inches.
Weight, per pair (2 pulleys), 1 5^2 pounds.

Fig. 650 (Miller)

The Louden Senior Parallel Sling Pulleys are of the same design as the regular parallel sling pulleys
except they are larger and heavier and are fitted with sheaves or rope wheels for 's-inch cable draft rope
instead of manila rope. The Senior pulleys are desirable where the work is extremely heavy.

Right Angle and Parallel Pulleys

Fig. 412 shows how the hay is deposited in the mow
with respect to the Track A when Right Angle or Parallel
Sling Pulleys are used. The Right Angle Pulleys spread
the hay wider in the mow than the Parallel Pulleys, unless
the latter are twisted quarter round before tripping the
sling.

Fig. 412

Page Forty-eight

Fig. 467 (Paragon)
Fig. 467. Knot Passing

Pulley. MjJleable frame.

swivel eye, 6-inch hard

maple sheave seasoned in

oil.

Weight, 3J4 pounds.

Fig. 468 (Prelude)
Fig. 468. Draft Pulley.
Malleable frame, 6v«vel
eye, 6-inch hard maple
sheave seasoned in oil.

Weight, 3 pounds.

Louden High-Grade Pulleys

Patented May 20, 1902.

Use of Pulleys

Every article about a haying outfit should be first-
class, strong and durable. When hay tools break in the
haying season it means delay, loss of time, frequently
loss and injury of hay. and occasionally serious accidents.
Such breakages occur chiefly from the use of poor pulleys.
It is therefore important that every user of Hay Tools
should buy first-class pulleys.

We make a specialty of High-Grade Pulleys which we
illustrate on the following pages. We have given special
care and attention to the designing of our pulleys, taking
into consideration every detail which would add to their
merits. In making the eye and the frame we have placed
the metal where the strength is needed, and cut it out
where it is not needed, so that the pulley may have all
the strength necessary, and at the same time be light and
neat and not cumbersome to handle. The frame is made
in two parts, held together by rivets and bolts. The wheel
or sheave turns on a large malleable bushing, recessed into
the frame of the pulley and held in position by a bolt.
This gives the pulley great strength.

We handle the cheaper grade pulleys, but we cannot
too strongly recommend the use of the best pulleys
that can be purchased. Do not be persuaded to use
cheap pulleys. The saving is only a trifle in the first cost,
and the use of cheap pulleys may mean much damage
and loss in harvest. The best is the cheapest in the end.

Louden High-Grade Pulleys have, through many years
of continuous, satisfactory service, proved themselves
superior in design, construction and durability. They
have no sharp corners to wear the rope. The eyes are
heavily ribbed and have tubular swivels, which add
materially to their strength and efficiency.

Fig. 494 (Passport)

Fig. 494. Knot Passing
Pulley. Malleable frame,
swivel eye, 6-inch diameter
sheave. Sheave made of
special quality gray inn.

Weight, 'JY2 pounds.

Fig. 495 (Password)

Fig. 495. Draft Pulley.
Malleable frame, swivel
eye, 6-inch diameter
sheave. Sheave made of
special quality gray iron

Weight, 5}^ pounds.

Fig. 553

Sectional View
of Louden High
Grade Pulleys.

The wood sheaves turn on large metallic bushings, recessed into the sides of the
pulley frames, held in place by heavy bolts. The bearings in the iron sheaves also
turn on large bushings which support the weight of the load and protect the connecting
bolts from wear.

The sheaves in the four pulleys shown on this page are interchangeable. Fig. 553 is
a sectional view of the Iron Sheave Pulley, showing the tubular eye, the projection in
the frame which protects the rope from the edge of the sheave, the malleable bushings
on which the sheave turns, the recess in the frame in which the bushing rests, and the
bolt that holds it in place. This shows the sturdy construction which characterizes all
Louden High-Grade Pulleys and gives them marked superiority over all others.

Page Forty-nine

mm^i\Hiwk:LUiii^i;l^:Vi

LOU den's
^ammotL

mm

^S^I^^^^rAlRFlELp. IOWA ^'^/^

Louden Mammoth Pulley — Fig. 519

The Mammoth Pulley is made for heavy work.
It has a select 7-inch hard maple sheave, seasoned in
oil. It has the tubular swivel eye, large malleable
bushings on which the sheave turns, the guard over
the edge of the sheave to prevent the rope from
cutting, — in fact all of the good features of the pulleys
previously described, and in addition is larger and
stronger. The large sheave makes this pulley easy
on the rope.

Fig. 519 (Pencil)
Specifications

Weight, SJX pounds.

Fig, 651 (Kuroki)
Specifications

Fig. 651. Cable Pulley.
Malleable iron frame. Swivel
eye. 7-inch diameter sheave.
Sheave made of special qual-
ity gray iron. Weight, 9
pounds.

Cable Pulleys— Figs. 579-651

Our Cable Pulleys are made with malleable iron
frames and have all the good features of our Rope
Pulleys — the tubular swivel eye, frame made in two
parts, held together with bolts and rivets, large malle-
able bushing, held in recess in the pulley frame by a
bolt, and projections or guards in the opening of the
frame to protect the cable from the edge of the
sheaves (see page 49, Fig. 553). We make them with
iron wheels only, and the pulley throughout is made
extra strong. The hole in the sheave is chilled and
turns on a malleable bushing. The groove in the
sheave is made suitable for Ss-inch diameter wire cable.

Louden Upright Floor Pulley
Fig. 364

This pulley is designed for use on the floor
and in other places where common pulleys lop
over when the rope is loosened, thus causing the
rope to rub and bind in the pulleys. Every user
of Hay Tools knows this is annoying and
expensive.

Our upright Floor Pulley does not lop over
or unhook, nor bind and hold the rope while the
carrier is being drawn back. A slot in the bot-
tom of the pulley slips over the head of the skein
bolt, which is screwed into the floor and while
holding the pulley upright, lets it turn freely in
any direction. They may be used with as good
results on a wall or a post in a vertical or inclined
position, as in a horizontal position.

Fig. 579 (Perfect)
Specifications

Fig. 579. Cable Pulley.
Malleable iron frame.
Swivel eye. 8-inch diam-
eter sheave. Sheave is
made of special quality
gray iron. Weight, 9^4
pounds.

Fig. 364 (Palace)
Specifications

Fig. 364. Floor Pulley.

Mal-
nch

leable iron frame. 4'
diameter sheave. Sheave made of
hard maple seasoned in oil.
Attaches to floor with lag screw.
Weight, 5} 2 pounds.

Louden Machinery Co., Fairfield, Iowa. Ridgway, III. Feb. 9. 1914.

Gentlemen:

I received the large Grapple Fork you shipped January 10th, which was in good condition. 1 am

well

satisfied with the fork, I have been handling short wheat straw, I was surprised to see tlie fork handle

the

loose straw so well, which means that I am more than satisfied with it.

Yours very truly.

Kelly E. Moye.

Page Fifty

Some Special Pulleys

Fig. 359 Fig. 435 Fig. 360

(Pointer) (Perch) (Parasite)

Fig. 366 is our Fork Pulley used with all of our Fork
Fig. 366 Carriers except our Senior Carrier, Fig. 1100.

(Togard; J J. pj^g g 4-inch sheave and a strong malleable frame with

safety hook that has the tubular swivel. Weight, 3^4 pounds.

Fig. 359 is our Return Pulley with 3-in. wood sheave for l^-'m. rope and smaller.
Made the same as our High-grade pulleys on page 49. Weight, 1 pound.

Fig. 1139

Fig. 435 is our Comb Pulley, for lifting cord to pass over, in the peak of barn
sheave. Weight, Js pound.

Fig. 360 is our Malleable Case Check Pulley with IJ^ in. iron sheave,
rope and smaller. Weight, 6 ounces.

Fig. 1139 is our Fork Pulley used with our Senior Fork Carrier only,
of special gray iron. Both Fork Pulleys are built on the same line

Weight, 6 pounds.

1 1 has IJ^-in. iron

Built extra strong for ^a-in.

It has a 7-in. sheave made
as our high grade pulleys.

Fig. 623 (Pawn)
Specifications

Frame made of malleable iron.
Rope wheel special quality gray iron.
Rope wheel 4 inches diameter.
Weight, 4^4 pounds.

Louden Snatch Pulley Block — Fig. 623

The Snatch Pulley Block shortens the distance the horse
travels. After passing through the lower draft pulley, the
end of the rope is made fast to the barn wall or a stake driven
in the ground. Before making the end of the rope fast a
washer should be slipped on and a knot tied in the rope, as
shown in the illustration. The Snatch Pulley can then be put
in place on the rope. One side of the pulley is open so the
rope can be thrown off and on. When the load is pulled into
the mow, the rope can be thrown off the
pulley and the fork returned to the wagon j»» «vi ^_

without waiting for the — '^ '111 V^

return of the horse.

Cast Frame Pulleys

Fig. 522. Cast Frame Draft Pulley, 6-inch wood sheave, has
large, loose pin, self-oiling axle. Weight, 3)4 pounds.

Fig. 729. Cast Frame Knot Passing Pulley, 6-inch wood,
sheave has large, loose pin, self-oiling axle. Weight, 4 pounds.

Fig. 641 (Ray)

Fig. 642 (Frank)

Fig. 522 (Presto) Fig. 729 (Peter)

Wood Frame Pulley — Reed Pattern

The frame is made of hard wood held together
by rivets at the top. It is provided with wrought
steel yoke to support the large, hollow, self-lubri-
cating axle on which the sheave turns. Sheaves
made of hard maple. A good strong pulley. Fig.
641 shows the pulley with steel hook. Fig. 642
shows pulley with malleable eye. Weight, 2^
pounds.

Page Fifty-one

Fig. 389
(Ensing)

Louden Pulley Hooks, Etc.

Fig. 389. Steel Floor Pulley Hook,
Weight, per dozen, 1 5 pounds

X 7 inches.

.. _, , J rii, I J puuiiua.

Fig. 390. Steel Rafter Pulley Hook,
Weight, per dozen, IOJ2 pounds.

5 8x6 inches.

WCIgllL, pel KA\J£,Cll, IVy^ pv^UllVJO.

Fig. 391. Steel Return Pulley Hook, 3^x3J/^ inches.
Weight, per dozen, 3 pounds.

Pulley Holders for Steel Track

Fig. 470 (Provost)

The Pulley Holder, Fig. 470, is designed for use with the Louden Weight Return,
Fig. 529, page 19, and also at any other place where it is necessary to hang a pulley
immediately underneath a Steel Hay Carrier Track.

pounds. It is made of refined

Fig. 470 shows PuUy Holder for Double-Bead Steel Track. Weight, -
malleable iron and is clamped to the steel track by means of heavy bolts.

How to Set Pulley Hooks

Pulley Hooks should always be set
so they will stand straight with the
line of draft, as shown by the dotted
lines. When the pull is crossways it
/ I / ^ '1 / I will bend the hook. Of the illustra-

I ' y i tion at left, the first, third and fifth are

right; while second, fourth and sixth are wrong. It is the Cross Pull that bends or breaks the hook.
A yz or ^4 hook put in right will stand more than a ^-inch hook put in wrong.

Louden Bracket Pulley Holder — Fig. 348

Specifications

For supporting pulley (or draft rope. Made o( malleable iron.
Will carry any common pulley. Weight, 3 pounds.

Louden Bracket Pulley Holder is used to carry the draft rope out through
the barn siding close to the eaves and carries the rope close to the mow so
that the hay does not interfere with the rope or pulleys when the mow is full.
The hole in the side of the barn is small and the pulley is up close to the eave
and is always in the dry. Pulley can be put in or removed easily from inside
of the barn. In barns where hay is taken in at one end or both ends, if the
rope is run the nearest way to the ground from the end of the track, it reduces
friction and requires less rope.

The holder supports the pulley and at the same time allows it to adjust

itself in line with the draft. It also holds the rope free so it does not rub

and wear on the timbers. To attach the holder, cut a hole in the barn

Fig. 348 Pyramid' siding 4 inches wide and 8 or 10 inches high. Bolt the holder in place so

the hook will be even with the top of the hole. Bolts are furnished with the

holder. This is an inexpensive article that should be included with every hay-unloading outfit for

barns as described. The saving in the amount of draft rope required, the less amount of wear on

the rope, and the reduced friction, make the Bracket Pulley Holder a profitable investment immediately.

Louden Lightning Rope Hitch — Fig. 367

Made of Malleable Iron

For quickly connecting Singletrees or Doubletrees to Fig. 383 (Excelsior)

draft rope. No time lost tying or untying knots in the Louden Swivel Rope

rope. The rope is slipped through the hitch and the Hook with safety latch.
11. 1 11- 1 1 .. ir I. 1 Weight J4 pound.

Fig. 367 (Emery) end bent around and slipped under itself. It can be «"g"t-4

instantly attached or detached and will hold securely; also can be adjusted to lengthen or shorten the
rope. It is provided with a safety hook which will not become unlatched. Weight, l/s pounds.

Page Fifty-tvkTo

f^

TUTTrmn

ThpLOUBEN MACHINERY COMPANY

Fig. 344

Fig. 344A (Princej

Louden Hoisting Singletree — Fig. 344

Specifications

For use wherever hoisting is to be done

with a horse.
Body of hard wood.
Trimminge of malleable iron.
Weight. 6 pounds.

The Louden Hoisting Singletree was designed for use
anywhere that hoisting is to be done with a horse or

team when the Singletree has no support. It is especially popular and desirable
for use with the hay unloading rig at hay time. It is equally valuable for any
kind of hoisting with horse power, plowing or cutting ice, plowing in orchards,
vineyards or other places when the ends of the singletree is liable to injure the
trees or vines.

The Singletree does not drag against the horse's legs, and the traces do not unhook or get under
the horse's feet in backing or turning. The traces pass through keepers (K) and along back of smgletree
to hook in center. The Singletree being bent, this brings it close to the horse, like a breeching, without
having to shorten the traces and it is held up by a cord (C). having a snap (S), which hooks into the trace
carrier iron. The eye to which the draft rope is fastened is swiveled. which keeps it from kmking.

The Singletree saves much time. The horse can be turned short around and there is no chance for
the horse to get over the traces. Also the rope is held up off the ground so the horse cannot step on it.

Louden's Spreader Attachment— Fig. 345

Fig. 345 shows our Spreader Attachment by which two
Singletrees can be hitched together for use with a team. For
ordinary hoisting purposes, we use a rope with a spreader and
attach the hoisting rope to it, as shown by enlarged figure in
center. For other work a chain may be used. There is no other
rig equal to this for four or six horse teaming, as it does not
strike the horses' legs and causes no weight whatever on the
necks of the team behind. To attach Singletrees remove the
hooks from ends of Spreader, hook on Singletree and replace
hooks and bolts. Weight, 5 pounds.

Fig. 345 (Pension)

Louden Offset Hinges— Fig. 349

Specifications

For gable hay doors on barns.
Made of malleable iron.
Hinged together with heavy bolt.
Weight (one hinge only). 2 pounds.

Weight full set fittings for gable door
(2 hinges. 2 hooks and staples, 2 small
hooks), 4>i pounds.

The Louden Offset Hinge was
designed for use on the gable hay
doors on barns. The hinge is
made with an offset to allow the
door to lap on the siding to shut
out wind and rain. It is made of malleable iron and is
very strong. Two hinges are sufficient for all ordinary doors.
For extremely large, heavy doors three hinges should be used.
The hinge is made wide to insure a solid bearing on the door
and to give plenty of room for bolts and screws.

The gable hay door hung with our Offset Hinges, as shown
in Fig. 347 is practical, cheap and easy to make. The door
can be opened and closed with the hay carrier. This can be
done from the ground either by hand or with a horse.

Fig. 349iPu88)

Fig. 347
Louden Hay Door with Offset Hinges

Page Fifty-three

Louden Improved Hay Rack Clamps — Fig. 555

Specifications Patented Oct. 20, 1903

For building Hay Racks of all sizes.

U-shaped bolts are steel, Jg inch diameter, 12,14,16,

and 18 inches long.
Top washer and intermediate plate malleable iron.
Clip washer of steel.
A set of clamps consists of the following:

8 top washers "W". 8 intermediate plates. "P".

8 lowsr clip plates "C". 8 U-shaped clamp bolts

■•B".
Weight, per set 1 2-inch bolts, 1 1 1-2 pounds.

Weight, per set 14-inch bolts, 11?^ pounds.

Weight, per set 16-inch bolts, 12^^ pounds.

Weight, per set 18-inch bolts, IS'o pounds.

CUP

By means of the Louden Hay Rack
Fig. 645 Clamps and Plates the timbers of the rack Fig. 646

can be put together and securely held in position without having to bore holes in the sills or upper
cross pieces. The rack can be built in one-half the time where the clamps are used and timbers are not
weakened by having holes bored in them.

In illustration. Fig. 647, is shown a hay rack under course of construction, the main and cross sills
having been clamped together. The washers are placed at the points "W", the intermediate plates at
"P", and the clip plates at "C". There is no easier way or better place to build a hay rack than on the
running gears of a wagon. No measuring will be necessary and the rack will always fit the bolsters.

Lengthen out reach until weight of the load will be evenly divided between front and rear axles; stand
main sills on edge close up to standards; place cross sills in position and clamp the two together as shown
in Figs. 646 and 647. The upper cross pieces should be set about two inches back from the ends of main
sills in order that the intermediate plates may get a good, firm hold on the timbers. In this way any one
can build a good rack in a short time, the only tools necessary being wrench and hammer. The rack will
be about one-third stronger than if built in the old way, as the sills will not be weakened by holes, and
the time saved will more than pay for the clamps.

The Intermediate Plates
are of malleable iron and
have heavy flanged edges
or shoulders to fit over the
edges of the main sills "S",
and cross pieces " D ", hold-
ng them firmly in position.
These plates also have lugs
or projections (two above
and two below), that are
driven into the timbers
when the clamps are drawn
down tight, thus prevent-
ing all rubbing or chafing
and making it impossible for
the sills or cross pieces to
warp and get out of line.

The Top Washers are
also of malleable iron and
have a good, wide bearing
surface to prevent them
from cutting into the wood.
The steel bottom plates are
extra heavy and not only
act as washers but prevent
the bottom cross pieces from
being split by a severe
strain.

Material Necessary for Sixteen-Foot Rack

Two pieces 2x8. 16 ft. long for main sills.

One piece 2x4. 16 ft long to be cut up for bottom pieces

Four pieces 2x4, 7 ft. long for cross bars.

Two pieces 2x4. 6 ft. long for front ladder.

Four pieces 2x6. 6 ft. long for sides of rear wheel covering.

Four boards 1x8, 16 ft. long for lengthwise pieces on sides.

One board I x6, 1 2 ft. long for tops of wheel coverings.

Two boards 1x12, 16 ft. long for bottom of rack.

The above specifications cover material necessary for rack 7x16 feet to be used with

our 14-inch clamps: but if it is desired to make a rack of different length or width the

dimensions of the lumber must be changed accordingly. To build a rack with^ larger

main or cross sills use the 1 6 or 18 inch clamps.

Page Fifty-four

Louden Combination Rack Irons — Fig. 593

For Making Hay Racks, Hog Racks, and Wood Racks

Patented May 12. 1908 Specifications

The castings D and H are of the best malleable iion.
A set securely packed in a box consists of 8 holders D,
8 inside irons H, and 40 bolts; all 5 8 diameter. They are
packed with bolts for 8-inch side rails. The lower out-
side bolts are 5 ' 2 and the lower inside bolts are 7 inches
long. For 6-inch side rails change these bolts for bolts
2 inches shorter; and for 10-inch side rails. 2 inches
longer. Weight, per set. 23 pounds.

They are, most practical and serviceable
rack irons. The iron D is a regular stake holder.
Fig. 593 (Fox) ^lg. 594 Fig. 595 provided with lugs or bars at the upper end

between which the cross timber E of the rack is held by a bolt pasing through the lugs and timber, as
shown in Fig. 593. The castings are of the best malleable iron. 1 /- • j • u

In changing to a hog or wood rack the cross timber E is removed and the stake C mserted m the
holder. It may be bolted there if desired, as shown by Fig. 594. The stake is set edgewise, which makes
it much stronger than when set sidewise. • 1. a c- coa J

The bottom timber B, is held in place by two bolts, one on each side of the timber A. Hgs. iVjS and
594 show the outside bolt passed through the bottom of the holder D, and the timber B. Fig. 595 shows
the inside bolt, supported by iron H. Castings D and H are clamped to opposite sides of the timber A
by two common bolts. There is no chance for the timbers to spread apart.

Louden Stake Holders

Fig. 398. Malleable iron. Rounded at the edges to
prevent wear on the stake. Is held in place by a }-2-inch
clip bolt, furnished with each holder. Will receive stake
]^-g X 3J 8 inches. A very strong holder.
Weight, I yi pounds.

Fig. 39832- Malleable iron. Tapering and rounded
at edges to prevent wear on the stake. Held in place
by ordinary bolts (bolts not furnished with holder).
Weight, 134 pounds.

Fig. 624. Steel stake holder. 2)2 inches wide. Jj-
inch thick. Will hold 2x3 or 2x4 inch stake, tapering at
lower end. This holder is designed to bolt to the ends of
the cross timbers on a hay rack, so the basket of the hay
rack may be removed from the floor or attached to it at
will. Weight, I J 2 pounds.

Fig. 627. Pressed steel stake holder. Is made from
stpel 3 inches wide and % '"ch thick and holds stake
1 J 2x3 inches. The top is flaring and bent over to prevent
wearing a notch into the stake. This is an inexpensive
and durable stake holder.
Weight, 1 pound.

Louden Self-Opening Ice Tongs

Specifications

Main body and tines are best crucible steel.

Handle of refined malleable iron.

Riveted together with heavy non-rust rivets.

Points of tines tempered for sharpening.

Made in three sizes:

Fig. 426. 1 3-inch size. Weight, 23-2 pounds.

Fig. 693. 1 7-inch size. Weight, 2^4 pounds.

Fig. 696. 2 1 -inch size. Weight, 3 pounds.

The Louden Self Opening Tongs can be operated

perfectly with one hand. When the hand is closed

down on the handle the tongs open to their widest

extent. When picking up a block of ice or other
Fig. 426 article, the weight of the article, when Hfted, causes

13-inch. ( Cardenas) the tongs to hold fast and firm.

The 13-inch tong is the popular size for household use, while the two larger sizes are used for heavier
work. These tongs are excellent for moving small boxes, nail kegs, etc., in stores and warehouses.

Fig. 398}i (Tampa)

Pressed Steel Stake
Holdei

Fig. 627 (Beach)

Fig. 695 17-inch (Mantanza)
Fig. 696 21-inch (Sharp)

Page Fifty-five

frrrinrni

Louden Wire Stretcher and Hoist

Patented July 7. 1908.

Specifications
Wire Stretcher— Fig. 1268

Fitted with 16 feet of Jg-'nch sisal rope.
Weight. 5}^ pounds.

The Louden Wire Stretcher is the strongest tackle stretcher made. In stretching
the wire the operator stands away from the wire, out of danger, while tightening the
tension, instead of close up to it as with other stretchers.

The wire grips are fitted with raised flanges or guards which absolutely prevent
wires from slipping under the eccentric grips. These grips are fitted with handle
one-third longer than other stretchers, and have an offset curve, giving more con-
venience and greater power for setting the grip with the hand.

The rope grip is positive and will never slip, but will hold the wire at any tension,
or a load at any height.

The wire grips never fail to hold. It is equally satisfactory for stretching barbed
wire or woven wire. The frames of the pulley blocks are made of high-grade steel,
and the fittings are the best malleable iron.

The iron rope sheaves are very smooth to prevent wear on the rope. They turn
on special steel thimbles, insuring ease of operation and great strength. The
stretcher is reeved with a full ;-inch rope, which is included with it.

A swivel at the end next the wire and away from the post lets the twist out of the
wire but does not let the stretcher
itself turn and tangle the ropes, as
do stretchers having a swivel next
to the post, or at both ends. This
hoist has a 400-pound capacity.
When in use the operator is away
from the load instead of under it.

Fig. 12C8 (Key West) r:- ors-, , I A ' V f .

rig. o07 shows Louden s rerlect

Stretcher Hoist stretching and splicing barbed wire; while

Fig. 808 shows same stretching woven wire fence, using

two stretchers, one at the top and the other at the bottom

of the fence.

■ —

X

y

- 1 —

iiil;

^

^

<«*

^

»>^

J

"*■ '

'^1—

_

_J -

!'■ .fl

^

■ MBfcsi

SaB^SfrSRwr™!

■^^^-^P«-M^

Fig.

808

-4

Pag

e Fif

ty-six

^

Apison, Tenn., Aug. 1, 1914.
I^ounden Machinery Company, Fairfield, Iowa.
Gentlemen:

I beg leave to say that the outfit has given entire satis-
faction and that I am much pleased with it. I have used other
makes of hay forks but this is the best that I have ever seen.

It is the only fork in the community and has caused a
lot of comment. The gentleman from whom I bought the
farm came around to see it work. He had been handling
over a hundred acres of hay every year with the back-breaking
pitchfork method, and when he saw the fork work and the
ease with which i filled my mow, he said, "That thing works
like it had good sense." I told him that the man who made
it had a good supply.

I shall always be ready to demonstrate the outfit to any
of my neighbors, for I feel that it is the best hired man that
a farmer can get. Thanking you for all favors. I am

Yours very truly. (Signed) J. L. Hinshaw.

LOUDEN BARN AND GARAGE
DOOR HANGERS

PAGE

Special Garage Door Hanger 59

Bird Proof Barn Door Hanger 60-64

Double Tread Barn Door Hanger 65

Double Strap Barn Door Hanger 66

Standard Barn Door Hanger 66

Door Specialties 67

Silent Salesman 68

.IL

iiEss^sz:

o s^-.>'-jjy-^tf

^^^^^^

^E

FAIRrlELP, IOWA

Louden Special Garage Door Hanger Fig. 1273

Fig. 1273

Patented May 30. 1916.
It is curved at the corner and extends along
takes up but little room in turning the corner.
The roller bearing trolleys are swiveled at
are attached to two sections
of the door only, the third
being free to swing like an
ordinary hinged door. This
affords a convenient doorway
for passing in and out, and
makes it unnecessary to open
the whole door so frequently.

The door is held to its
place at the bottom by two
stay rollers, screwed to the
floor. A third stay roller,
attached to the door itself,
prevents its rubbing or bind-
ing on the side wall.

This hanger is destined to
be the most popular, biggest
selling, and most satisfactory
garage Door Hanger on the
market to-day.

Specifications

Louden garage Door Hanger complete consists of
sufficient track for 6, 8. 10 or 12 foot door together
with the following fittings.
3 Special Swivel Trolley Hangers.
6 Six-inch Strap Hinges.
2 Door Handles.
2 Floor Stay Rollers.
1 Wall Stay Roller.
1 Hasp and Staple.
6 Dozen Screws.

' _, Pound Barbed Chisel Point Nails.
^Veights; Track weighs 1 pound per foot. Fitting

weigh. 18 pounds,
installation: Full directions are furnished with each
outfit. Any carpenter can build door and hang
properly. Track comes in straight sections which
are easily bent to fit building.

This is without doubt the best means of
hanging a garage door ever devised. Practi-
cally no space is wasted either inside or outside
the building. It is neat. It is easily opened
and shut. Wind cannot bother as it does
swinging doors. The door being made in three
sections does not cut off a big corner when
being opened — compelling one to run the car
three or four feet further into the garage — thus
wasting much space in the back of the build-
ing— as is necessary with a one-piece door.

The section of this door which can be used

as a swinging door for passage in and out ib

very convenient. The track for the Garage

Door Hanger is hung inside the door opening.

the adjoining wall. The door is hinged in three parts, and

It lies against the side wall when open,
the point where they connect with the door straps. They

Fig. 1273-A

Fig. 1273-B

Page Fifty-nine

J

Louden Bird-Proof Barn Door Track and Hangers— Fig. 911

Specifications

For all kinds of doors. large and small.

Track is tubular and trolleys travel inside.

Trolley cannot get off the track.

Track is made of No. 14-gauge special steel.

Dimensions of track inside, I 'g inches wide by 2i'6

inches deep.
Supporting brackets for track of steel with embossed

reinforcements.
Wall brackets of refined malleable iron.
Supporting wall brackets may be placed 36 inches

apart, for heavy doors, space 24 inches apart.
End stops and splices for track packed with trolleys
Track is furnished in 4-ft., 6-ft., and 8-ft. lengths.
Weight of track per foot, I ^^ pounds.
Weight of supporting brackets per dozen pair, 9 pounds.

^ y^u

Special Features

Fig. 911

Patented June II. 1912

Trolleys Completely Enclosed. The only opening is the narrow slit beneath the track. There
is no chance for the trolleys to be clogged or derailed. The track is absolutely proof against nesting birds,
trash, rain, snow or sleet.

Flexible at Two Points. The joint in the hanger strap allows the door to swing out away from the
building, frequently avoiding breakage by crowding stock. The joint in the track support permits the
track itself to swing out from the building, making it possible to easily dislodge trash and dirt which may
accumulate behind the track and rot out the siding. This double flexibility allows the door to fit snugly
without sticking or binding.

Roller Bearing Tandem Trolleys. The Trolley Wheels revolve on hardened steel roller bearings

around a tempered steel shaft. Always roll easily. A light push will open or close the heaviest door.

Trolleys Run on Level Tread. The Bird-Proof Track is square, not oval. The level tread reduces

friction to the minimum and overcomes the wedging tendency frequently found in oval tracks which support

Iieavy doors.

Simple and Strong in Construction. The form of the Bird-Proof
Track, and the special grade of steel used in its manufacture, combine to
give it wonderful strength and rigidity. It is further strengthened by the
curved lips on the under side of the track. Will not sag under the weight
of heavy doors.

Door Hanger Trolleys — Fig. 902

Specifications

Frame of trolley of pressed steel with embossed reinforcements.

Supporting loop for strap that carries door of refined malleable iron.

Straps that carry door of No. 12 gauge steel, I •'4 inches wide.

Straps are furnished regular for doors I ^4 inches thick.

Track wheels are of special quality gray iron.

Track wheels are 2 inches in diameter and are roller bearing. (See

Fig. l9BandC, Page 62.)
Bolts for attaching hangers to doors, also end stops and splices for

track are packed with each set of trolleys.
Each set of hangers packed in neat paper box.
Weight per dozen sets, 72 pounds.

Fig. 961

Showing End View of Track
with End Stop Removed

Metal End Stop

Completely Closes

Track

Page Sixty

I — I ^ cr>

TnTTirn

^Sgj^ FAIRFIKfap. IOWA ^^^T^ggS

Fig. 918

Louden Bird-Proof Barn Door Track and Hangers — Continued

We believe this to be the neatest, strongest, easiest operated, and most serviceable barn door hanger
on the market. It has been in use on thousands of barns and we have heard nothmg but good words
spoken of it. You can make no mistake in choosing Bird-Proof. It will give you perfect service.

The Track

The track of the Bird-Proof Hanger is made from a solid
sheet of steel pressed into shape. The ends are closed by
special end stops, bolted in. The track is completely enclosed,
with the exception of the narrow slit at the bottom for the
hanger strap to work in.

The lips of the track on each side of the slit are curved
downward and outward. This feature gives strength and stiff-
ness to the track and insures an even surface on which the
wheels run.

The track is made in standard sections of 4, 6, and 8
feet long. When two or more sections are used, the ends
are held together by a steel splice. The splice is put on without
rivets or bolts and holds the sections firmly so they can never
spread apart. No other track on the market has this
feature.

Support of the Track

The track is supported by heavy steel brackets bent to fit
snugly around the track and close up to the lips on the under j j u

side. A heavy corrugated rib in the center reinforces them strongly— they will never spread and the
track cannot sag under the weight of the heaviest doors.

The brackets are hung to heavy, malleable iron wall fixtures which are bolted to the wall and support
the track in the proper position. The connection between the brackets and wall fixtures is flexible and
allows the track to swing freely out sidewise — one of two points of flexibility in this hanger.

Fig. 961 shows how closely the brackets fit around the track, how the trolley wheel fits mto the groove
of the track and how the lips of this groove curve out.

Flexibility of Track

Fig. 918 shows the track hanging in normal position, but with the door swung partly out. This is the
flexibility for which there is the most common need. It saves many a break trom crowding stock and the
free swing prevents the door from sticking and binding in sliding past an uneven wall.

The arrow points to the narrow space between the track and the barn siding which sometimes fills up

with trash and dirt. With an enclosed track nailed or
fastened solid to the wall the dirt cannot readily be cleaned
out. and when wet will rust the track and rot the barn
siding.

The Louden Flexible Bird-Proof Hanger is the only one
that perfectly overcomes this serious fault.

By simply pressing outward on the door from the inside,
the track may be swung out to allow the trash and chaff to
drop out. This may be done instantly and easily without
gouging it out with a pitchfork or other tool.

The Splice for Louden Bird-Proof Track

In Fig. 893 is shown the splice clamp for holding the
ends of the track, together. No. 1 shows the splice clamp
standing on edge on top of the track and ready to be placed
in position.

No. 2 shows the splice in position and the steel bracket

. „ , ^ pushed partly over it. It will be noted that in No. 1 and

Track Bracket and Supportmg Bracket ^^ ^ ^^^ malleable bracket which attaches to the barn wall

For Bird Proof Track

Page Sixty-one

FrrfflrmmrunTTTTmnTnTfiis

Louden Bird-Proof Barn Door Track and Hangers — Continued

is turned away from the wall. In this position the bracket
will easily slip over the splice.

In No. 3 the bracket is slipped entirely over the splice and
is turned the other way and fastened to the wall. In this
position the bracket binds down on the splice, holding it just
as firm and solid as though it were riveted or bolted in place.
This is a valuable and important feature, as the splice abso-
lutely prevents the ends of the track from separating and
making a rough place in the track, or possibly allowing the
trolley to drop out. The Louden Bird-Proof Track is the only
tubular track having this valuable feature.

Galvanizing

At a small additional cost the Bird-Proof Hanger may be
furnished galvanized if desired. We have our own galvanizing
plant. By this process steel or iron is covered with a heavy
galvanized coating which protects the metal from rust and
corrosion and gives it a longer life of service.

The Trolleys

The Louden Bird-Proof Hanger has a set of two tan-
dem trolleys. Each trolley has two solid iron wheels, fitted
with steel roller bearings and revolving on a steel
shaft. These wheels are carried in a heavy double truck
frame of steel with a corrugated rib to strengthen it. The
wheel shafts are riveted firmly into this frame at each end,

and can never work loose or get out of order. Our patent revolving washer protects the bearings
from wear, reduces friction and adds years of life to the service of the hanger.

Fig. 895

Fig. 902
Roller-Bearing Tandem Trolley

Page Sixty-two

The supporting parts are of heavy
malleable iron, riveted to the truck
frame midway between the two wheels.
This malleable support comes down
just below the lips of the track and
carries a broad steel strap which at-
taches to the door. This is the .»econd
point of flexibility in the Louden Bird-
Proof Hanger, and allows the door to
swing freely sidewise. (See Fig. 902.)

View B is an end or edgewise view
of one wheel, showing the rib or bulge
in the center of its face. This rib fits
neatly into the slot in the track (See
Fig. 961) and keeps the wheels always
in perfect alignment; they can never
wabble from side to side and bind or
rub against the side of the track.
View C shows the roller bearings of
the wheels.

Fig. 19
Detail of Roller Bearing

View B

View C

"irrmnimtiTmrrnnTTrfnT:

TheLOUDEN MACHINERY COMPABJY

(

m

r

Louden Bird-Proof Track

Adjustable Trolleys

Fig. 1052

Patent Pending.

Adjustable hangers permit door to be adjusted ^^ inch
both lateral and vertical.

Frame of trolley of pressed steel with embossed rein-
forcements.

Strap or casting that carries door of refined malleable
iron.

Adjustable feature permits use of hangers on doors
from 1 ' 2 to 3 inches in thickness.

Track wheels are of special quality gray iron.

Track wheels are two inches in diameter and are roller
bearing. (See Fig. 19 B and C, Page 62).

Bolts for attaching to doors, also end stops and splices
for track are packed with each set of hangers. Each set
of hangers packed in neat paper box. Weight, per set,
()j4, pounds.
Fig. 1052

The Louden Adjustable Hanger for Bird-Proof Barn Door Hanger is
without doubt superior to other hangers where conditions make an ad-
justable hanger necessary. One man with a monkey wrench can quickly
and easily adjust the hangers so that the door will clear frost-swollen
ground that would make the door rub at the bottom, or make the door hang true where the siding or
joists have become warped out of shape. The Louden Adjustable Hanger makes it possible for one man
to hang the heaviest door, as the trolleys are run into the track before being attached to the door.

Fig. 1052 shows front view of Adjustable Hanger. By turning the eccentric (E) with a wrench, the
door may be raised or lowered as desired. The bolts (C and D, Figures 1052 and 1053) when nuts are
loosened allow the door to be adjusted up and down, while the bolt (B) (Fig. 1053) permits the door to hang
closer or farther from the barn as desired.

Fig, 1053A shows how the door is "hooked" into the trolley-strap. This is the feature that makes
hanging a door an easy task.

Double Bracket for Bird Proof Track Fig. 1204

It is often necessary to hang doors
in such a way that one can slide past
the other. For such an arrangement
we furnish a double track support
from which two sections of Bird Proof
Track may be hung, one just outside
the other.

m

rrrr^ Jj —

:^

p

(

1

1

(

11

K

1053

1053A

Fig. 1285
Double Supporting Bracket

Fig. 1204

This equipment is the same in every way as the regular Bird Proof,
except that the supporting bracket is longer, and has supports for
two track brackets.

The doors hang true and fit snugly. There is no waste space
between them.

Page Sixty-three

TheLOUPEN MACHINERY COMPANY

Fig. 1200
Specifications

^BBBBWWBBfr

Lae: Screw

Louden Covered Bird

Proof Barn Door Track

Fig. 1200

The Louden Covered Bird-Proof

Door Hanger Track is the heaviest,

strongest, and neatest barn door track

made. The tube in which the trolleys

travel is made from a single sheet of

14-gauge steel pressed into shape.

The tube is 1 '' 8 inches wide and Zj^^

inches deep inside and is exactly the

same as the regular bird-proof track

described on page 60.

The track is completely enclosed

except the narrow opening at the

bottom for the hanger strap to work

in. The lips of the track on the bot-
tom bend downward and outward

making a strong support for the

trolleys and also preventing any dust

or moisture from getting in the track.

The trolleys travel on a level tread

and there is no opportunity for the

track to spread or bind on the trolleys.
The cover being attached to the top

and side of track by a process of electric

welding, makes it conform readily to its

shape and renders it absolutely strong

and rigid.

The cover has an embossed rein-
forcement every 9 inches which adds

greatly to its strength. At the extreme

upper edge of the cover the edge is

bent sharply toward the building.

When the track is made fast to the

barn this upper edge presses into the

barn siding, and no water or moisture

can get behind the track. One inch

of the upper edge of the cover lies flat

against the barn wall and is provided with holes to receive the lag screws for making it fast.
The track is rigidly attached to the barn wall and in this respect it differs from the regular bird-proof

track, which is flexibly hung. The lower edge of the cover extends below the upper edge of the door.

All water and moisture is turned to the outside of the door and the track and the upper edge of the door

are completely protected from the weather.

The back side of the main track has embossed knobs or buttons to hold the track away from the building.

(See Fig. 1201.) This allows an air space between the track and the building, with no opportunity for

moisture to accumulate and rust the track or rot the barn siding.

The ends of the track are closed with steel stops bolted in. (See Fig. 918, page 61.) There is no

(opportunity for trash, dirt or weather to reach the trolleys. The track is always clear and heavy or light

doors travel easy, smooth and
true. To the man who desires
practical utility, long and per-
fect service, a neat and attrac-
tive design in a barn door
track, the slight extra cost of
this track as compared with
otheis on the market will
always be remembered as a
Fig. 1201. Rear View of C-vered Bird-Proof Track gOO<i investment.

For all kinds of doors, large and small.

Track is tubular and trolleys travel inside.

Trolleys cannot get off the track.

The regular Bird-Proof Hanger, Fig. 902, or Bird-Proof Adjustable Hanger,

Fig. 1052, operates in this track.
Body of track is made of No. 14 gauge special steel.
Dimensions of track inside. 1 ^ g inches wide by 2^^ inches deep.
The tubular track has a steel cover made of No. 18 gauge steel, and being

attached by an electric weld, forms a part of the track making it absolutely

strong and rigid.
Embossed reinforcements every nine inches give great strength to the cover.
Cover is made fast to barn wall with lag screws.
Upper edge of cover is provided with holes for lag screws for attaching to

barn wall.
Lower edge of cover extends dovtrn beyond the upper edge of door so rain

and snow cannot blow under.
The extreme upper edge of cover bends sharply toward wall. When track

is in place this edge presses into the barn wall preventing moisture from

penetrating behind the track.
The back side of the main tube is provided with embossed buttons which

hold the track away and allow an air space between the track and the wall.
Track is furnished in 4-ft., 6-ft., and 8-ft. lengths.

Page Sixty-four

mrnTTKl

•■T11T I r r,,^, ^^^

FAIRFIELD. IOWA

■■g

Louden Double-Tread Barn

Door Track and Hanger

Fig. 458

The Double-Tread was the pioneer Flex-
ible Barn Door Hanger, and continues to be
one of the leading hangers in the market.
It is compact, durable, and serviceable,
simple and strong in construction and sure
in its operation. Thousands of these
hangers which have been in constant use
for many years are still rendering faithful,
efficient service — never a hitch in their
operation; not a cent paid out for repairs.

Construction

The Double-Tread is in reality two sets
of hangers — a set on each side of the door
fitted to run on opposite edges of an
inverted T-rail. The track is flexibly hung
to brackets secured to the wall, and will
accommodate itself to the inequalities of
the barn siding. The door can be closely
fitted without danger of sticking or binding
on account of the warping of door or siding.
This feature gives it a decided advantage
over all rigid hangers. The track, being a
T-rail, takes up the least possible room,
and the hanger frame is consequently
shortened and straightened.

The parts of the hanger being clamped
solidly together on both sides of the track
makes it impossible for the trolleys to jump
the track. The door is always in place

and ready to go. There is an absolute center draft; no side hitch to make a strain on the hanger or

throw the door out of plumb.

The four wheels which carry the weight of the door are fitted with turned and tempered steel roller

bearings. Ten of these bearings revolve about a turned and tempered steel shaft.

Door Hanger Trolleys

Frame of trolleys of refined malleable iron.

There are four trolleys with each set of hangers.

Track wheels are of special quality gray iron.

Track wheels are 2^4 inches in diameter and are roller bearing. (See Fig. I9B and C, Page 62.)

Wheels travel on opposite sides of the inverted T-rail, giving a perfect center draft.

Suitable for use on doors from 1 } 2 to 2 inches in thickness.

Bolts for attaching to doors packed with each set of hangers.

Each set of hangers packed in neat paper box.

Weight, per set, 6 pounds.

Track for Double-Tread Hanger

The track is a special T-rail of high carbon steel. Will not sag or break with the

heaviest door. The hooks
and brackets are of refined
SPLICE L\ malleable iron.

The sections of track
are securely spliced to-

Fig. 458

Specifications
Track

For all kinds of doors, large or small.

Track is an inverted steel T-rail.

Width of track 1 3 1 inches.

Track hooks are of refined malleable iron and are riveted solid to

the track.
Wall brackets are of refined malleable iron.
Track hooks engage eyes in the wall brackets making the track

flexible, a very valuable feature.
Wall brackets and track hooks are furnished with the track.
A steel splice clamp is attached to one end of each section of track.
The opposite end of track section is punched to receive splice and

rivet.
Rivets for splice clamps are packed in box with trolleys.
Track is furnished in 4 ft., 6 ft., and 8 ft. lengths.
Weight of track per foot (including track hooks and wall brackets),

I ' 3 pounds.

W^

Fig. 453
Sectional View

Fig. 452 (Lvans) Louden Double-Tread Track
gether; not simply butted together as is frequently the case with cheaper tracks. Cannot become uneven
or spread apart at the joint. Made in 4, 6 and 8 foot lengths.

Page Sixty-five

Louden Double-Strap Covered Jointed
Barn Door Hanger — Fig. 566

Specifications

Frame of trolley of refined malleable iron.

There are two trolleys with each set of hangers.

Track wheels are of special quality gray iron.

Track wheels are 3 inches in diameter and are roller bearing.

19BandC. Page 62.)
Track wheels are protected from weather and trash by a

malleable iron hood.
Straps which attach to the door are of No. 1 2 gauge steel, 1 ' g inches wide
Bolts for attaching to doors packed with each set of hangers.
Each set of hangers packed in neat paper box.
Weight, per set or pair, 6} 3 pounds.

Fig. 483

r- r/-/- ,r> 1- > The Louden Double Strap Barn Door Hanger is giving complete satisfaction in

Fig. 566 (Reliance) ^1 1 r i i.. • • 11 j j r J • J

thousands 01 barns. It is especially recommended tor medium size doors.

This hanger, like all all others of Louden manufacture, is flexible; that is, it allows the door to swing
freely away from the building. (See Fig. 483.)

The trolleys are fitted with tempered steel roller bearings; always roll smoothly and easily. Each
wheel is protected by a malleable iron hood. (See Fig. 566.)

The two straps with four bolts make the Double Strap Hanger much stronger and more durable than
similar hangers having but a single strap and two bolts. The wide frame with the double strap feature
also serves to hold the hanger rigid lengthwise of the track and eliminates the end play found in hangers
with a single bearing directly under the center of the wheel.

Track for Jointed Hangers — Fig. 487

Specifications

Track is of high carbon steel rex\ }4 inches. The opposite end is punched with hole to receive splice and
Supporting wall brackets of refined malleable iron. the connection is easily made and secure.

Wall brackets are riveted solid to the track. Track is furnished in 4-ft.. 6-ft.. and 8-ft. lengths.

A strong malleable iron splice is attached to each end of each Weight of track, per foot, I pound (including supporting
section of track. brackets and splices)

Fig. 487 is the track used for Louden Jointed Hangers. It is made of the best high carbon steel, j\x

\]/^ inches, and will stand twice the strain ordinarily required.

The ends of the sections are securely spliced together by a malleable iron splice riveted into the ends,

and it is impossible for them to become separated,

as do tracks that are simply butted together. ^^ — -^'-■■■■■■-'' ■■■ ■-— '^"^ '^

This splice is riveted to one end of each section

before leaving our factory, and the other end

punched so the connection is easily and quickly

made. This makes one solid rail of the whole

track, no matter how many pieces have been

used, and makes a continuous even tread for the hanger.

We use a refined malleable iron bracket, mortised through the track and riveted on by hand — no
machine work. These brackets have a heavy flange on each side and a brace below
to hold the track in place. This adds materially to the stiffness of the
track and gives it great strength. Made in 4, 6, and 8 foot lengths.

Standard Jointed Barn Door Hanger — Fig. 567

Specifications

Frame of trolleys of refined malleable iron.

There are two trolleys with each set of hangers.

Track wheels are of spjecial quality gray iron.

Track wheels are 3 inches in diameter and are roller bearing. (See Fig. 1 9B & C, Page 62. j

Track wheels are protected from weather and trash by a heavy malleable iron hood.

The strap which attaches to the door is of malleable iron with heavy reinforcing ribs.

Suitable for use on doors of any thickness.

Bolts for attaching to doors packed with each set of trolleys.

Each set of trolleys packed in neat paper box.

Weight, per set or pair, b]/i pounds.

Fig. 487 ^Marble)

Fig. 567 (shamrock)

g. 485

Page Sixty-six

I — t e:: nr>

imsEEsiMaa

.re -iT'l

Standard Jointed Barn Door Hanger — Continued

The Standard Covered Jointed Hanger, Fig. 567, is the same as the Double Strap Covered Hanger,
Fig. 566, except the strap which attaches to the door is refined malleable iron instead of steel and
bolts to one side of the door only. The trolley wheel is protected from weather by a malleable iron hood.
It is provided with keeper lugs which prevent trolley from getting off the track. Also projections on each
side of the trolley cleans trash or other obstructions off the track. Suitable for use on all kinds of

Louden's Sliding Door Latch — Fig. 455

Specifications

Consists of 3 parts, viz: latch with knob; metal catch for
latch ; metal strip for door with slot in which latch works.
Length of latch-point to center of knob, 8 inches.
Length of catch. 4 inches.
Diameter of knob. 3 inches.
Weight, I pound 6 ounces.

€

The latch is lifted and the door opened and

closed by the hand wheel, W, which is generally

placed on the outside, while the central part

c- .ICC /^/I 11 \ (dotted lines L) is bent to form a hand hold on

Fig. 455 (Manilla) .i • -j rru ,. l /^ i n • i

the mside. 1 he catch, C, has flarmg edges to

guide the latch into it. It is reversible and may be used for right or left hand doors. Made of

malleable iron, is strong and durable and can be used on double or single doors.

Louden's Stay Rollers

Fig. 456. This roller is screwed into the
wall to suit the thickness of the door; and
then the brace, B, is slipped over the rib. A,
and fastened to the wall by screws or nails.
This prevents it from turning and getting the
roller out of place.

Fig. 457. This roller can be adjusted to the
thickness of any door, either before or after
fastening to the building, by setting one nut.

Louden Door Stop — Fig. 1205

Every sliding door should be provided with
a stop; it prevents the continual wrenching
of the track supports.

While any block of wood may be made to
serve this purpose, a neat metal stop is desira-
ble. The Louden Pressed Steel Bumper or
Stop is the most satisfactory door stop made
and costs but a trifle. Specifj it in your barn
door hanger order.

Fig. 456 (Cuba;
Specifications

Diameter of roller, 1 ? g inches.
Length of screw (to center of
roller), 6 inches. Roller adjust-
able to suit thickness of door.
Weight, 12 ounces.

Fig. 457 (Havana)

Specifications

Diameter of roller, I ^ g inches.
Length of bracket. 4 inches.
Roller adjustable to suit thick-
ness of door.
Weight, 13 ounces.

Fig. 349 (Puss)
Specifications

Width. 7?4 inches.
Length, 8 ' 2 inches.
Offset. I inch.
Weight, 2 pounds.

or horse power.

Louden Offset Hinge— Fig. 349

Louden Offset Hinges are unequalled for
hanging gable-end doors. These hinges are
made with an offset that allows the bottom of
the door to lap on the siding and keep out the
rain. When the door is open it drops down
against the siding and hugs it so closely that it
is out of the way of the load of hay and allows
the wagon to be drawn close up to the barn.
The wind does not interfere with a door hung
with these hinges. Doors hung with Offset
Hinges may be arranged to open either by hand
and the hinges are of sufficient strength to safely handle

Fig. 1205
Specifications

Width, 332 inches.
Bumpingsurface. 3}^xl J-g inches.
Reinforced by rib.
Weight. 8 ounces.

the largest doors. Bolts or

screws may be used for hanging. Three Offset Hinges may be used for extra large doors

Page Sixty-seven

*\m)^^§:fMMH-^

rAIRFlELD.

Louden Silent Salesman

Specifications

Height: 5 ft. 4 inches.
Width: 5 ft. 2 inches.
Shipping weight, 200 pounds.

Construction: Tubular steel with
the smooth, dust-proof Louden
connections. Model Door, beau-
tiful natural wood finish. Stan-
chion curb, wood painted to
resemble cement.

Equipment: One Louden Junior
Fork Carrier with short section of
track, and Trip Block; one model
door with Louden Bird Proof
Track, having cut-out to show
trolleys; One Louden Tubular
Steel Stanchion equipped with
upper and lower holders and
stanchion guide.

No charge for substituting Covered
Bird Proof Track for Standard.

Gentlemen: We think this dis-
play which you furnished us has
practically doubled our business
in your line over the preceding
year. 1 1 bears out the old state-
ment that goods well displayed
are half sold.
Seaman-Clark Hardware Co.
Albia, Iowa.

Every Louden dealer should have a Louden Silent Salesman.

A Silent Salesman is a producer — not an expense. It is the greatest creator of sales for barn equip-
ment ever put in a store.

It is neat and convenient — a handsome fixture that is a credit to any store.

Hay carriers, especially, have always been hard to demonstrate, but with a Silent Salesman the cus-
tomer will often "sell himself" before he mentions to the merchant that he needs an outfit.

Many dealers have laid the foundation for a big stall and stanchion business with the Silent Salesman.
Many dealers who never sold a steel stanchion before ordering the Salesman are now doing a nice stall
business.

On special orders any hay carrier desired may be substituted for the Louden Junior, and, if desired,
Covered Bird Proof may be substituted for the Standard Bird Proof track.

Send us your order for a Silent Salesman. It will help you build up a big barn-equipment trade.

We have hundreds of letters from dealers who are enthusiastic over the results obtained.

Page Sixty-eight

LOUDEN STEEL STALLS,
STANCHIONS AND PENS

PAGE

The Equipment of Dairy Barns 71-75

By IV m. Louden

Steel Stalls and Fittings 76-97

Standardized Mangers 98-101

Spring Balance Manger Divisions 102-104

Spring Balance Mangers 104-106

Stanchions 109-1 14

Water Bowls. . . .• 115-119

Calf Pens 120-121

Cow Pens 124-125

Bull Pens 126-128

Hog Pens 129-131

Gates and Fittings 132-133

Building Columns 134-135

Cupolas and Ventilators 141-143

Window Ventilators 146

Manger and Gutter Drains 147-148

Paint 149

rrrmTTin

±mr

hpf.OTJDEN MACHINERY COMPANY

The Equipment of Dairy Barns

By William Louden

The growth of the dairy industry in this country
during the last few years has been unprecedented. This
growth marks an epoch in our history— the passing of the
period of exploitation and the beginning of the policy of
conservation. In all new countries, with cheap land and
a virgin soil, dairying is more or less neglected, but as the
price of land advances and its fertility decreases, dairying
has to be taken up to save the soil and make farming

profitable. r -i- •

As the dairy business increases, better tacihties are
needed to keep pace with its development and to meet
its requirements. This is particularly true of Dairy Barn
Equipments. Milk production is the foundation of the
dairy business, and anything that will add to milk produc-
tion or make it more economical or profitable is important
and should receive the most careful consideration.

It is well known that the cow is a sensitive animal, and

that she will respond readily and liberally to comfortable surroundings and to kind
treatment. She has the power of withholding her milk, and will divert her energies
from its production to the protection of herself against uncomfortable or unsanitary
conditions This fact is known by all who have given attention to the subject In
nurnerous instances milk production has been increased from 30 to 40 per cent by
making the cow more comfortable and giving her more sanitary surroundings.

This fact is further attested by the great increase and growing popularity of modern
dairy barn equipments. The old style wooden stalls and stanchions, which were little
aairy Ddrn cq y ^^^^^^ ^^^^ ancient inquisition stocks, with their

flagrantly insanitary features added to that of posi-
tive cruelty— seriously curtailing milk production,
as well as injuring the cows and making the work
harder— have been condemned, and are being rap-
idly discarded. It makes no difference how large
or how small the herd, whether it consists of two
or a hundred cows — whether the owner is an exclu-
sive dairyman or a general farmer — he cannot
afford to use this old style, out-of-date equipment.
in making the change from the old to the iiew,
or in selecting a new equipment for the first time,
the question arises as to the kind of equiprnent
to use, and the purchaser is sometimes puzzled in making a choice. One of the
objects of this catalog is to assist in making a wise selection. Of course, the primary
object is to point out the superior qualities of the Louden goods, but. m addition to
this we desire to furnish the information necessary to enable the purchaser to get what

will best suit his needs. , .,,

Above everything else we desire satisfied customers— custorners who will not
only be satisfied for the time being while the novelty of the thing is fresh but who will
continue to be satisfied as the years go by— the customers who will always be glad
to speak a good word. These are the kind of customers required to build up and
maintain a permanent business.

Equally Comfortable

Page Seventy-one

n,\*i§imMH*-l

We know our Dairy Sarn Equipment is superior to anything else and we want
you, as a prospective customer, to know it. Therefore, we wish to give you the fullest
opportunity possible for a thorough investigation. If you have used our goods it would
be unnecessary to say a word except to show you the improvements we have made since
our last catalog was issued. We are sure that eventually you will use our equipments
as many others are now doing who first tried something else. A dairyman having four
barns, three of which are fitted with our equipments and the other one with an equip-
ment of another make, being asked why he did not use the Louden Equipment in the
other barn, replied, "This was the first barn we built and we profited on our other barns
by our mistakes on this one." It is wise to profit by the mistakes of others.

Two of the prime essentials in a dairy
barn equipment are cleanliness and com-
fort for the cow. The cow should be
made as comfortable in her stall as she is in
the pasture. In short, "Pasture Comfort"
is the condition to be sought for. While
being securely held in place in the stall, she
should be absolutely free to lie down to one
side or the other, and to turn her head, or to
lick her sides, without cramping her neck in
the least, or straining herself in any way. A
cow rarely lies down squarely in the middle
of the stall, but nearly always at one side or
the other. Therefore, the stanchion should
always be anchored to the curb by a single
slack chain that will permit its lower end
to swing in a circle of 8 to 10 inches.
No other arrangement will fill the bill.
A cow in getting up and lying down always pitches forward. Consequently the
stanchion must be free to swing forward and back or she will be sure to jam her shoulders
against it. When held by a stanchion too rigidly anchored the cow will sometimes
make several attempts to rise before she succeeds and will jam her shoulders with each
attempt. This condition should not exist. The lower end of a swiveled or swinging
stanchion should always be sloping or well rounded, and never anywhere near
square or flat ; otherwise the cow will be liable to get her foot caught between the
manger curb and the lower square end of the stanchion and have it severely injured.
This cannot happen when the stanchion has sloping ends.

Cleanliness is equally as important as the comfort of the cow. "Sanitary" is the
word generally used. Everything nowadays is "Sanitary," even "Sanitary" garbage
cans. The word "Sanitary" being so badly overworked, we prefer to use the word
"Cleanliness" which is said to be next to Godliness. The way to keep a dairy barn
"Sanitary" is to make it so it will be easy to clean and easy to keep clean. It will
not and it cannot clean itself. There should be no cracks or crevices anywhere to
catch and hold dirt. Neither should there be any recesses or pockets in which dirt
can collect, nor bars or pipes under which it can gather and be difficult to remove.

Especially is it necessary that the manger and the manger curb over which the cow
has to eat should be constructed to afford no refuge whatever for dirt. Any attach-
ments placed on the curb are Hable to become "dirt catchers.'' In getting a new
equipment be sure to avoid everything which may become a "dirt catcher.'

Plainness, smoothness and simplicity are the things to strive for and not the
addition of attachments which are frequently mere "talking points" having no

Page Seventy-three

rAlRFIELD. IOWA^">

real value. In this way only can you have stalls and mangers which will be
truly "Sanitary."

We have always made it a point to cut out attachments wherever possible and to
make our stalls and stanchions, and pens and other equipments as plain and smooth
as possible, and to have no sharp corners which might injure the animal. Also, to
properly proportion the parts so attachments will not be needed. An examination of
this catalog will show how well we have succeeded.

We have had the longest and largest experience in designing and manufacturing
barn and stable equipments, our business being established nearly fifty years ago. We
do not, however, rely on past achievements. We realize that the world moves and
that an article which was good enough in the past may not be good enough for the
present. We are always striving to make our goods better, and each year we spend
thousands of dollars in improvements.

Our long experience teaches that every change is not an improvement. There are
many illusions and delusions in this world. Sometimes the most "taking things" —
things which for awhile will furnish the greatest selling points, do not make good when
put to the test of time. We strive to avoid all such things no matter how alluring they
may be, and spare neither time nor expense to make sure that our improvements are
genuine and not merely fads or fancies which will soon pass away.

In conducting an extensive business, and with thousand of people to deal with, we
find that there is apparently no end to the different ideas, and sometimes we have to
make things just to please the purchaser. In so doing, our aim is to make the very best
article of the kind that can be made and to always give value received. We do not
wish to dictate or even seem to dictate, but we will always be frank in recommending
what we think is best.

During the last few years we have given much time and study to the standardization
of our goods. Our Standardized Mangers for cow stalls and our improved methods
of constructing them are the greatest improvements made in dairy barn equipments
during the last decade. Agricultural Colleges throughout this and other countries have
adopted our Directions for the instruction of their classes in the proper method of making
mangers for cow stalls.

Perhaps some who read this catalog and look at the elegant equipments shown
will think they are "only for the rich." This is a mistaken idea. Louden Equipments
are made for persons of moderate means as well as for those who have greater wealth
and are within the reach of every farmer. Standardization enables us to produce
better goods at less cost and we are always glad to give our customers their full share
of the benefits resulting therefrom.

We do not say, nor wish to intimate, that if any one buys our equipment, he will
"get rich quick" or immediately become a millionaire. Such claims would not interest
sensible people. We do say that our equipment is, not only the best that is rnade,
but that it will return a good profit on the investment whether the purchaser is rich
or only in moderate circumstances.

We are particular to use the best material in the manufacture of our goods, and to
have everything strong and durable. We have a thoroughly equipped, up-to-date fac-
tory and ample facilities to properly handle the business. We have our own galvanizing
plant and malleable iron foundry and this catalog will show that we have the largest
and most complete hne of Dairy Barn Equipments in the world.

We have Branch Houses in several leading cities. Our goods are also carried in
stock in various parts of the country. In every way we strive to give not only the very
best goods which can be made, but also the very best possible service. Upon this basis
we solicit your patronage.

PaB« Seventy-five

Umm^i^^i^^^^a^^m^S',

The Louden Cross Braced Double Post Cow Stall — Fig. 812

Patented, May 20, 1913

If we were to cease the manufacture of all other cow stalls and confine ourselves to a single pattern, it
would be our Cross Braced Double Post Stall, Fig. 812. It is not only the best, but is also the most
popular stall manufactured. The following are some of its most prominent features:

Perfectly Proportioned. The stall posts are so spaced that there is a good separation between the
feed in the manger and the bedding on the stall floor, while, with our flexibly hung stanchions, there is
ample room between the posts for the comfort of the cow. The posts are set the proper distance apart to
let the stanchion open wide enough to receive the cow's head, and yet not so wide that the cow can walk
right through it. This is one of the faults of single post stalls. It is entirely overcome in our 812 stall.

No Attachments Needed. With single post stalls the cow is liable to place her head in the space
between the post and stanchion and to prevent this, attachments of different kinds are used to at least,
partially remedy the defect. Nothing of the kind is needed with our 812 Stalls. While the posts are set
wide enough apart to give the cow ample freedom to lie down at one side or the other, and to turn her
head or lick her side without cramping, the space is not so wide that the cow is liable to get her head in
the wrong place. There is just one place where the cow can put her head and that is in the open
stanchion, and it will never be so wide open that she will be tempted to force her body through it.

Simplicity of Construction. There are no complicated parts about this stall to get out of order and
cause trouble. In addition to the stanchion, it consists of the continuous top-rail, the vertical stall
posts, the cross brace, and the bent stall partition with the necessary couplings to hold the parts
together. The cross braces are made of different lengths to suit different widths of stalls, whereby the
proper proportions are always preserved.

Page Seventy-six

>^a^.^i:/.Tt>iiL^i^;i-

IOWA

Louden Cross Braced Double Post Cow Stall— Fig. 812

Specifications of Standard Size

Size of Tubing. The stall posts, stall partition, top-
rail and cross brace are all made of the best quality of 1?^
O. D. steel tubing — smooth and exceedingly strong. No
second hand pipe or tubing is used in the construction of
our stalls.

Width. The standard width of the stall is 3 feet 6 inches
(42 in.) but this may be varied to suit requirements and the
top-rail will be cut to suit.

Height. The total height above the stall floor is 5 feet,
3 inches (63 in.). The standard height of the manger curb at
the sides is I 1 inches and at the bottom of the cut-out where
stanchion is anchored is 6 inches. Distance from stanchion
anchor to the underside of top-rail, 4 feet 7 inches (55 in.).

Length of Posts. The stall posts are 5 feet 5 inches
(65 in.) long and with the standard High Built-Up Curb they
go 15 inches into the cement. The lower ends of posts and
partitions are indented to insure a better hold.

Stall Partitions. The cut shows our No. 3 Single Bend
Partition which we recommend and which we furnish unless
otherwise specified. The lower end of the partition goes
5 inches in the cement. It stands 3 feet 6 inches (42 in.)
above the stall floor at the inner end and the same distance
out from center of curb at the bottom. Our No. 2 or No. 5
Partition, described on another page, will be substituted it
preferred.

Stanchions. The cut shows our Tubular Steel Stan-
chions, Fig. 861 , which we recommend and furnish with stalls
unless otherwise specified. If preferred, we will furnish our
Wood-Lined Stanchions. Fig. 937. at the same price, or our
Five-in-One or Quick Adjustable Stanchion at an advance
in price.

Finish. All the parts except the U bolts which are
sherardired. are finished with our Special Dairy Barn Paint,
or will be galvanized if ordered.

Illustration. The cut shows two stalls and one end
section on the cross alley where the end curbs are located.
When there is an alley at each end of a row of stalls, an
extra end section is required for which an extra charge will
be made.

812 Stall Complete includes: 2 Stall Posts; 1 Stall Parti-
tion: 42 inches of top-rail (more or less): I Cross Brace.
10 inches long (more or less): 5 Interlocking Dust-Proof

Couplings; I Tubular or Wood-Lined Stanchion; 1 Stanchion
Holder; 1 Guide or "Hold-Open" for Stanchion, and I Stand-
ard Stanchion Anchor.

End Section Complete includes: 2 Stall Posts; 1 Stall
Partition; I Cross Brace, 3 inches long (more or less); no
top-rail; 2 Interlocking Dust-Proof Couplings; I Right Angle
Corner Coupling, and I Single Piece Elbow.

Weights. The Standard 812 Stall complete with Tubular
Stanchion and 42 inches of top-rail weighs 70 lbs. The
Standard End Section, complete, no top-rail, weighs 45 lbs.

Note: Stalls wider or narrower than 42 inches and
requiring longer or shorter top-rails will weigh a pound or
two more or less. The Wood-Lined. Five-in-One or Quick
Adjustable Stanchion will also add a little to the weight.

Note: When one end of a row of stalls is joined to a wall
the end section at the other end will be counted as a part of
the stalls, but if a wall flange or a partition next the wall is
used, or a post is set between the stanchion and the wall or
is extended up to the ceiling, an extra charge will be made
for these parts.

Dennison, Minn., Sept. 12, 1916

Louden Machinery Co.,
St. Paul, Minn.

Gentlemen:

Have now had 46 cow stanchions and stalls, calf
pens and litter carrier installed for nearly three years
and cannot speak too highly of the equipment.

It is in just as good condition now as on the day it
was installed. In addition to its strength and dura-
bility, it gives the cows a comfort, freedom from lice,
light, airiness and ease that convince me 1 would not
go back to the old fashioned wood stanchions for any
price.

Several new barns have been built in this vicinity
and they have also been equipped with Louden
Stanchions, which proves that they appeal to the
farmer who is alive to his own interests.
Yours truly,

J. O. Lysne.

The Couplings, a transparent view of which is shown by Fig. 933, are interlocking and practically
dust-proof, two bolts only being required to hold the parts together. The upper ends of the couplings on
the top-rail, where dust is most likely to settle, are perfectly smooth ; also the side ends on the stall
posts are smooth where the cows are hkely to rub. No
other couplings begin to compare with these. They are the
strongest and most durable, and are the easiest to clean
and keep clean.

The Manger Construction. The cut shows one of our
Standardized Mangers with High Built-Up Curb (standard
height 1 1 inches) with a cut-out where the stanchion is anchored,
so it will only be the standard height at this point. By this
means the cow cannot nose her feed out on the stall floor and
at the same time there will be plenty of throat space for her to
lie with her head low down in the manger, or to turn her head
to the side in the stall. The cut also shows our latest design
of High Built-Up End Curbs for the manger and the stall floor,
to prevent the feed and the bedding from getting out into the
alley. These curbs and mangers with their corners so com-
pletely rounded, and all so smooth and perfectly molded, are
positively the "last word" in manger construction. Fig. 933. Patented Sept. 20. 1910; July 25, 1916.

Page Seventy-seven

^^jn*!')'"^^-*-^^^*^'**-'*^'^!^*^/^

Strength and Durability. When this style of curb is used the stall posts will stand 15 inches in
solid cement — I 1 inches in the curb and 4 inches in the stall floor. We do not use sawed off posts held
only by flimsy connections which can neither be lined up properly nor held in line. In addition to this,
the posts are braced together a little over half way up between the curb and the top-rail. The cross
braces are short pieces of tubing (the same size and quality as the posts, which are of the best high carbon
tubular steel) and are connected thereto by our Interlocking Dust-Proof Couplings.

Strengthened Stall Partition. In addition to strengthening the posts, this arrangement strengthens
the stall partitions more than One Hundred per cent. This may sound extravagant, but it is true, as
will be readily seen by an inspection of Fig. 1 147. The upper ends of stall partitions are usually clamped
to the vertical stall posts, and no matter how tightly the clamping bolts may be drawn, a side strain on

the partition will cause the clamp to slip on the post and permit the
partition to give way sidewise. By clamping the end of the partition
to the cross brace this cannot occur. The coupling would have to
break or both stall posts would have to bend before the partition
could give a particle. This is a valuable feature and is found only
in our 812 Stall.

The Connection of End Partition. The end partition, while
it is arranged to stand flush with the end post on the alley, is as
solidly connected as the center partitions, as will be seen by Fig.
1 148. A short cross brace is clarrped to an adjacent post and then
this brace and the upper end of the partition is clamped to the end
post by one of our corner couplings, as plainly shown in the cut. In
this way the end partition is solidly connected to both of the posts,
making it as secure as if it was clamped to one of the center braces
connected to two of the center posts.

A Popular Stall. This is an exceedingly popular stall and
undoubtedly there are more of them in use giving the best of
satisfaction than any other stall manufactured. The Dairy Division of the U. S. Department of Agriculture
recommends this stall, and it is being used in a number of Government Barns. It is also used in a
number of State Institutions and in the dairy barns of Agricultural Colleges, as well as by thousands of the
most progressive up-to-date dairymen in this and other countries.

It Fills the Bill in Every Particular. It is well built, strong and durable, and of neat design. It is
properly proportioned and is without any clap-trap attachments or objectionable frills of any kind. It
is a thoroughly busmess stall. It insures the comfort of the cow. It is plain and smooth and simple in con-
struction, and is easy to clean and easy to keep clean, thus filling all requirements of an up-to-date cow stall.
The Fittings. Our Tubular Steel Stanchion which is shown in the cut, is included in the fittings,
but any of our flexibly hung stanchions with sloping or rounded lower ends may be used. The guide or
"Hold-Open," secured to the upper end of the hinged side of the stanchion is also included, as well as the
stanchion holder connected to the top-rail and the anchor set in the curb. Other
fittings may be added, such as manger division, for separating the manger mto
compartments; water bowls, throat chains, and other things shown on other
pages of the catalog, for which an extra charge will be made.

Beware of Infringements. We desire to call attention to our patents on
this stall and on our stall couplings, and to warn all whom it may concern
against infringements. The patent on the stall is dated May 20, 1913, No.
1,062,295. andon the coupling, September 20 1910, No. 970,737, andjuly 25. 1916,
No. 1.192,216. These improvements are too valuable to let them go by default,
and we do not propose to do so. We are amply prepared to supply these stalls and
coupling; in any quantities upon reasonable terms. Therefore, there is no neces-
sity for buying infringing devices, which at best would only be imitations and
would not possess the full measure of the valuable features of the Louden goods. Fig. 1148

Complete Directions are furnished for setting up the stalls and constructing the mangers which will
enable any person of average mechanical skill to do a first-class job. Also tools, for which see page 101.
Wood Will be Discarded. It will not be many years until wood will be entirely discarded in dairy
barns for stalls, stanchions, mangers, animal pens or other similar purposes. During the recent outbreak
of the foot-and-mouth disease, in a number of cases, government inspectors ordered the wooden parts of
the equipment to be torn out and destroyed. The metal and concrete parts could be easily disinfected
but it was difficult to disinfect the wood so as to kill the disease germs. This applies to the wood Immg
of stanchions as well as other wooden parts.

Page Seventy-eight

Louden Stall Partitions

Specifications

Standard, made of I^s O. D. high carbon steel
tubing. Height and width given in cut. Lower ends
go 3 inches in the concrete.

Fittings. When used with our complete stalls the
fittings are included, except when the partitions are
to be set on a floor. In that case 5 inches will be cut
off the lower ends, and Floor Flanges will be used.
Weights. Standard size, No. 2, weighs about
14 lbs.: No. 3, 13 lbs.: No. 5, 12 lbs.

The Partition is an important part of a
Cow Stall. It is necessary to prevent a cow
from stepping on her neighbor and bruising
her udder or crushing her teats when she is
lying down. Also, to prevent her from turn-
ing sidewise and crowding an adjacent cow
or soiling an adjacent stall. No cow stall is complete without partitions and dairymen who have
tried to do without them have finally been compelled to use them.

We make three different styles of partitions, as shown by Fig. 994. We recommend our No. 3 for
large and medium size cows and No. 5 for small cows. Nos. 3 and 5 are alike except that No. 3 is 6 inches
longer. By cutting off this extra 6 inches it will become a No. 5. No. 2 is fancied by some people,
especially those who have not had the greatest experience. We are the original designers of the No. 2,
but our experience has taught us that it is not as good as No. 3 or No. 5, for the following reasons:
1st. The triple bend makes it weaker than the single bend. 2d. It is harder to line up and will
not line up at all when the view is quartering. 3d. There is a liability of the cow being crowded on
to the flat part of the "Sway-Back" and hanging there so as to injure her udder. 4th. If the cow
should happen to get down under the partition it would be more difficult for her to get up from
under the No. 2 than the No. 3 or the No. 3.

However, this is a matter for purchasers to decide. If you prefer the triple bend (the "Goose-Neck" or the
"Sway-Back" as it is sometimes called), to the plain Single Bend Partitions, we have nothing further to say.
The No. 3 partition will be furnished with all Louden stalls except the Go-Right unless otherwise specified.

The Louden Machinery Co.. Fairfield, Iowa.

Hayward. Wis.. July I. 1916

Gentlemen:

I wish to state that the Barn Fixtures I bought

from you in 1914 have given the very best of satisfaction and we can assure you

that we are more than pleased with them.

Please send me your latest General Catalog.

C. D. Benack. Prop.
Idlehurst Lodge Farm and Summer Resort on Round Lake.

A section of a well-lighted dairy barn equipped with the Louden 812 Stalls, Tubular Steel Stanchions,
and High Built-Up Manger Curb. The cowa certainly look contented and comfortable.

Page Seventy-nine

LOUDEN MACH^

•^ESTABLISHED IQQTT^

11.

',^m

i

lA

Interior view of the new round barn of the Hershey Company of Hershey,
Pa., manufacturers of the famous Hershey Milk Chocolates: fitted through-
out with Louden Equipments. See what the manager says on next page.

^^^

NERY COMPANY <l^

•^^FAIR FIELD. I OW^aT^

Louden Triple Post Cow Stall — Fig. 810

This is a good, substantial stall. It is well proportioned, and has most of the special Louden features,
such as simplicity and smoothness of construction and the Interlocking Dust-Proof Couplings. The side
posts can be set wider or narrower as may be required for wider or narrower stalls, thus preserving the
proper proportions between the posts so the cow will not be liable to put her head in the space between
the stanchion and the post.

Also, what is of even greater importance — the stanchion will not open so wide that the cow can walk
right through it. Such being the case, no extra attachments will be required to cure defects. There
is a good separation between the feed in the manger and the bedding on the stall floor. The manger con-
struction shown in the cut is up-to-date in every respect, the corners all being completely rounded to pre-
vent injury to the cow, and to avoid "Dirt Catchers" which are the bane of many dairy barns.

It has the Louden High Built-Up Curb at the sides of the stanchions, and also the end curb to pre-
vent the feed and bedding from getting out into the alley. The cut shows the end curb is sloped from
the top of the manger to within a few inches of the stall floor at the gutter, but if preferred, it may be
made level from the top of the manger to the stall post and then level from the manger curb as shown by
Fig. 812.

This stall is specially adapted to use with columns or large posts, as shown by Fig. 934, Page 134. The
stall partitions are connected directly to the columns by our large post couplings, see N-14 and N-15,
Plate I 5, Page 1 36. When a large post or column is used and the stalls are narrow the side posts are
generally dispensed with.

Page Eighty-two

SSy^ FAIRFIELD. I O WA'^J^^T^ji^

Louden Triple Post Cow Stall— Fig. 810

Specifications of Standard Size

Sizes of Tubing. We use I % O. D. steel tubing for
the center posts, stall partitions and top-rail. The side
posts are I A O. D. tubing.

Note: The width and the height of 810 Stalls, and the
lengths of the posts, are the same as the 812 Stalls. See
Specifications on Page 77. The stall partitions, the stan-
chions, and the finish are also the same.

Illustration. The cut shows two stalls and one end
section on the cross alley where the end curbs are located.
When there is an alley at each end of a row of stalls, an
extra end section is required for which an extra charge will
be made.

810 Stall Complete consists of I Center Stall Post; 2
Side Posts. 42 inches of Top Rail (more or less); I Stall Par-
tition; 2 Interlocking Dust-Proof Couplings: 2 Grip Clamps
for side posts (See N-19, Plate 13, page 136); 1 Tubular or
Wood-Lined Stanchion; I Regular Stanchion Holder; I Guide
or "Hold-Open" for Stanchion, and 1 Regular Stanchion
Anchor.

810 End Section, consists of 1 Main Stall Post; I Par-
tition; no top-rail; I Interlocking Dust-Proof Coupling; I
Grip Clamp, and I Single Piece Elbow.

Weight. The Standard 810 Stall complete with Tubular
Steel Stanchion and 42 inches of top-rail weighs 72 ' 2 lbs.
The Standard 810 End Section, no top-rail, weighs 37 lbs.

Note: Stalls wider or narrower than 42 inches and re-
quiring longer or shorter top-rails will weigh a pound or

two more or less. The Wood-Lined. Five-in-One or Quick
Adjustable Stanchion will also add a little to the weight.
Note: When one end of a row of stalls is joined to a wall
the end section at the other end will be counted as a part of
the stalls, but if a wall flange or a partition next the wall
is used, or a post is set between the stanchion and the wall
or is extended up to the ceiling, an extra charge will be
made for these parts.

River Falls, Wis., Dec. 20. 1915
Louden Machinery Company

Fairfield. Iowa
Gentlemen :

1 now have my fixtures installed complete and
am very proud of the result. They lighten the work
and make it a pleasure. My barn now presents an
excellent example of what can be done with a some-
what old and not overly well-planned barn by a
judicious use of modern fixtures. Should you ever
care to direct visitors to view this transformation,
1 bid them hearty welcome. 1 am now a Louden
Booster.

Thanking you most heartily for your cour-
teous and considerate treatment. 1 am

D. E. Flower.

Flowercrest Herd.

Louden High Built-Up Curb and the Low Level Curb— Fig. 1187

Fig. 1187

Fig. 1187 shows the difference between the ordinary level curb and the Louden High Built-Up Curb
with cut-out for stanchion. The dotted line shows the difference in height.

The Louden stanchion has a distinct advantage over any other type, in that it can be used with either
the Built-Up Curb or the low level curb. Double-chain-hung or square bottomed stanchions, or those
that require wide, flat anchors cannot be used with a Built-Up Curb. They must be hung on a level
curb not more than 6 inches high, to allow the cow to lie down comfortably when in the stanchion.

The lowest point in the "cut-out" of the Built-Up Curb is the same height as the top of the ordinary
level curb. The top of the curb is 5 inches higher.

This design allows the stanchion to hang low enough for the comfort of the cow but does not permit
her to nose her feed out of the manger. Feed is never thrown out of the manger directly behmd the
cow's nose, but always to one side or the other.

With the Louden tools it costs no more to put in the High Built-Up Curb than the low level type.
Its handsome design improves the appearance of the stall row, and the saving of feed commends it.

We are prepared to furnish all forms for manger and curb construction.

Page Eighty-three

Louden Side Post Stall-Fig. 959

Our Side Post Stall is the same as our Triple Post Stall, Fig. 810, with the side post next the open side
of the stanchion left off. It is a simple, neat appearing stall— exceedingly smooth and easy to clean and
keep clean. It has our Interlocking Dust-Proof Couplings and other special Louden Features. Any dairy-
man or farmer who has small-sized cows, or who has to provide stabling for young stock, will find this a
very satisfactory stall.

When a wider stall is required, the stanchion may be prevented from opening too wide by using our
Stanchion Side Chain which is attached to the top-rail and to the open end of the stanchion, as shown by
Fig. 1 1 49. This chain takes the place of the guide or " Hold-Open " generally used to catch on the adjacent
stall post and hold the stanchion in open position to receive the cow's head. When the stanchion is closed
the slack in the chain will permit it to turn freely, thus giving the cow the necessary freedom of movement.

The Louden Stanchion Side Chain is 1 ! inches long, and is fitted with a Pressed Steel Clip at each
end (see N-24, Plate I 5, page I 36). the clip at the lower end being adapted to clamp on the open end of
the stanchion, and the clip at the upper end to clamp on the top-rail as shown in cut. Be sure to
specify the size of the top-rail so we can furnish clip to fit.

Fig. 1 149 also shows our Improved Throat Chains, which are also fitted with our Pressed Steel Clips
which may be adjustably attached to the posts of any of our stalls. There are a pair of chains each 27
inches long and each having a hook on its free end so they can be hooked together, high or low, as may be
wanted. Dairymen will find our throat chains useful for a number of purposes. The clips are made for
Ifs and 1 J^3 O. D. tubing. Be sure to specify size in ordering.

Page Eighty-four

Louden Side Post Cow Stall-Fig. 959-Continued

Specifications

Fig. 959 Stall Complete consists of I Main Post; 1 Side
Post: I Stall Partition: 39 inches of Top-Rail (more or less): 2
Interlocking Dust-Proof Couplings: I Grip Clamp: 1 Tubular
or Wood-Lined Stanchion: 1 Regular Stanchion Holder: I Guide
or"HoId-Open" for Stanchion, and I Regular Stanchion Anchor.

End Section Complete consists of I Main Post: I Stall
Partition; no Top-Rail: I Interlocking Dust-Proof Coupling:
and 1 Single Piece Elbow.

Weight. 939 Stall complete with Tubular Steel Stan-
chion and 39 inches of top-rail. 62 '2 lbs.: End Section Com-
plete (no top-rail). 29 lbs.

Note: When one end of a row of stalls is joined to a wall
the end section at the other end will be counted as a part of
the stalls, but if a wall flange or a partition next the wall
is used, or a post is set between the stanchion and the wall
or is extended up to the ceiling, an extra charge will be
made for these parts.

St. Ansgar. Iowa, July 16, 1916.
Louden Machinery Co.. Fairfield. Iowa.
Gentlemen:

In reply to yours of recent date wish to say that
1 am very well pleased with the equipment I bought
from you two years ago and am satisfied that no man
would go wrong in buying equipment from your
Company. For the treatment I received was prompt
and courteous and the workmanship and material are
of the best. Will try to send you a photo of my barn
at some future time should you wish it. And will be
glad to have prospective buyers look over my equip-
ment at any time and 1 will recommend it as being the
best line of barn equipment that I know of.

Robt. Doscher.

Fig. 1149

Standard Size. The top-rail, main posts and parti-
tions are made of Pg O. D. best quality of steel tubing.
The side posts are made of I 5^ steel tubing.

Note: The height of 959 Stalls and the lengths of the
Posts are the same as the 812 Stalls See specifications on
page 77. The Stall Partitions, the Stanchions and the finish
are the same.

Illustration. The cut shows two stalls and one End
Section on the cross alley where the end curbs are located.
When there is an alley at each end of a row of stalls, an
extra end section is required for which an extra charge will
be made.

Separate Stalls or a Continuous Top-Rail — Which?

If preferred, we can furnish Stalls Built Separately (in-
stead of having a Continuous Top-Rail), as represented by
Fig. I 194. which shows the Louden 812 Stalls with the top-rail
left off and the upper ends of the posts joined together over each
stall, the only connection between them being the cross braces to
which the upper ends of the stall partitions are connected. Not-
withstanding our ability to furnish stalls of this kind, we must
cond'^nin them.

The Continuous Top-Rail is an important part of cow
stalls, and when we discard it we sacrifice strength and dura-
bility. Stalls built separately are also harder to line up and
to hold in line. In addition to this, it is more difficult to
adjust them to fit the barn. With the Continuous Top-
Fig. 1194 Rail all that is necessary is to adjust the couplings to make the
stalls any width desired or to make them different widths to accommodate the space in the barn. If the
top-rail is too long, cut it off; if too short, add a piece to it. , „ , , j . ^u

With stalls built separate this cannot be done. In such cases the stalls have to be returned to the
factory and other stalls built to take their place. Everybody knows that in Union there is strength,
while in "division there is weakness." Build your stalls with a continuous top-rail arid you make them
strong. Build them separate and you make them weak. It is also easier to add nriore stalls as they
are needed when the Continuous Top-Rail is used. In every way the Continuous Top-Rail is superior to
the separately-built stalls and we cannot help but think that this idea is a passing fad. Nevertheless,
if our customers want stalls of this kind we will bow to their wishes and will give them the best possible
under the circumstance.

Page Eighty-five

Thp LOUDEN MACHINERY COMPANY

^V^C" FAIRFIELD. IOWA ^^jV^

Louden Single Post Cow Stall Fig. 796

Specifications

Weights. Our Standard Size 796 stall complete, weighs
51 '2 lbs.; Standard 796 End Section complete, weighs 27 lbs.

Note: When one end of a row of stalls is joined to a wall
the end section at the other end will be counted as a part of
the stalls, but if a wall flange or a partition next the wall
is used, or a post is set between the stanchion and the wall
or is extended up to the ceiling, an extra charge will be
made for these parts.

Standard Size. The top-rail, stall posts and stall
partitions are made of \^ g O- D- steel tubing.

Note: The height of the 796 Stall and the length of the
posts are the same as our 812 Stall. See sf)ecifications on
page 77. The stall partitions, the stanchions and finish are
also the same.

Illustration. The cut shows two stalls and one end
section on tlie cross alley where the end curbs are located.
When there is an alley at each end of a row of stalls, an extra
end section is required for which an extra charge will be made.

Fig. 796 Stall Complete, consists of 1 Stall Post; I
Stall Partition; 36 inches of Top-Rail (more or less); 2 Inter-
locking Dust-Proof Couplings; I Tubular Steel or Wood-
Lined Stanchion; 1 Regular Stanchion Holder; 1 Guide or
Hold - Open for stanchion, and 1 Regular Stanchion
Anchor.

End Section Complete consists of I Stall Post; I Stall
Partition; I Interlocking Dust-Proof Coupling, and 1 Single
Piece Elbow.

This is an excellent Stall for young stock or for small cows where it is not necessary to make the stalls
over 3 feet wide. Many dairymen wish to provide for stabHng young stock, especially heifers, until
they are old enough to join the producing herd. These Stalls when equipped with our Narrow Stanchions
are well adapted to this purpose. They are not recommended for cows requiring wider stalls because there
would be too much space between the stall posts and stanchions, and the stanchions would open too wide
unless stanchion side chains were used.

These stalls have our Interlocking Dust-Proof Couplings and other Louden features. The cut shows
one of our Standardized Mangers with High Built-Up End and Manger Curbs — the best that has ever
been made. Probably it is not necessary that so fine a manger be used with this inexpensive stall, but
for all the difference there is in cost, hardly anyone would want to use the common manger.

Hazel ton

No. Dak., July 12

1916

Louden Machinery

Co.

St. Pau

. Minn.

Gentlemen:

The •

'Louden

Barn Equipment'

I bought

three

years ago

has given me

very great sa

tisfaction.

L. H.

Koon.

Va

lley View Stock Farm.

Page Eighty-seven

mmi,uu\i>.'tu^4'.wi*!i'Mn>\-^^(l

Louden Go-Right Cow Stall Fig. 999

(Patented May 30, 1916)

This is an attachment to use with our Single-Post Stalls to close the space between the stall post and
the stanchion when open and thus prevent the cow from putting her head in the wrong place. While
not needed with our Double-Post and Triple-Post Stalls it is used with Single-Post Stalls when made wide
enough to accommodate medium or large size cows. The Louden Go-Right is decidedly the best arrange-
ment of the kind in the market, and we recommend it for the following reasons:

1st. As will be seen by Figs. 999 and 1000, which show the Go-Right in both open and closed position,
it is extremely simple in construction and easy to keep clean. There are no sharp corners anywhere to
injure the cow. Neither are there any cracks, crevices or pockets to catch and hold dirt or afford breeding
places for disease germs.

2d. The swinging guard which prevents the cow from putting her head between the stanchion and
the stall post does not have to be set in or on the curb where it would be liable to bind on the hay in the
manger, or strike the cow's knees or pinch her feet, or — worst of all — form a "dirt catcher." The lower
ends of the guards which are made of I ,V O. D. steel tubing, are rounded, and are hinged to the stall posts
a sufficient distance above the curb to avoid any interference.

3d. The operating mechanism is both simple and effective. It consists of a shift rod made of \^g
O. D. steel tubing extending over a row of stalls and connected by swivel malleable castings to the upper
ends of the guards as shown in the cuts. At one end a shift lever which is connected to the shift rod, is
pivoted to the top-rail of the row of stalls. By moving the lever in one direction the Go-Right Guards
are swung into line with the stall posts, thus closing the space between the stall posts and the stanchions,
and by moving the lever in the opposite direction the guards are swung out in line with the stall parti-
tions, as shown in the cuts. At the same time and without additional mechanism, the guards are auto-
matically locked in either position. When closed the guards cannot be opened and when opened they
cannot be closed without moving the shift lever — a most valuable feature not found in other devices of
this kind.

The illustrations show our Wood-Lined Stanchions, Triple Bend Stall Partitions, High Built-Up
Manger Curbs, and Spring Balanced Mangers which are described on other pages. To make the stalls com-
plete, the stanchions should be fitted with our Stanchion Side Chains (see Figure 1 149, Page 85), to pre-
vent them from opening too wide.

Page Eighty-eight

Louden Go-Right Cow Stall— Fig. 1000

Specifications

Size of Tubing. The top-rail, stall posts and stall
partitions are made of I '' g O. D. steel tubing.

Note: The width and the height of these Stalls and the
lengths of the Posts are the same as the 812 Stalls. See
specifications on page 77.

Go-Right Attachment. The guards are made of 1 i^j
O. D. steel tubing, having their upper and lower ends bent
as shown, and hinged to the stall posts by malleable iron
clamps which hold the ends of the guards securely, while
they loosely encircle and rotate on the posts. The lower
ends of the guards are held up from the curb by collars on
the posts, as shown in the cuts.

Shift Rod. The Shift Rod which is connected to the
upper ends of the guards to open and close them is of X^i
O. D. steel tubing and is cut to suit the length of the section
of stalls to which the Go-Right is applied. The lever and
the clamp by which the lever is pivoted to the top-rail are
malleable iron. The Pitman connecting the shift rod and
the lever together is halt-inch wrought iron.

Illustration. The cuts show three stalls and part of
another and one End Section. When there is an alley at
each end of a row of stalls, an extra End Section is required
for which an extra charge will be made. The cuts also
show our Spring Balanced Galvanized Mangers which are
illustrated and specifications given on other pages.

Go-Right Stall Complete. (Without Manger shown in
cut) consists of 1 Stall Post; I Stall Partition; 42 inches of
Top-Rail (more or less); 2 Interlocking Dust-Proof Couplings; I

Bending Steel Tubing

High Carbon Tubular Steel is too stiff and strong to bend readily. The bending apparatus must be
the very best and the curves must be not too sharp. The only tubing we bend in the manufacture of
our Cow Stalls are the stall partitions, the sides for our Tubular Stanchions and the guards for our Go-
Right Stalls. We believe that a piece of tubing is stronger straight than bent and only bend it when
absolutely necessary, and certainly never to prove the quality of the tubing. The quality of the tubing
cannot be proved in this way because a soft iron tube or a piece of lead pipe will bend more easily
than high carbon tubular steel, but this does not prove that soft iron tubing or a piece of lead pipe
is as good material for cow stalls as high carbon tubular steel. We get our tubing from the best mills
in the country and warrant it equal to any tubing made.

1 Wood-Lined or Tubular Steel Stanchion ;1 Regular Stanchion
Holder; 1 Guide or Hold-Open for Stanchion; I Regular
Stanchion Anchor; 1 Go-Right Guard fitted with hinge cast-
ings for the stall posts; 1 Collar to support lower end of guard.

In addition to the above we furnish 1 Shift Lever; 1 Pivot
Clamp for shift lever; 1 Tubular Shift Rod for each section
of 2, 3 or more stalls, cut the proper length to connect to
the upper ends of the hinge castings and to operate the
guards, and one Pitman to connect the Shift Lever and Shift
Rod together.

End Section Complete. Consists of 1 Stall Post; I
Stall Partition; 1 Interlocking Dust-Proof Coupling; 1 Single-
Piece Elbow.

Weight. Go-Right Stall complete, as specified. 63 lbs.;
End Section complete (no top-rail), as specified, 27 lbs.

Note: When one end of a row of stalls is joined to a wall
the end section at the other end will be counted as a part of
the stalls, but if a wall flange or a partition next the wall is
used, or a post is set between the stanchion and the wall
or is extended up to the ceiling, an extra charge will be made
for these parts.

The Louden Machinery Co.. Mitchell, So. Dak., July I 1-16

Fairfield, Iowa
Gentlemen; I am happy to state that the barn equipment
which I purchased from you has given complete satisfaction.

I appreciate the kind, businesslike treatment which 1 have
received at your hands, and will be sure to call upon you when I
need goods in your line. 1 remain, very truly yours.

Frank Weller.

Page Eighty-nine

Louden Go-Right Stalls in a Government Dairy Barn

The illustration shows an interior view of the dairy barn of the Haskell Institute, the great Govern-
ment Indian School at Lawrence. Kan. Eighty-one Louden Go-Right Stalls are used together with
Louden Calf Pens, Cow Pens and Bull Pens, and Feed and Litter Carriers.

The following letter, written by Mr. McArthur, dairyman at Haskell Institute, gives the opmion
of the users:

Gentlemen: , , , _.,,,., j u j

The Louden Equipment has been put to the test with inexperienced help. The Indian boys were inexperienced, had no
training, which together with a herd of young cows, was very trying regarding strength and utihty. I will confess that 1
had fears that our Indian boys would be too reckless and careless and would therefore cause considerable breakage but
to my surprise, the hard strain of a winter's use with 125 head of cattle, there is not the least repair needed in stanchions
bull, cow, or calf pens. You remember we hung up 96 feet of Go-Right to pull with one lever, which you were atraid
would be too hard to handle. It works easily, and the boys handle it with one hand. ■ • c

The High Curb with cut-out for stanchions is great from a standpoint ot econ-
omy, as the cows can't possibly waste their feed by throwing it under their feet.
We water the stock in the cement mangers during stormy weather. The dairy barn
at Haskell is now a place of interest to visitors who pass constantly through the
institution, and remarks of praise regarding Louden Equipment are constantly heard.

Very respectfully.

Donald McArthur.

The United States Government has been using Louden Equiprnent
for many years, and the fact that it is specified for government buildings
is one of the strongest recommendations that can be given.

Fig. 1189

Fig. 1 189 shows the concrete cut away around the lower ends of the
stall posts and stall partitions and around the stanchion anchor which
is sherardized so the nuts will not rust but may be taken off and
replaced any time to change a stanchion. See how securely the parts
are held in the concrete, particularly the stanchion anchor which reaches
nearly to the bottom of the curb. The crimps in the lower ends of the
tubing will effectually prevent them from pulling out. Also, note the
absence of pockets or other "dirt catchers" at the bottoms of the
stall posts or at the stanchion anchor.

Page Ninety

Louden Simplicity Cow Stall — Fig. 951

We do not recommend any wood parts for cow stalls, especially since Government Inspectors in deal-
ing with the recent outbreak of the foot-and-mouth disease have in some instances ordered the tearing out
of all wood fixtures in dairy barns. Nevertheless, there may be some parties who have timber of their own
which they can use and who can possibly save some money by so doing. To such parties our Simplicity
Stall will appeal. It is inexpensive, and at the same time is in a certain measure, sanitary — easy to clean
and easy to keep clean.

The posts are made of 2 x 6, and the top-rail of 2 x 4 timbers. They should be dressed and painted to

make them easy to clean. The mangers and the curb should be of concrete, and if wood scantlings are

used for the curb, the space between them should be filled with concrete to prevent it from filling with

objectionable matter. o -ti ..•

' bpecincations

Metal Parts. We furnish only the Metal Parts as
follows: Stall Partitions; Flanges to connect upper ends
of partitions to stall posts; Stanchions; Bolts to connect
upper ends of stanchions to top-rail; Guides (or hold-open)
for stanchions; Stanchion Anchors. When wood floors are
used or cement floors are already in. Floor Flanges will be
needed, also Anchor Bolts. We do not furnish the bolts
to join the wood parts together as they can be procured at
any hardware store. Directions are furnished for making
and setting up stalls.

Illustration shows our No. 3 Stall Partition which we
recommend and will furnish unless our No. 2 or No. 5 par-
titions are specified. (See Fig. 994, page 79.) Also, our
Tubular Steel Stanchions which we recommend and will
furnish unless otherwise specified. There will be an extra
charge for either the Five-in-One or Quick Adjustable Stan-
chions, but no extra charge for our Wood-Lined Stanchions.

Finish. All the parts except the U bolts for stanchion
anchors, which are sherardized. are coated with our Sf)ecial
Dairy Barn Paint or, if so ordered, will be galvanized at
extra prices given.

Cut shows three stalls and one End Section. When there
is an alley at each end of a row of stalls, an extra End Section
will be required for which an extra charge will be made.

Simplicity Fittings, complete for each stall, consist of
1 Stall Partition; I Post Flange; 1 Tubular Steel or Wood-Lined
Stanchion; I Bolt to connect stanchion to top-rail; 1 Guide or
Hold-Open for stanchion: 1 Regular Stanchion Anchor.

Simplicity End Section, complete, consists of I Stall
Partition and I Post Flange.

Weights. Fittings for stall weigh 31 lbs.; End Section,
18 lbs.

Special. When the stall is to be set on a wood floor
or on a cement floor already in, the lower ends of the par-
tition will have to be cut 5 inches shorter and floor flange
will be required together with lag screws for the wood floor
and anchor bolts for the cement floor.

Barron. Wis.

. July

11. 1916.

The Louden Machinery Company,

St. Paul

Min|n.

Gentlemen:

1 am very

much pleased with the

barn equipments

1

got from you

and will

certainly call

on you again if

1

need more.

Dr. H. M.

Coleman.

Page Ninety-one

I — I ^ CT)

Louden (Patent Allowed) Adjustable Cow Stalls— Fig. 948

One of the important things in Cow Stalls is to get the stall floor the proper length to suit the cow.
If made too short the cow will either stand with her hind feet in the gutter or be cramped too close against
the manger. If made too long the droppings will fall on the rear end of the stall floor and soil the cows.

A number of things have been devised in the attempt to overcome this difficulty, but most of thern have
proved of little or no value except perhaps, to furnish "talking points" in making sales. The principal
device used has been the so-called "Stanchion Alignment." It is claimed that by adjusting the stanchion
backward or forward, long and short cows alike can be aligned on the gutter regardless of the distance from
the manger to the gutter. This has seemed plausible and it is certainly "easy" if it will only do the work.

A few facts briefly stated will show the futility of this plan of alignment. In the first place, the cow will
always align herself, if possible, on her feed in the manger, and the only sure way to align her on the gutter
will be to make the distance between the gutter and the manger to suit the length of the cow.
That it cannot be done by merely adjusting the stanchion backward or forward is eviderit from the fact
that the cow's neck is from 15 to 20 inches long. A long cow "aligned forward" will simply step back
until her head comes in contact with the stanchion, and a short cow "aligned back" will simply move
forward until her shoulders come against the stanchion. She always aligns herself on her feed.

A change of 5 to 10 inches in the location of the stanchion, will never do the business. The way to do
it effectively is to regulate the distance between the manger and the gutter to suit the length of the
cow. This is the plan we have adopted in our Adjustable Stalls. Individual mangers are attached to
special frames which are adjustable on the permanent frame of the stall, so that the distance between the
manger and the gutter can be adjusted back and forth 13 inches, or more if required to suit the length of
each individual cow.

A good view of the arrangement is shown by Figs. 948 and 949, the latter being an end view, and the
former a rear view showing one of the mangers raised for cleaning. The special frames to which the stan-
chions and mangers are attached, are provided with horizontal ends which are secured to the stall posts
by clamps which are readily tightened to hold the mangers and stanchions in the proper positions, and
loosened to adjust them to those positions. The adjustment is made by loosening the upper bolts of
the clamps, while the lower bolts remain tightened to hold the clamps in their proper positions.

Page Ninety-two

finrnmn

Fig. 949
Specifications

Size of Tubing. Stall posts, stall partitions and top-
rail. I J'g inch O. D. steel tubing. Upper and lower hori-
zontal rails to which stanchions are connected, Hg O. D.
steel tubing. Side guards adjustably attached to upper
and lower horizontal rails by Louden Grip Clamps, 1^
O. D. steel tubing.

Other Dimensions. The Stall Posts are 6 feet 1 inch
long and the Top-Rail is 5 feet 10 inches (70 inches) above
the stall floor. This is 7 inches higher than our other stalls
which is necessary to give room for the adjusting clamps,
and have the horizontal rails 53 inches apart, the standard
space required for Louden Stanchions. The Stall Posts and
the stall partitions go 5 inches into the cement. The stand-
ard width of the stall is 3 feet 6 inches (42 inches). The
bars on the sides of the adjustable frame having their hori-
zontal ends clamped on the stall posts are of xS^^^s inch

Louden Adjustable Stalls
Fig. 948 — Continued

The mangers are hinged to the adjustable frames
and are provided with springs to assist in raising
them, and hooks to hold them in raised position while
cleaning. The stall floor should be made from 6 to 8
inches longer than with stalls having non-adjustable
mangers. Also, the longer stall partitions should be
used. Louden Adjustable Stalls answer all require-
ments, and give good satisfaction wherever used.

Mangers. The Mangers are made of 18-gauge gal-
vanized sheet steel reinforced at the ends and on the edges
with heavy angle iron. They are 39 inches long. 34 inches
wide and 2 1 ' ^ inches deep in the clear. They have rounded
bottoms and the same general contour as our Standardized
Cement Mangers. The feeding front, including lower rail,
is 6 ' 2 inches above the floor.

Partitions, Stanchions, etc. The cut shows our No.

3 Stall Partitions and Tubular Steel Stanchions which will
be furnished unless our other stanchions or our No. 2 par-
tition is specified. The Name Plates are not included but
will be furnished if specified

An extra charge will be made for the Five-in-One or Quick
Adjustable Stanchions.

Louden Adjustable Stall complete consists of 1 Stall
Post (6 feet. I inch long); 1 Stall Partition: 42 inches (more
or less) of Top-Rail; 1 Upper and 1 Lower Stanchion Rail; 2
Side Guards; 2 Adjusting Bars with horizontal ends; 2 Inter-
locking Dust-Proof Couplings; 2 pair of Adjusting Clamps;

4 Corner Irons for adjustable frame; 4 Grip Clamps for side
guards; I Galvanized Manger; 2 Hinges for manger; 2 Special
Springs for manger: 1 Hook to hold up manger; I Regular
Stanchion Holder; I Guide or Hold-Open for stanchion, arid
I Special Stanchion Anchor to attach to lower stanchion rail.

End Section consists of I Stall Post (6 feet I inch long);
1 Stall Partition; 1 Interlocking Dust-Proof Coupling, and I
Single Piece Elbow. The adjusting clamps at the end of a
row of stalls are single and the central clamps are double.
Each double clamp is counted as two. or a pair.

Weight. Adjustable Stall complete with galvanized
manger, weighs 183 lbs.; End section, 33 J4 lbs.

Fig. 1191

This is a portion of a cut which is used by others to show the need of
a Stop Device to prevent a cow from putting her head between the stan-
chion and the stall post. The fact was overlooked that there is twice as
much room in the open stanchion as there is between the stall post
and the stanchion. Consequently, the liability of the cow walking
through the stanchion is twice as great as putting her head in the
wrong place. The point which the cut shows above everything else is, that
in full-width, single post stalls the stanchions open too wide, and that
double or triple post stalls should be used to get the proper propor-
tions and do away with the necessity of using stop devices. The liability
of the cow going through a wide-open stanchion is three times greater
than putting her head in at the side. But if you want a single-post stall
with stop device, we have the best one made — the "Louden Go-Right."
Our Side Chains will also prevent the stanchions from opening too wide.

Page Ninety-three

FmTTTmn

^^^^^"'^^ FAIRFIELD. I O WA '■^^

Louden Name Plates and Name Plate Holders

Qf^:-

Fig. 935

:j^i.;i.

r^OUDEN

Iname plates

Fig. 1181

Fig. 935 is our original Name Plate with Holders.
It is simply a sheet of galvanized steel, 4x1 3 inches,
standard size, and a pair of clamps having upwardly
extended ends to hold the plate between them. The
size of the plate may be varied to suit requirements.
Even as large as 24 inches square may be used to
make a score card to keep a record of the cow's work,
or for other purposes. In place of the sheet steel a
heavy cardboard may be used.

This is the simplest name plate and holder ever
devised and it is actually the best for all purposes.
It is also the most durable. Cows with long horns
cannot punch holes in the steel plate. The cow's
name and any other information may be painted or
stenciled on the plate, or it may be coated for use
as a black-board. The cut shows the Holders
clamped on the top-rail of a stall and the lower edge
of the plate cut out to fit over the stanchion holder
which shows in the cut.

Fig. H81 is our New Name Plate Holder, also,
mounted on the top-rail of a stall. It is provided
with two sheets of isinglass, each 4'3xl2j2 inches,
between which the name plate or card is inserted.

Fig. 1182 shows the holder detached with the
isinglass in, but the name plate left out. The holder
is clamped on the top-rail by collars shown in the
cuts. This is the most artistic Name Plate Holder
manufactured.

The presence of name plaies on stalls adds to the
appearance and identifies the cows in a manner that
bespeaks the owner's consideration and high appre-
ciation of their value. There is no doubt that buy-
ers or patrons visiting your barn will be influenced
more or less by neat and attractive name plates.

Holders are made for either I ? g or I J^ top-rail.

Be sure to specify size.

Fig. 1182

Fig. 1056

Patent Pending

Louden Salt Roll and Holder

The most convenient and economical, and altogether the best way
of salting cattle and horses. The salt is formed by heavy pressure
into cylindrical rolls about 5 inches in diameter and 4} 2 inches long
with convex ends and a hole through the center. The Roll is easily
mounted on our Holders and will revolve when the animal licks it.

The Roll is extremely hard to chip or break and disintegrates very
slowly, and is therefore the most economical way that stock can be
salted. There is no danger of the animal getting toomuchsaltat a time.
Neither is there any danger of the salting being neglected. .Special
circular on application.

Fig. 1056 shows salt roll mounted on holder for vertical stall pipe.
We also furnish holders for either vertical or horizontal wood stall
timbers, to be attached with bolts or screws. (See page 210.)

Mr. R. B. Young, proprietor of The Chicago Stock Farms, Buffalo
Center, Iowa, after using our Holders several months, writes: "The
Salt Roll Holders are very satisfactory and please me in every way."

Page Ninety-four

The Alignment Problem

The Louden Adjustable Stalls, as explained on
preceding pages, solve the Alignment Problem more
completely than anything ever produced, but if other
styles of stalls, having either concrete or other non-ad-
justable mangers should be used, the question arises
as to the best way to secure the most practical align-
ment of the cows on the gutter with these stalls.

In the first place the stall floor should be long
enough so the cow can stand with her front feet 6
to 8 inches away from the curb, so she will not jam
her knees against it in lying down, and with her hind
feet not more than 3 or 4 inches from the edge of the
gutter. A good plan will be to measure the distance
from out to out of the cow's feet when she is standing
in a natural position, and then make the length of
the stall floor from 9 to 12 inches longer in the clear
from the side of the curb to the edge of the gutter.

To provide for different sizes of cows the best way
is to make different sections of stalls with different
lengths of floors — say, one section with the floor long
enough for the longest cows, another for shorter cows,
another for those still shorter, and then another for the
shortest cows, or for young stock. Different widths
of stalls will probably be required, so take it all in all, this will be the very best arrangement that can be
made when the barn is large enough for different sections of stalls. When the barn is small, the stall
floors can be made longer at one end and shorter at the other, thus tapering the floor, so different lengths
will be provided for the different sizes of cows.

Louden " Stanchion Alignment "

Upper Adjustable
Stanchion Holder, Fig. 1 298

(Patented May 26, 1914)

Another method is the so-called "Stanchion Alignment" by which the
stanchion is adjusted backward and forward closer to and farther from the
gutter. This method has been largely advertised and is favored by some
dairymen. In compliance with the demand for a "Stanchion Alignment"
we have designed and patented what we believe to be the best device of the
kind on the market, as shown by Fig. 938. The Adjustable Holder secured
to the top-rail is arranged so the stanchion may be adjusted as much as 6}/^
inches to one side of the center of the top-iail. By reversing the holder
the stanchion may be placed as far in the opposite direction, thus making a total adjustment of 13 inches.
The Adjustable Holdei is clamped upon the top-rail by four heavy bolts.

The Alignment Anchor (Fig. 1299) is inserted in the curb when the cement is put in,
thus making it as solid as the curb itself. The chain holder is adjustably clamped
upon a central rib and has a total adjustment of 8 inches.

There are no bolt head pockets in the curb or any underneath spaces anywhere to
catch and hold dirt. These adjustable or alignment anchors are frequently regular
"dirt catchers," and do more harm in catching and holding dirt than they do good in
the alignment of the cows. Oui Stanchion Alignment is free from these faults, and is stal^"hiori"Ho?der,
more practical than any other stanchion alignment made. Fig.i299

Specifications

Weights. The Louden Adjustable Stanchion Holder
with bolts complete weighs 4 lbs. The Louden Adjustable
Anchor complete with bolts, I J^ lbs.

Page Ninety-six

Note: Be sure to specify size of top-rail. Sometimes
the Adjustable Anchor is not used and for that reason we
price the Holder and Anchor separately.

^^^^^^

Louden Step -Back

Fig. 1151 represents another arrangement to pre-
vent the cow from leaving her droppings on the stall
floor. It may be applied to any of our steel stalls.
It is simply a large spring wire, ^f^-inch diameter, bent
as shown in the cut, and adjustably clamped upon
the top-rail directly above where the cow stands. It
is adjusted so the lower end will be from I to 2
inches above the cow's back when she is standing
in a natural position, and immediately behind her
shoulders.

When the cow humps her back before evacuating,
she will strike it against the wire and this will cause
her to step back, so she will deposit her droppings in
the gutter. Those who have used this device say it
is just the thing and that it is so effective that after
it has been used awhile the cow will form a habit of
stepping back, when the device may be removed with-
out changing the habit. It is a simple, inexpensive
p. JJ5J device and is certainly worthy of a trial.

Patent Pending. This Step-Back is especially adapted for stalls

where the floor is a little long and when it is used the floor may be made 4 or 3 inches longer than the
standard length thus giving the cow more room. The cut shows three of our Fig. 812 Stalls each fitted
with a Step-Back. The Louden Step-Back is made for 1^8 and I's O. D. top-rail, and with clamps
complete weighs 4J^ lbs. Note: Be sure to specify the size of the top-rail.

Fig. 940 shows the position a cow assumes when
getting up or lying down. She lowers her front end
first in lying down and raises it last in getting up.
She invariably pitches forward in either getting up
or lying down — therefore, the necessity for having
the stanchion flexibly anchored so it will swing
enough to prevent jamming her shoulders.

The cut also shows why the cow does not have
to strain or jam her knees against the curb to get
her feed in our Standardized Mangers as she has to
do with flat bottomed mangers. The feed rolls
down toward the cow and if any should remain
on the far side she will not have to strain to get it.
The cut shows the feed-wasting, low-level curb. It
should have our High Built-Up Curb to make it
complete.

How to Securely
Clamp Metal Parts Together

1 . Put all the clamps on loosely so the parts
can be easily racked to line them up properly.

2. After they are all in proper position draw
the nuts up tight with a wrench.

Fig. 940 3. When tightly drawn, hit the heads of the

bolts heavily with a hammer to set them.
4. Tighten up the nuts again with a wrench as much as can be safely done.

When treated this way the bolts will not be liable to get loose but without hammering their heads so
as to solidly set them they will be liable to work loose under a strain and especially so under a jar. This
is important in attaching clamps of any kind, especially splice clamps for overhead track, couplings and
clamps for connecting the tubing of animal stalls and pens together, especially pens to hold vicious bulls
and for other purposes requiring solidity and durability of structure.

Page Ninety-seven

iOTSIS^^^i

^O

FAIRFIELD. IOWA

Louden Standardized Mangers — Fig. 1152

One of the most important things in the construction of cow stalls is to make the manger the proper
size and shape to suit the various requirements of the different kinds of cows and the different methods of
feeding, and at the same time have them standardized so any needed metal work can be readily made to
fit the manger. Heretofore there has been no recognized standard. Mangers have been built m almost
every conceivable shape and style to suit the fancy, and without any effort to secure uniformity.

Louden Standardized Mangers have been devised to overcome the troubles resulting from this lack
of uniformity. The designs presented are on correct scientific lines, and are believed to be the most
complete ever offered. While substantially uniform in all their curves and lines they are readily adapted
to be made different sizes to suit different sizes of cows and different methods of feeding.

The standard curb is made 5 inches thick and I 1 inches high above the stall floor— 10 inches above the
lowest part of the manger bottom (5 inches higher than usual), and the corners are rounded so they can-
not in any way injure the cow. Where the stanchion is anchored the curb has a semi-circular Cut-Out
5 inches deep and 13 inches wide at the top, which also has rounded corners. This permits the stanchion

to be hung low while the curb is high, thus giving
the cow perfect freedom as well as ample throat
room when lying with her head low down, and
prevents her from nosing her feed out over the high
curb at the sides. The side of the manger next
the curb instead of having the usual sharp corner
which prevents the cow from cleaning up her feed
and furnishing a place to catch and hold dirt, has a
four-inch radius which fits the cows nose nicely
and makes it easy to keep the manger clean. The
other side has a radius of 24 or 30 inches (according
to size), centered from the same perpendicular line,
which makes the lowest part of the manger within
5 inches of the curb. The far side of the manger
raises on a gradual curve so the feed naturally
rolls down toward the cow.

Fig.

1001 Louden Low Cement Manger, with Raised
Feed Alley Floor

Page Ninety-eight

Louden Standardized Mangers — ^ Continued

Fig. 1002
Louden High Cement Manger, Standard Size

Fig. 1003
Louden Extra High Cement Manger, Standard Size

With our Patent Cut-Out Forms (see Fig. 970), our High Cut-Out Curb is made as easily as a low
level curb and it is a hundred per cent better. It is in reality a "High Built-Up Curb," because it is
the Standard Height where the stanchion is anchored and is 5 inches higher on the sides.

There are no cracks or crevices or pockets anywhere in our mangers to catch and hold dirt and form
breeding places for disease germs. Beware of "dirt catchers" in your mangers.

Sizes of Mangers. These mangers are made in five different sizes varying from 26 to 40 inches in width
and the outside edge of the manger from 11 to 25 inches high.

Fig. 1001 is a cross-section view of our Low Cement Manger (radii 4 inches and 24 inches), with
Raised Feed Alley Floor — a style well adapted for common use. Fig. 1002 is our High Cement Manger,
standard size (radii 4 inches and 24 inches). Fig. 1003 is our Extra High Cement Manger, standard
size (radii 4 inches and 24 inches). These sizes are well adapted for average cows.

Fig. 1004
Louden High Cement Manger, Large Size

Fig. lOOS
Louden Extra High Cement Manger, Large Size

Fig. 1004 is our High Cement Manger, large size (radii 4 inches and 30 inches), suitable for large
cows. Fig. 1003 is our Extra High Cement Manger, large size (radii 4 inches and 30 inches), suitable
for extra large cows.

Our Standardized Mangers and our improved methods of constructing them, are everywhere conceded
to be the greatest improvements recently made in Dairy Barn Equipments. These improvements are so
much ahead of former designs and methods that they mark a distinct epoch in the development of dairy
equipments. Leading dairymen everywhere approve our Standardized Mangers and Agricultural Colleges
in this and other countries have adopted our directions for the instruction of their classes.

We could fill this catalog with testimonials but have room only for the following:

" I am glad to see these improvements. They are certainly a credit to your Company, and will be of
great value to dairymen as well as a benefit to mankind in general." Prof. T. L. Haecker, Chief of the
Division of Dairy and Animal Husbandry, University of Minnesota.

"You have done distinct service to the dairy farmer by Standardizing the Concrete Mangers and
making it possible for him to secure the exact measurements which are necessary for the proper
construction." Prof. C. H. Eckles, Chief of the Department of Dairy Husbandry, University of Missouri.

Page Ninety-nine

PJTf?3MilO>^.^i:/.T>>iii.^i:*rl

Constructing Louden Standardized Mangers

Fig. 1153 shows the different
steps in the construction of Louden
Standardized Mangers. 1st, the
stalls are set up and lined up as
true as line and level can make
them. 2d, the form-boards for the
curb are set up to correspond with
the stalls and the cement is then
put in, using our patent cut-out
forms to make the cut-outs in the
curb. 3d, the curb form-boards are
removed, the corners of the curb
are rounded and the form-boards
for the manger are set up. 4th, the
templets for the manger are set in
place and the cement is then put
in. 5th, after the cement has set
sufficiently, the templets and form-
boards are removed and the manger
is smoothed up. After this the stall
floors, the gutters, and the litter
and feed alley floors are constructed
in the order most convenient.

We furnish Complete Detailed Instructions for doing the work. Also, the necessary Tools and
Appliances. (Seepage 101.)

Some parties advise putting in the concrete work first and setting up the stalls afterwards, connecting
the stall posts and partitions to the curbs and floors by means of anchors set in the concrete.

We do not recommend the anchoring of stalls in this manner if it is possible to install them in the
usual manner, with stall posts securely embedded in the concrete.

It is practically impossible to get a first class job when separate anchors are used. No matter how
careful the concrete worker may be he cannot set the anchors accurately enough to make the stalls line
up properly, and some of them will have to be sprung into line and held by the top rail and stall parti-
tions. The stalls will not be as strong as those set in solid concrete, and the anchors offer a place for the
accumulation of dirt.

The principal advantages of the anchors are, first, that they may be shipped ahead of the stalls and
the concrete work put in before the stalls arrive; second, that anyone can set up the stalls without the aid
of concrete workers after the anchors are in. Nevertheless, these advantages hardly offset the advantages
of stalls set up in the manner shown by Fig. 1 I 55, where the stall posts extend fifteen inches into the
solid concrete.

Louden Improved Stall Anchor

Fig. 1282
Front and Side Views of Mal-
leable Clamp for Improved
Stall Anchor

Fig. 1283

Anchor Iron for Improved

Stall Anchor

Where the use of anchors is necessary, the Louden Improved
Stall Anchor provides the most secure anchorage, and the
simplest method of installation ever offered to barn owners.

The Louden Anchor is the strongest and heaviest made. It
is the only anchor that is made as strong as the pipe it supports.

The lower part of the anchor — which is embedded in the
concrete — is made of heavy strap iron. It is 3^4 inches wide at
the top and 7}i inches wide at the bottom, flared to make it
hold securely.

The stall post is secured to the anchor by means of over-
lapping, dustproof. malleable castings, clamped on. There
are no bolts through the anchor to break off or weaken the
connection. A heavily ribbed hook or flange three inches in
length grips the anchor iron securely on each side, making a
connection that is almost unbreakable.

Fig. 1284 shows the parts assembled and clamped to the
anchor iron; also a short section of the stall post. The top of
the anchor iron is set level with the top of the curb, and the

broad flanged base of the malleable connection rests flat against Showing Stall Anchor
the concrete. Assembled

Fig. 1284

Page One hundred

mtnmn

^~*iyy*^ FAIR FIELD. lOWA^jyi^^

Patent
Pending

Tools and Appliances for Constructing Louden Standardized Mangers

Fig. 970 represents the Louden Cut-Out Form to make the

cut-outs in the Louden High Built-Up Manger Curb. The forms

are set in between the boards used in constructing the curb where the

stanchions are to be anchored. No cutting of the boards nor extra

work of any kind is required to make the cut-outs and they will all be

uniform in size and shape. The anchors which connect the stanchions

to the curb are easily attached to the forms and the cement being slushed

around them will make a better bond than if they were set afterwards. The cut

shows one of our large sherardized U bolt anchors connected to the form.

There should be 4 to 6 forms for each installment according to the size of the

Fig. 970 barn and the speed required in doing the work.

Fig. 1074 is a top view of our Curb Gauge, by means of which the
form-boards for the curb will be held the proper distance apart, and
equal distances from the stall posts. No measuring or cutting of boards
is required. There should be 8 to 12 gauges for each installment.

Fig. 1013 is a perspective of one of

the Louden Manger Templets. There

are seven different sizes — one for each of

the three sizes of concrete mangers and one for each of the

bottoms of two sizes of galvanized mangers. No other device

has ever been made that will begin to compare with these templets

for ease and rapidity in the construction of cement mangers as well as for

the excellence of the work.

u

ig. 97

1

Fig. 1013
There should be 5 to 8 templets for each installment,

No. 4

Louden Cement Tools

No. I is our

Straight Edger

for rounding off

the upper edge

of the manger

\ curbs, also the sharp edge of the gutter.

No. 2 is our Curved Edger for rounding

off the edges of the cut-out in the curb

and other curved works.

No. 1 No. 2 [\Jq 4 is a small tool to round out

and smooth up the corners between the curbs and the stall floor. Also the corners between the manger

and the feed alley floor and any similar corners liable to catch and hold dirt.

No. 5 is our 4-Jnch radius
Steel Trowel for rounding
out and smoothing the
corner of the manger next
the curb. No. 6 is our 24-
inch radius Steel Trowel for
smoothing the bottom of
No- 5 No. 6 the manger. The blades

of these trowels are of the finest steel and they are light and easy to handle. No one can afford to be with-
out a supply of these tools in doing the cement work in a dairy barn.

Fig. 1192

Star Drills. For drilling holes in brick, stone or concrete. We
carry only the sizes necessary for the anchor shields we use and only
in one length. Other sizes and lengths will be furnished on application,
at market prices. Sizes — ^2x8 inches, /jxS inches, ^4x8 inches, and
J-gxS inches.

Page One hundred one

.1 ^^ ! 1 1

DX!W<;.iii.^»t.'i;feT.iiti.'>i>;*«<o.^mCig^ai

^Spy^f^ FAIRFIELD. I QNVA ^Til^ ^ ^^^^"^^^ ^"wia^gft^^fei

^'■

m

Louden Spring Balance Manger Divisions — Fig. 1018

(Patent Pending)

Fig. 1018 shows a Louden Standardized Manger fitted with a section of our Spring Balance Manger
Divisions which are made to fit the manger. How comfortable the cows look, each eating her apportioned
feed without interference from her neighbor • — the shape of the manger bringing the feed close so she does
not have to strain to get it, and the manger divisions preventing her from straining to get the feed belong-
ing to her neighbor.

The Individual Manger is an advantage in a number of ways. It prevents the fast-eating cow from
robbing the slow-eating cow — the one getting more than is good for her and the other not getting enough.
The amount of feed can be varied to suit the individual cow and different kinds of feed can be given to
different cows to suit their requirements. It prevents the cow from straining and injuring herself in trying
to get the feed in the adjoining section. It helps to prevent one cow from infecting another. In short,
it enables the dairyman to feed and handle his cows as his best judgment tells him they should be fed and
handled, instead of each cow striving to help herself.

The Divisions are made of heavy galvanized sheet steel and are hinged to the stall posts so they can be
raised for cleaning the manger. They are connected together in sections by means of a brace rod, as shown
in the cut, so that all the divisions in the section can be raised at one operation instead of only one at a time.

Malleable Iron Hinges are used as shown by Fig. 1 1 53,
pattern 926 being the single hinge used at the outer ends
of the sections, and patterns 927 and 928 being the
double hinges used on the central divisions. These hinges
are connected to the stall posts by pivot clamps when
used with stalls having central posts. With our Double
Post Stalls the hinges are connected to pivot pins which

„ are attached to the posts by our Grip Clamps, as shown

Figr. 1153 • .1 .

^ in the cut.

To assist in raising the divisions and to hold them in elevated position, as shown in Fig. 1020, we use
Special Coil Springs which are attached to some of the central hinges by means of clevises, the upper
ends of the springs being adjustably connected to the stall partitions. Two sizes of springs are used, each
having a working strength of from 300 to 500 pounds according to size and adjustment.

When the Divisions are raised halfway up they will be held in a perfect balance at any higher point
without any additional assistance whatever. The attachment of the springs is such that they can be ad-
justed to help hold the divisions down when feeding and thus prevent the cows from nosing them out
of position. With the different sizes of springs and with the complete and convenient adjustment any size
or weight of Manger Division may be balanced to perfection.

Page One hundred two

Louden Spring Balance Manger Divisions — Fig. 1020

Specifications

The Dimensions. All of our Manger Divisions are
24 inches high where the hinges are placed. The other
dimensions are given in Plate 14. page 104.

The Material. All the Divisions are made of No. 18
galvanized sheet steel. Each Division is reinforced entirely
around the edge with heavy iron, giving it great strength
and rigidity.

The Brace Rod is made of 1 j^s O. D. steel tubing and is
attached by malleable iron clamps which are bolted to the
reinforcing irons so as to hold them rigidly in place.

The Springs. The lighter spring is made of ^ inch
and the heavier spring of Yg high-grade spring wire — the
best that can be procured. Generally two springs are used
on a section of 4 divisions, 3 springs on a section of i di-
visions and so on. If the heavier springs are used a less
number may be required.

The Finish. The sheet steel of which the divisions are
made is galvanized, and then the whole is coated with
our Special Dairy Barn Paint. If the fittings are to be

galvanized there will be an extra charge for this extra work.
Louden Spring Balance Manger Division complete
consists of 1 Galvanized Division of the size specified, 42
inches (more or less) of 1 rs O. D. Tubular B race Rod : 1 Keeper
with Anchor Bolts to support lower corner of divisions: 1
Single Hinge for each end division: 1 Single Pivot Clamp for
each single hinge; 1 Double Hinge for each central division:
I Double Pivot Clamp for each double hinge, provided stalls
with central posts are used. With the Louden Double
Post Stalls, 1 F'ivot Pin and 2 pair of Grip Clamps to attach
the pivot pin to the stall posts are used in place of the double
pivot clamp. In ordering specify the size of posts.

The Spring Outfit. Each Spring Outfit consists of 1
Louden Special Coil Spring of the size to suit requirements:
1 Clevis and 1 Holder tor spring.

Weights. With hinges and their connections complete
as specified are as follows: New No. 2 Division about 16^
lbs.: No. 3 Division about \8}i lbs.: No. 4 Division about
20 lbs. The weight of the spring outfit is about 3^4 lbs.

B/?y)C£ /SOD

Fig. 1186

Louden Hold-Down Hook for Manger Divisions

Fig, 1 186 is a side view of our Hold-Down Hook for Manger Divisions.
Usually this hook is not needed. The manger springs could be adjusted so
it would be impossible to root up the divisions but it would make them
heavy to lift for cleaning. By using our Hold-Down Hook the cows cannot
root up the divisions, and at the same time they will be easy to lift. The
hook catches automatically and is easily unlatched by pressing a finger on
its upper end. The hook catches against a plate secured to the concrete by
two anchor bolts.

Keepers like that shown by Fig, 1072 are
secured to the inner side of the curb, as shown
in Figs, 1018 and 1020 to support the lower
corners of the divisions and prevent husky cows
from pushing them out of place. Fig. 1072

Page One hundred three

Louden Spring Balance
Manger Divisions — Cont'd

Plate 14

We make three different
sizes of Manger Divisions,
as shown in Plate 14, which
also shows the divisions
fitted in the different sizes
of our Standardized Con-
crete Mangers for which
they are intended.

The new No. 2 division
is for Fig. 1001 manger only.
It is not fitted with springs
or brace rod, and each
division is raised and low-
ered separately. It is inexpensive, and is designed for barns where it is not desired to put in the
expensive divisions. All other manger divisions are fitted with springs and brace rod.

No. 3 division is intended for Figs. 1001 and 1002 mangers, and No. 4 for Figs. 1002 and 1003.
description of these mangers on pages 98 and 99.

more
See

Louden Spring Balance Mangers

This illustration shows two sections of the Louden Spring Balance Galvanized Mangers in the
dairy barn on the farm of the University of Minnesota, at St. Paul. See how perfectly they line up and
how much higher they raise than the mangers shown in the rear which are not the Louden. The superior-
ity of the Louden Equipment speaks for itself. Louden Mangers are made regularly in sections of four.

This was a somewhat difficult job to install on account of the large posts which are in the manger. We
found a way to get around the posts, as will be seen in the cut, without cutting the sections into single
mangers as was done with the mangers in the rear, which is objectionable and should be avoided if pos-
sible. It is better to have the large posts or columns in line with the stall posts and then the mangers
will not have to be cut to get around them.

Page One hundred four

Louden Spring Balance Galvanized Manger — Fig. 990

Patent Pending.

Specifications

Standard Size is 24 inches high from the manger bottom
and extends out 36 inches from the center of the stall posts.
The standard width is 42 inches but it will be made wider or
narrower as specified, to suit the width of the stalls with
which it is used. No 18 gauge galvanized sheet steel is used,
reinforced entirely around the edge with heavy iron.

The Brace Rod is made of 1 yg O. D, steel tubing and is
attached to the manger divisions by malleable iron clamps
which are bolted to the reinforcing strips so as to hold them
rigidly in place.

The Hinges are malleable castings. No. 741 being the
pattern number of the end hinge, and No. 797 R. & L. the
pattern numbers of the center hinges. With stalls having
central posts the hinges are connected to them by pivot

Fig. 1154

clamps — single pivots being used on the end posts, and
double pivots on the central posts. With our Double Post
Fig. 812 Stall, shown in Fig. 990, the central hinges are
connected to pivot pins made of 1 ,5 O. D. tubular steel,
and connected to the stall posts by a pair of our Grip Clamps.
If the springs have to be set vertically (which is seldom
done) hinge castings, pattern Nos. 876 and 877 R. & L.
(not illustrated) will be used.

The Springs. The lower ends of the Springs are con-
nected to clevises having their ends fitted to hook in the
eyes of the hinges, and the upper ends of the Springs are
connected to holders (the same as our Regular Stanchion
Holders) which are adjustably clamped on the stall par-
titions. Generally 2 Springs are used on a section of 3
mangers and 3 Springs on a section of 4 mangers. If heavier
springs are used a less number may be required.

The Finish. The Sheet Steel of which the manger is
made is galvanized, and then the entire manger is coated
with our Special Dairy Barn Paint. If the fittings are
to be galvanized there will be an extra charge.

Louden Spring Balance Manger Complete consists
of 42 inches (more or less) of Galvanized Front (or back):
42 inches (more or less) of Brace-Rod; I Manger Division
for each manger, and I End Division for each section of
mangers; Clamps and Bolts to attach the Brace-Rod to the
Divisions; I Single Hinge for each End Division; 1 Single
Pivot Clamp for each Single Hinge; 1 Double Hinge for each
Central Division; and 1 Double Pivot Clamp for each Double
Hinge — provided stalls with central posts are used. With
the Louden Double-Post Stalls. 1 Pivot Pin and 2 pairs of
Grip Clamps to attach the Pivot Pin to the stall posts are
used in place of the Double Pivot Clamp.

The Spring Outfit. Each Spring Outfit consists of 1
Louden Special Coil Spring of the size to suit requirements;
1 Clevis and 1 Holder for spring.

End Division complete, consists of 1 Galvanized Sheet
Steel End; 1 End Clamp to attach Brace-Rod; 1 Single Hinge
and 1 Single Pivot Clamp for hinge. The End Divisions
are included in prices quoted.

Note: The Pivot Clamps for manger hinges on central
post stalls. Grip Clamps to hold Pivot Pins for 81 2 Stalls,
and the Spring Holders are all made to fit either IJg or 1'-^
O. D. steel tubing. In ordering be sure to specify the size
of tubing with which they are to be used.

Weights. Standard size Manger complete, as specified,
with either Pivot Clamp or Pivot Pin and Grip Clamps for
Hinges, but without End Division or Spring Outfit, about
47 lbs.; End Division complete, as specified, about 18 lbs.;
Spring Outfit complete, as specified, about 5]'^ lbs.

Note: There is a little variation in weights on account
of the different sizes of the fittings for different sizes of
tubing.

Large Size Manger. The dimensions are the same as
the Standard Size except that it extends out from the stall
posts 40 inches instead of 36 inches.

Weights of Large Size Mangers, complete, as specified,
about 50 lbs.; End Division, as specified, about 21 lbs.

Page One hundred-five

^Iiin^'j"'^'*-*-^^^'*'**-'*^'^!^^.*^

Louden Spring Balance Mangers — Continued

BJ?XC£ J?OD

■iAv." A .-J .V ; ^-i'^-

BffACS f!OD.

STALL FLOOK.\

Fig. 1006 Standard Size

Fig. 1007 Large Size

The Louden Spring Balance Galvanized Manger is the most convenient as well as the strongest and most
durable manger of the kind manufactured. The upper part which is made of heavy galvanized sheet steel
is made to fit a concrete bottom, as shown in the cut. The divisions which convert the manger into com-
partments, or individual mangers, are reinforced by Spot Welded T-iron all around the edges.
The back or front (whichever it may be called) is attached to the divisions by angle irons bolted thereto.
The back (or front) is left off in shipping and the entire manger is packed flat to take a low rate of
freight. In putting the manger together no punching or drilling of holes or riveting is required.

The manger is generally built in sections of 4 to 5 compartments and is further strengthened by a brace
rod, running the entire length of the section, the brace rod being clamped on the upper edges of the divisions
by malleable iron clamps. The brace rod also serves as a guard to hold the hay in the manger. The manger
is hinged to the stall post by malleable hinge castings adjustably secured to the inner ends of the divisions.
Pivots adjustably secured to the stall posts are used to hold the hinges in place and permit the raising and
lowering of the manger. By this means it is readily adjusted up or down, or in or out, to make it fit the
concrete bottom. With stalls having central posts, pivot clamps are used instead of the pivot pins required
by our double-post stalls.

To assist in raising the manger and to hold it in elevated position for cleaning, heavy Special Coil
Wire Springs are used, as shown by the cuts. Two different sizes of springs are used for lighter and heavier
mangers, which are made of the best spring steel wire that can be procured. Many experiments were made
and scores of sample springs from all the leading spring manufacturers in the country were tested before we
decided upon the springs to use. As a result we have a Spring Balance Manger which cannot be equaled.
Each spring has a working strength of from 400 to 600 pounds, according to size and adjustment, and after
the mangers are raised one-half way up, they will be held by the springs in a perfect balance at any point
and without any additional assistance whatever.

The attachment of the spring is such that when the mangers are down in feeding position the springs
will help to hold them more securely in lowered position and to keep the cow from nosing them out of place.
The upper ends of the springs are usually connected to the stall partitions by clamping holders similar to
our standard stanchion holders which may be readily and easily adjusted back or forth thereon to increase
or diminish the tension of the springs. With the two sizes of springs and the complete and convenient
adjustments, any size or weight of manger may be balanced to perfection.

The mangers when raised stand 8 to 10 inches higher than any others in the market and there is
ample room for the heads of the cows when the manger is raised. They are so rigid that a section of four
to six can be raised or lowered at one end — something that cannot be done with any other manger with-
out twisting it all out of shape. We do not know of any point that can be imagined but what has been taken
care of in our Spring Balance Mangers.

Page One hundred six

m^mm^^mn

)^;y!^<;0n>^;*.^iJ^tt^tiL^ip>;4\

A Few Words About Stanchions

aeossiEl

fee ted
or

necessary.

There is nothing of greater importance in Dairy
Barn Equipment than the Stanchion by which the
cow is held. It should be strong and durable to hold
the cow securely and yet allow her all the freedom
of movement necessary for her comfort. A rigidly
hung stanchion should not be permitted, and if the
law against cruelty to animals was strictly enforced it
would not be permitted.

The cow must be made comfortable to produce
the most milk and return to her owner the largest
profits. Therefore the stanchion must be flexibly
hung so its lower end will be free to swing in a circle
of 8 to 10 inches. This is necessary to allow the cow
to pitch forward in getting up and lying down
without jamming her shoulders against the stanchion
and to avoid cramping her neck in lying down at one
side or the other of the stall.

The stanchion should be as smooth as it is possible
to make it, so it will always be easy to clean and
easy to keep clean. Also, to make it easily disin-
no cracks or crevices anywhere to catch and hold dirt

There should be

to furnish breeding places for disease germs.

There should be no square corners to rub against the cow's neck. This applies with greater force to
the lower end of the stanchion than it does to the sides, because a cow when in her stall will be lying
down half the time, and her neck will be in contact with the lower end of the stanchion.

The lower ends of the stanchion bars should always be sloping or well rounded and never flat nor
have square or sharply rounded corners. This is necessary to prevent the cow from getting her front foot
caught between the manger curb and the lower flat or square end of the stanchion and having it seriously
injured. A number of cases have occurred in which valuable cows have been ruined in this way.

The hinges at the lower end should be exceedingly strong and be laterally rigid to prevent torsional
displacement of the stanchion sides in which case the latch at the upper end will fail to register with the
catch on the hinged side. There should be no flat surfaces on the hinge castings to catch and hold dirt
nor sharp corners to injure the cow's neck.

The latch should be strong and absolutely animal proof, and at the same time, be easily unlatched.
A "Push-Down" latch is better than a "Lift-Up" or a "Turn-Around" latch, because it can be opened
with one hand, closed or mittened, which cannot be done with the other kinds of latches.

The Louden High Carbon Tubular Steel Stanchion shown on other pages, has all the good
points enumerated and is, without any question, the best stanchion manufactured. It is decidedly the
strongest stanchion in the market, the tubes of which it is made measuring 4} 2 inches in circumferences
as against 2 '8 inches for the "T" steel of which many stanchions are made. It is also the neatest and
smoothest, and has no "dirt catchers" or other objectionable features.

The Louden Tubular Steel Stanchions are made in three different widths — 53^2, 7 and 8V2 inches,
(Narrow, Standard and Wide). These sizes will fit the smallest or largest cows. Some people have the
mistaken idea that a stanchion, like a hat or a coat or a pair of shoes should fit closely. On the contrary
it should never fit closely. The looser the better provided the cow cannot pull her head through.
Fig. 1 157 shows a large cow and a six-months old calf, each securely held by the same size Louden
Tubular Steel Stanchion.

With the three sizes we make any cow, from the smallest to the largest, can be securely and comfort-
ably held, 90 per cent of them requiring only the standard or 7-inch size. A large, beefy-neck cow will
occasionally require the wide or 83^-inch size, and occasionally it would be better to have the narrow or
53/^-inch size for an exceedingly small cow or heifer.

One size of stanchion can generally be taken out and a different size put in as easily and quickly as an
adjustable stanchion can be adjusted, and you can buy Louden Tubular Steel Stanchions for 30 to 40 per
cent less money than you will pay for adjustable stanchions.

The Louden Tubular Steel Stanchion has stood the test of time and is growing more popular every day.
Half a million are already in use in all parts of the world and the sale is rapidly approaching the million
mark. In the long run it is cheaper than a halter and is much more convenient. As a cow tie the Louden
Stanchion is safer and better in every way.

Page One hundred nine

Louden High Carbon Tubular Steel Stanchion — Continued

The great strength of the Louden Reinforced
Stanchion Hinge is readily seen by an inspection of
Fig. 1 I 58. The hinge castings are made in our own
foundry of the best high-grade malleable iron. The
castings are shaped to practically encircle the lower
ends of the stanchion sides which are made of I fV High
Carbon Tubular Steel and are securely connected
thereto by four heavy rivets.

The pivot end of the hinge is made twice as wide
Fig. 1158 as the pivot ends of other stanchions and the looped

end helps to support the other end. A large pivot pin
passes through four thicknesses of malleable iron spread apart to make them bracjng. It is therefore
of much greater strength than other stanchions, especially in the torsional or twisting strain where
nearly all other stanchions are weak.

There are no flat surfaces on the Louden Stanchion Hinge where dirt will collect. The ends being
sloping and rounded, debris will roll off and if any should get in the joint the opening in the center will let
it pass through. If disease should get into the barn the stanchions can be dipped in a disinfecting solution
which will reach every part, inside as well as outside, and will destroy every germ which may be making
his dweUing place there. ■ i ii

The latch spring is especially reliable and is completely protected. If a new spring should ever be
needed, which is seldom the case, it can be sent by mail for a few >,onts, and by removing one small bolt
it can be quickly put in place.

If the barn should ever burn that will not necessarily put our Tubular Steel Stanchions out of commis-
sion. The barn of Mr. L. W. Putman of Frederick, Md., having a Louden Tubular Steel Stall Equipment
recently burned and in two days he had a shed over the stalls and stanchions, and was using them the
same as ever. There was nothing injured by the fire except the latch springs of the stanchions, and these
we sent him free of charge by parcel post.

Mr. Putman, under date of April 20, 1915, writes as follows:

"Last fall my barn containing some 1200 bushels of grain and 100 tons of hay and provender caught fire and burned to
the ground. The most remarkable thing about this fire was the condition of the Louden Stalls which were in the basement.
The entire weight of the timbers and the heat of the fire went into these stalls. I thought they were ruined but after
clearing the debris away I found they were absolutely intact. I built a temporary roof over them and in two days I was
using them the same as before the barn was burned. I think this is a remarkable test of the quality of the Louden Stalls."

The best material of which a stanchion can be made is High Carbon Tubular Steel. It is the

strongest as well as the lightest and is also the easiest to keep clean. It has no sharp corners to injure the
cow's neck: no cracks or crevices to harbor disease germs, nor built-on strips to work loose and come off.

The chains by which the stanchions are hung and anchored to the curb are made of the best quality of
steel wire approximately f of an inch in diameter, and its tensile strength is 5000 pounds — strong enough
to hang up three large cows by the necks. Why use a double chain at the lower end of your stanchion to
restrict and hamper the freedom of the cow.

The Louden Tubular Stanchion is the essence of simplicity. It has no complicated trouble-making
parts to get out of order. It can be used almost anywhere, in the smallest as well as the largest barn — for
the largest or the smallest cows — in a common wood frame as well as the most up-to-date cow stall. No
one who keeps cows, whether one or a hundred, can afford to do without Louden Stanchions.

We call attention to our patent No. 990,827, dated April 25, 1913, which covers the main features of
our Stanchion, including the Hinge, the Latch and the Sloping Ends. Beware of infringements.

Specifications

Three Sizes. Narrow, having a width of 5H inches;
Standard, 7 inches, and Wide, 8>2 inches, all in the clear
and all having a length 45 inches in the clear, and 57 ' 2 inches
from end to end of the chains. Standard size will always
be furnished unless otherwise specified. Space from
top-rail to curb must be 4 feet 7 inches (53 in.) to hang
stanchion properly.

Equipment. Stanchions are furnished in four ways as
shown by cuts on opposite page. 1st. the Naked Stanchion;
2d, the Stanchion with Guide or Hold-Open; 3d. Stanchion
with Holder and Anchor; 4th, Stanchion with Guide. Holder
and Anchor. For convenience the Attachments are left off
and packed separately in shipping.

Page One hundred ten

Weights. The naked Stanchion, standard size, weighs
15 lbs.: with Guide, 15J2 lbs.; with Holder and Anchor 16
lbs.; with Guide, Holder and Anchor, 17 lbs. The Narrow
Stanchion weighs a little less and the Wide Stanchion a little
more.

The Holder is made to fit \^s and \]4 O. D. tubing.

Be sure to specify size in ordering.

■Hi>,'lJfcTiHIL'M-I

FAIRFIE LP. IOWA,

Louden Tubular Steel Stanchions— Continued

Stanchion
Only

Stanchion
with Guide

Stanchion
with Holder
and Anchor

Stanchion |
with Hold-
er, Anchor
and Guide

Fig. 861 Fig. 861-A

Fig. 861-C Fig. 861-B

Louden Tubular Steel Stanchions— Naked and with Attachments

Page One hundred eleven

fmmlTI

The LOUDEN MACHINERY COMPANY

Louden Wood-Lined Steel Stanchion — Fig. 937

Some people think that steel is cold on the cow's neck and want the stanchion
lined with wood to keep her neck warm. Our Wood-Lined Stanchion is in
response to this demand. We do not think there is anything in this contention,
or at least, not enough to overcome the objectional features of the wood lining.
We all know that metal is a more active conductor of heat and cold than
wood, and that when metal is pressed against the naked skin in freezing weather
it will have a greater chilling effect than wood. This fact is responsible for
the belief that an all-metal stanchion is cold on the cow's neck.

The conditions, however, are not parallel. To make them so, the hair on
the cow's neck would have to be shaved off and the metal bar would have to
be pressed against her naked skin. A properly hung stanchion will not often
more than merely touch the cows neck, and the hair on her neck is certainly
the equal of a mitten on the hand in resisting cold.

Put mittens on a man's hands, blindfold him, set up a well-oiled fork
handle and a piece of tubular steel of the same size, let him loosely encircle
them with his mittened hands, the same as the cow's neck touches the stanchion,
and he cannot tell the one from the other by the difference in temperature.
We have never had a single complaint on this point from the users of our half
million Tubular Steel Stanchion — many of them in the coldest parts of Canada.
It is always the person who has not used them who raises the objection.
A wood-lined stanchion is not as strong as the Tubular Steel. It is not as
smooth and as easily kept clean. The crevice below the wood lining is
objectionable on account of collecting dirt and harboring disease germs. No
wood-lined stanchion has any lining at the lower end and as the cow will be
lying down at least half the time her neck will be in direct contact with the
"cold" steel. We will not, however, try to convert you.

If you want a Wood-Lined Stanchion we will furnish you the best one
made. With the exception of the side bars, it has all the superior features of
our famous Tubular Steel. It has the same extra strong hinge, the same con-
venient animal-proof latch, and the same sloping ends. It is also provided
with the same chain of 5000-lb. tensile strength and is arranged to be flexibly
hung to give freedom of movement and comfort to the cow.

In addition to this it has special features of its own. The "T" Bar which is
heavier than that generally used in wood-lined stanchions has an extra rib on
its inner side, as shown by Fig. 1026, which makes it still
stronger. The wood lining strip has a groove on its inner
face which fits over the rib on the bar and this makes it
extremely difficult to knock the strip off, even with a ham-
mer. It would have to be all broken up and split to pieces
before it could be knocked off the bar. The wood linings
of other stanchions are not half as strongly attached.
Another point, there are no sharp corners on the ends of
the wood linings as there are on other wood-lined stanchions. They are
beveled off and made entirely smooth as shown in the cut.

There are thousands of our Wood-Lined Stanchions in use giving good satisfac-
tion. We are well equipped to manufacture this stanchion and from a manu-
facturing point of view, it makes no difference to us which stanchion you choose.

Specifications

Fig. 937

Patented Aug. I, 191

The Louden Wood-Lined Stanchion is
made one size only, 7 inches wide and 4 ft. long
in the clear. The "T" Bar is high carbon
steel IxlxfVwith jiii-rs "b. The Wood Lin-
ing is ^4x1, seasoned hard maple.

It is furnished naked: or. with I Guideor
Hold-Open; or, with I Guide. I Interlocking
Stanchion Holder, and I Regular Stanchion
Anchor.

Weight. Naked Stanchion, 20 lbs. With
1 Guide or Hold-Open, 205^ lbs. With
I Guide, I Holder and I Anchor, 22 lbs.

Note: The Stanchion Holders are made
for 1 % and I J^ O. D. tubing.

Be sure to state which size is wanted.

Clear Lake, Minn. June 8, 1916
The Louden Machinery Co.,

Fairfield, Iowa.
Gentlemen:

We installed 10 cow stalls and one bull pen
and they have been thoroughly tested to their
strength. We have another make of stanchions
but we are going to throw them away and put
in Louden 's for they are the best.

Very truly yours. W. Bowers & Son.

Page One hundred twelve

Louden Quick Adjustable Stanchion

We offer our Quick Adjustable Stanchion to

meet the demand which has, no doubt, been created
.largely by the advertising of adjustable stanchions.
We have thought that with the different sizes of stan-
chions we make, and with the fact that a stanchion
should always fit loosely on the cows' necks, there
was no need for an adjustable stanchion.

The demand, however, exists and we herewith
present the very best adjustable stanchion manufac-
tured. 1 1 is made of high carbon tubular steel (the best
material of which a stanchion can be made) and is
provided with adjustable heads and bottoms of malle-
able iron which can be instantly adjusted from the
narrowest to the widest size. They are each provided
with large double ended right and left handed screws
fitted in threaded blocks, B (see Fig. 1160). and by
turning this screw with a key the sides of the stanchion
will be instantly adjusted in or adjusted out.

There are no bolts or set screws to tighten or loosen
and be liable to slip and spoil the adjustment. The
change from the widest to the narrowest or to any
intermediate size can be made by an expert in half a
minute and by any one in less than a minute. When
the stanchion is adjusted to a certain width it will
stay there until the screw is turned by the key.

The adjusting mechanism cannot be equalled. As
will be seen by Fig. 1 160, which is an interior view of
the head (the malleable plates on the front side being
removed), the stanchion sides, A, are fitted with corner
plates, C and D, to which the ends of the threaded
blocks, B, are attached. The head plates, E (the plate
on the near side being removed), which cover the
adjusting mechanism are fitted with slots through
which the threaded blocks, B, are passed to connect
with the corner plates, C and D.
By applying the key, shown in Fig. 1 160. to the square end of the screw, it can be easily and quickly
turned in either direction, and will move the blocks. B, in or out in the slots of the heads, E, and carrymg
the corner plates, C and D. with them will adjust the sides. A. wider apart or closer together as desired.
The lower end is the same except that the block on the opening side of the stanchion is pivoted to the corner
plates, as shown by Fig. 1 1 59. This is certainly the most perfect adjustable stanchion ever invented.

Specifications

The Louden Quick Adjustable Stanchion is made of I Yi O. D.
high carbon tubular steel. In the clear it is 45 inches long
and is adjustable from 3 > 2 to 8 inches in width. Extreme length
from end to end of chains. 57 J^ inches. The space from top-
rail to curb must be 55 inches to hang stanchion properly. A
iVey will be furnished with each bundle of stanchions or with each
single stanchion shipped eJone.

Weights. The stanchion is furnished in two ways, naked or
with Interlocking Holder and Regular Anchor. The Guide or
Hold-Open is permanently connected to the Stanchion. The
naked Stanchion weighs 23!^ lbs;withHolder and Anchor, 24^ lbs.

The Holders are made for 15^ and 1 J^ O. D. top-rail.
Be sure to specify which size is wanted.

Fig. 1159

Patented July 6, 1915.

Page One hundred thirteen

rjMRflKLJ>. ^OVVA

cSr^^**#

-5V-

Louden 5-in-l Stanchion— Fig. 1161

Patented Aug.S, 1916. . „ . .

The " Louden 5-in-l " may be called an "Adjustable Stanchion " but it is hardly that in the common
acceptation of the term. It cannot be adjusted from one width to another by turning a screw or tightening
and loosening a "slip-joint," like regular adjustable stanchions. Each of the hinge irons have three sepa-
rate holes, in any one of which the hinge bolts may be placed. The head of the stanchion is made to set
in three different positions on the rigid side, and the hinged side is arranged to latch in three separate posi-
tions by changing the central bolt, B. (See Fig. 1 162).

By this means the stanchion may be set in five different widths 53^, 6j4-. 7, 7^ and 8J/^ inches wide
in the clear. In whatever position it may be set it will stay there and will be just as solid and unchange-
able as if that was its only width. In short it is a stanchion which may be set in five different widths, thus
combining five different sizes in a single stanchion, hence its name " 5-in-l ."

The sides are straight pieces of high carbon tubular steel. The hinges of refined malleable iron are
rounded as shown in the cuts so as to encircle the lower ends of the sides and are secured thereto by four

rivets. Fig. II 62 is an interior view of the head, the front

plate which is of malleable iron being removed to show

the latch, L, and other interior parts. The rack, R, in which

Dpn " A- ^ -^^^Si^ jc the latch works acts as a support to the upper end of the

hinged side, retaining ribs, being formed on the inner
sides of the end of the head plates, H, and on the ends of
the rack, so they cannot be drawn past each other.

This arrangement prevents the side from being opened

out too wide and does away with the need of a stop on

the hinge. It has no top support and the hinge is fitted

Fig. 1162 with a stop to prevent it from opening too wide. It has

a push-down latch which catches the rack automatically and is completely protected by the head plate

so a cow cannot reach it with her horns. It is easily changed from one size to another.

Specifications

The Louden 5-in-l Stemchion is 45 inches long in the
clear. The sides are 1 ^ O. D. high carbon tubular steel.
From end to end of the chain is 57 J/^ inches. The space
from the top-rail to the curb must be 55 inches.

Weights, etc. The Stanchion is furnished in two ways,
either naked or with Interlocking Holder and regular Anchor.
The Naked Stanchion weighs 23 H lbs.: with Holder and
Anchor it weighs 24% lbs.

Page One hundred fourteen

The Holders are made for 1 J^ or \}i O. D. f^op-rail.
Be sure to specify the size wanted.

Hoffman. Minn. June 8, 1916
The Louden Machinery Co.. St. Paul. Minn.
Gentlemen;

I am using Louden Stanchions and find them very satisfactory.
Would be pleased to get your new catalog.

Chas. A. Willd.

Gravity Water Bowls— Fig. 1275

Specifications

Operation: Cow pushes back lid with her nose when she drinks. As
she drinks, the governing tank, by reason of gravity and the float, permits
water to run into the bowl — keeping the water at the same level. Opera-
tion is simple and dependable. No labor and little attention is needed
upon the part of the attendant.

Construction: Bowls are heavy cast iron of excellent quality, with brass
and malleable iron fittings. Bowls are constructed to fit *4-inch supply
pipe. No inlet or drain pipes are furnished. All pipes and fittings are
stock sizes that may be secured from any plumber.

Capacity: About 6 quarts. Automatic action of governing tank keeps
bowl filled to desired point while animal is drinking.

Dimensions: (Outside of Bowl) 8>2x9 by 3,'2 inches deep.
Finish: Painted or galvanized.
Weight: 13 pounds.

Governing Tank

Fitted complete with Inlet Valve and Float and 3-inch section of pipe to

which main supply is to be attached.
Construction: Heavy galvanized Sheet Steel with lid.
Capacity: 5 gallons.

Dimensions: Depth, II inches; diameter, 16 inches.
Weight: I I pounds.

NOTE — The Gravity System of Watering Includes: The necessary
number of bowls — one for each cow — an automatic governing tank, and
_. , sufficient pipe for carrying water from governing tank to each bowl. We

hig. 1.^75 furnish only the bowl — no part of the pipe or connections — and the

Patent Pending governing tank. Bowls are priced singly, and governing tank separately.

The Louden Gravity Watering System is a simple, convenient, and reliable method of watering the
cows.

The bowls are attached to the stall posts at a uniform distance from the floor, the top of the bowls
being level with each other. At the end of a row of stalls, in a convenient position, is located the govern-
ing tank. As the animal drinks from the bowl, the float on the valve in the governing tank drops, per-
mitting water to enter. The governing tank keeps the water in all bowls at a uniform depth at all times.
The principles of our gravity system have been used successfully for many years, and are known to
be correct and unfailing. ii u-

In our Gravity System only one main water pipe is necessary. At one end of row of stalls this pipe
is attached to the governing tank while at the other end of row it is attached to a drain, or may be run
into gutter if desired. When bowls are in use the cock next the drain should be kept closed, and the cock
at the governing tank should be kept open. This will permit the governing tank to keep the bowls full.
When it is desired to drain the pipes, the cock at the governing tank should be closed and the drain cock

should be opened. This permits all water to drain off.
We furnish our Gravity Bowls either "right" or
"left" so that they may be used on either right or
left side of stalls. Figure 1275 shows how these
"right" and "left" bowls may be arranged — either
singly or in pairs.

Water bowls should be attached singly to single
post stalls. Fittings for attaching two bowls to a
single post are charged extra.

As different barns require different types of piping
systems, we furnish no pipe with the bowl. All pipe,
together with elbows, etc., are standard stock sizes
that may be obtained from a plumber.

Gravity Bowls can be furnished either with or
without lids. We recommend that 'lids be used,
as they prevent dirt from gathering in the bowls.
Cows readily learn to push back the lids to drink,
and when through drinking the lid drops back into
"Ghost View" of Governing Tank and Bowls. , ^-^^ ^^^ equipped with rubber bumpers to

The water in the tank and bowls is kept at the ^ , . . ^ .'^'^i

same level by means of the ball float. make their action noiseless.

Page One hundred fifteen

Louden Sanitary Automatic Drinking Bowls — Fig. 1274

Specifications

Double Bowl

The Double Bowl consists of two water bowls with all con-
nections necessary for joining to stall posts. Pipes or
Bowls do not interfere with the operation of Mangers or
Manger Divisions.

No inlet or drain pipes are furnished. All pipes and fittings
are stock sizes that may be secured from any plumber.

Operation: Cow pushes back lid with her nose when
she drinks, automatically opening the supply pipe, thus
admitting water to the bowl. The water is entering
constantly as she drinks. When she finishes drinking
the weight of lid dropping back into place closes supply
pipe, and automatically opens drain, permitting all water
to run out. Bowl has overflow connection with drain
so that if water enters faster than the cow drinks, it will
not run over on the floor.

Construction: Heavy malleable iron bowl with steel lid.
All parts rounded edges. Sanitary construction through-
out. Made to use with j4-inch supply pipe.

Capacity: Each bowl is so regulated that it holds about
two quarts while cow is drinking. Entire capacity about
3 quarts.

Dimensions: (Outside of bowl) 8' 2x9 '2 by 4' 2 inches deep.

Finish: Painted or galvanized as specified.

Weight: (per pair complete with connections) 26}^ pounds.
Single Bowl

Single Bowl consists of one water bowl with all connections
necessary for joining to stall posts.

Operation, Capacity, Dimensions, and Finish. Same
as described under Double Bowls sp>ecifications.

Weight: One bowl complete with connections, 1334 pounds.

NOTE; In warm climates or in barns where there is no
danger of freezing it may be desired to run water supply
pipe, parallel with stall top rail instead of under floor
as is recommended. With this plan a supply of our
Parallel Clamps should be ordered with the Bowls. There
are four sizes of clamps. Be sure and give outside diameter
of your stall top-rail and we will send Clamps to fit.

Page One hundred sixteen

^^in^'J">^^-*>-^^^^

Points of Superiority in Louden Sanitary
Automatic Water Bowls

It is the only really sanitary v/atering system. It is strictly individual. No cow
ever comes in contact with water from which another cow drinks.

Each bowl has a separate inlet, connected directly to the main supply pipe, and a
separate drain, connected with the main sewer. The refuse water does not run from one

bowl to another.

The cow waters herself. She
has clear, fresh water, of the
right temperature, always be-
fore her.

Water does not stand in the
bowl. When the cow drops the
lid all refuse water drains off.

There is only enough water
in the bowl at one time to per-
mit the cow to drink comfort-
ably. Very little water is
wasted.

The bowl is shaped to fit
the cow's nose. There are no
corners to catch dirt. It is
easily kept clean.

The close-fitting lid keeps
out all impurities. Rubber
bumpers on each side of the
bowl deaden the sound of the
dropping lid.

The Louden Automatic Wa-
ter Bowl System will save you
valuable time. It will keep
your cows in better condition
and increase their milk yield.

It will begin paying for itself
the day you put it in your barn.

With the Louden Automatic Watering System the cow drinks as much as she likes as often as she desires,
without any attention or labor upon the part of the attendants. There is very little wasted water and
it is always pure and fresh.

With the ordinary watering system, water stands in the bowls till the cow is ready to drink — some-
times for hours — gathering impurities and becoming stale. With our Automatic Bowls no water is in

(Continued on page 1 19)

Fig. 1294 — Inside View showing Simple Mechanism of Bowl.
It's always in "working order. "

Page One hundred seventeen

ASK THE OWNERS

I Of Tkese Modern. Money

; Making Barns How Much

: The Louden Automatic Water

- Bowls Have Increased tKe
^-K \ M.Ik Yield.

EE.Lch mantis Bam,
UKeViUa,UI.
Louden Planned and ^ouipp&et

frnnrni

FAIR TIE L D. IOWA

Louden Automatic Water Bowls — Continued

bowl except when the cow is drinking. Fresh water is admitted by the cow raising the lid of the bowl
(as she will readily learn to do). This automatically opens the water valve, at the same time closing
the drain. When the ow finishes drinking the lid drops into place, closing the water valve and opening the
drain, so that the water will all run out through the drain pipe.

Louden Sanitary Water Bowls are individual which is the only safe way to prevent a diseased cow
from infecting her neighbor, and while they may be placed singly, it is preferable to arrange them in pairs
as shown in Figure 1274, one on each side of every other manger division, when divisions are used, which
they should be. The bowls are made right and left to suit this arrangement, saving considerable in piping.

The bowls have no sharp corners anywhere to catch
and hold dirt or to injure the cows. They are compactly
built and arranged to occupy but little room, the top of
the bowls being about 24 inches above the stall floor,
which is the most convenient and natural location for
the cow.

The bottom of the bowl is made rounding to fit the
cow's nose, thus requiring the very smallest amount of
water to enable her to drink. The outer edge of the
bowl is fitted with two rubber bumpers which makes
the dropping of the lid noiseless. By this means the
cows are not induced to play with the lids. When the
bowl is full the water will overflow through the
drainage plug.

Every imaginable point has been looked after in the
construction of these water bowls and we have decidedly
the best ever made. The principle is correct and the
construction is right.

Louden Sanitary Water Bowls are secured to the stall
posts by means of brackets riveted to the sides of the
bowls. These brackets are secured to the posts by clips.
The brackets have an adjustment of several inches to
suit pofts set different widths apart, and may be con-
nected to the posts of any of our stalls.

Bowls may be attached in pairs to single post stalls if
necessary, but we do not recommend such an arrange-
ment. They should be attached singly. Fittings for
attaching two bowls to a single post are charged extra.

Fig. 1274-A

When the cow drinks she pushes back the

hd of the bowl, automatically opening

the supply pipe. When she finishes

drinking, the lid drops back

into place, closing supply

pipe and opening drain.

Installation

The water for the bowls may be drawn from a supply

pipe laid in the cement in front of the cow's feet or pipe

may be attached to and parallel with the top rail. We

are prepared to furnish parallel clamps for this method, but recommend the other plan.

Where this watering system is to be installed at the time of new floor and manger construction, the

curb and manger is made first, according to our directions, and
the water bowls and pipes for same are put in place before putting
in the stall floor. The supply pipe may either be on the ground
below the cement or it may be placed near the top of the floor. If
the cement is already in, a groove may be cut in the floor and the
supply pipe laid in it so it will only be covered with the fresh cernent
used to fill the groove. Many of our customers, when putting in a
concrete floor have found it desirable to lay a 4x4 where the pipes
are to go in. This timber can be removed whenever it is desired to
lay the pipes — whether it is in six days or six months.

When cork brick or creosoted blocks are used it is best to place

the supply pipe immediately below them. Located in this position

the supply pipe may be readily taken up and replaced if this should

Fig. 1274-B g^g^ {jg necessary. By placing the supply pipe under the floor the

^'"^for ^u'he'r "i"ght%r"le"t water will be kept cooler in hot weather and will not be so liable to

side of stall. freeze in cold weather.

Page One hundred nineteen

Louden Calf Pen with Individual Mangers — Fig. 1021

(Corner Couplings Patented Aug. 17. 1915.)

Here is something for your barn that will greatly improve it and will start your calves on the way to
future productiveness and profit. The Louden Calf Pens are complete in every respect, being light, well
ventilated and easy to keep clean. They are fitted with stanchions to hold the calves in place while feeding.
They are provided with individual mangers which will prevent the calves from stealing each other's feed
or upsetting their buckets. They have Patented Stationary Up-Standing Shields which com-
pletely overcome the harmful habit of sucking each others ears.

The stanchions can be opened all at once or only one at a time. The manger is spring balanced so
that a boy can easily raise and lower it. When raised half-way up it will stand at any point without any
hooks or latches or anything else to hold it in an elevated position. The manger divisions telescope with the
stationary shields in raising and lowering. The springs can be readily adjusted to always perfectly balance
the manger. The pen is securely enclosed by a strong gate hung on substantial hinges and has a Hold-
Shut Latch, described on another page, which prevents the calves from getting out or other animals from
getting in. The design is neat and artistic and besides its great usefulness, it is an ornament in any barn.

Calves will grow faster and will do better in a neat, light, well ventilated, thoroughly sanitary Louden
Calf Pen than in the old, stuffy, dark, dirty, wooden boxes which are sometimes called pens and which are
too often used to stow away little calves until they are able to shift for themselves. As the " twig is bent so
the tree is inclined," is as true of baby calves as it is of other babies, and they should have the kindness
and care that will make their wabbly little legs grow straight and strong and which will best develop their
vitality so they will be most efficient when they take their place in the world as producers. A Louden Calf
Pen is one of the essentials in raising calves.

Fig. 1021 shows the manger in feeding position and Fig. 1022 on opposite page, shows it raised for clean-
ing. The manger divisions are hinged to the vertical tubing or fillers of the pen. The lower ends of the
springs are pivotally connected to the hinges and their upper ends are adjustably connected to the tubing
as most plainly shown in Fig. 1 02 1 . The manger raises high enough to pass away above the calves' heads.
The stanchions are easily adjusted to suit growing calves.

Page One hundred twenty

; T- j'^^ t 1 ^ t— t E=I=>

Wi\^ K'i " ^^ ^- *- ^-^** ■ * *- * ^ '^^^^^^^^^

Louden Calf Pen with Individual Mangers — Fig. 1022

Specifications

Sizes of Tubing. The top and bottom rails, comer
posts and gate posts and the arch-rail are I ^^ O. D. steel
tubing. The vertical fillers and stanchion bars are I yj O. D.
steel tubing.

Lengths of Tubing. The comer posts are 52 and
the gate posts are 81 inches long. The fillers and stanchion
bars are 36 inches long. The standard height of panel is
46 inches above the floor.

The Connections. The top and bottom rails are con-
nected to the corner post by the Louden Corner Couplings.
The fillers are set 4 ' 2 inches apart on centers and are con-
nected to the top and bottom rails by Louden Grip Clamps.

The Construction. The pens are built in panel
sections extending from one corner post to another and from
the corner posts to the gate posts. The fillers in the stan-
chion section are spaced to suit the stanchion bars. All
the fillers are adjustable on the top and bottom rails.

The Stanchion Section. The standard width be-
tween the Stanchions is 2 feet. A section 8 feet long will
have 4 stanchions: a 10-foot section. 5 stanchions, etc. The
stanchion bars are hinged to the bottom rail and their upper
ends have malleable castings which extend above and slide
on the top-rail.

The Shift Bar. The upper ends of stanchion slide
castings are connected to a Steel Shift Bar i^xl inch, and
long enough to take in the row of stanchions. Near one
end it is provided with a shift lever, which is pivoted to a
casting on the top-rail so that by rocking the lever back
and forth the shift bar will be moved and will open and
close the stanchion bars.

Drop Pins. Each slide casting is fitted with a Drop
Pin which drops in an adjacent notch in the shift bars and
thus connects the slide casting to the shift bar. By lifting
the drop pin the stanchion bar may be moved independently.

Manger Construction. The Manger, comprising the
outside, the ends and the divisions are made of No. 18 gal-
vanized sheet steel. The outside is reinforced at the top,
and the ends and the divisions, are joined to the outside by
IxlxJs steel angles. The lower edge of the outside and
the upper and lower and inner edges of the ends and divi-
sions are reinforced by j^xl inch spot-welded steel strips.
The standard dimensions of Manger are 23 inches out from
panel at top, 16 inches out at bottom, 18 inches high and
2 feet wide.

The Stationary Shields are made of No. 18-gauge
sheet steel, reinforced with i^&\\ inch spot-welded steel strips.
They are 24 inches long and 20 inches wide at bottom.

Weights. Plain panels, per lineal foot. 1 3 lbs. Stan-
chion panels, per lineal foot, 16 lbs. Gate with hin-jes. 58 lbs.
Arch-rail and gate posts above panel, 38' 2 lbs. Manger, two
compartments in section, 87 ' 2 lbs; three compartments in
section, 124 lbs. ; four in section, 15432 lbs.: five in section,
181 lbs,; Stationary Shields with clamps, each II lbs.

Windom

. Minn.

June 6. 1916

Louden Machinery Co.

,

St. Paul, Minn.

Gentlemen:

All of the barn equipment
you has given the very best of
recommend your goods to any
a barn up-to-date.

You

which I purchased from
satisfaction. 1 heartily
farmer wishing to equip

rs truly.

Delh

urt U. Weld.

Page One hundred twenty-one

rrv V

LOUDEN STEEL PENS \

Keep tKe Animals Clean,
HealtKy, and Contented, and
Protect Them From Injury.

--§>:,

'/^^^^

.. I

:^-

a;

ft . -f ! ^

SOME LOUDEN EQUIPPED
CALF BARNS

TKe Babies of ttie Herd. Like Human
Babies, Should Have a Rigbt Start.

^^ ■x^-^-SiK'

•15.

%skell Institute Calf Bam,
Lawrence, Kansas.

^Sy^P*^ FAlRriELD. IOWA ^

Corner Couplings Patented Aug. 17. 1915.
Tilting Manger Patented Jan. 25, 1916.

Louden Maternity Pen, Panel Construction — Fig. 996

Size of Tubing. The corner and gate posts, the posts
and rails adjoining the manger and the top and bottom
rails (when the latter is used), as well as the gate frame, are
1 '' 8 O. D. steel tubing. All the fillers, including those for
the gate, are 1 v^ steel tubing.

Length of Tubing. All the posts are set 5 inches in
the concrete below the level of the floor. The corner posts
are 5 feet long: the gate post 6 feet 9 inches long. The
length of the main fillers for the curb construction is 57
inches, and for the panel construction. 44 inches. The
fillers above the manger, 15 '2 inches. The standard height
of panel is 54 inches above the floor. The gate is 40 inches
wide in the clear.

Connections. The horizontal rails are connected to
the corner posts by our Corner Couplings, N-6, Plate 15.
The horizontal rails are connected to the gate posts and
the manger posts by our Interlocking Dust-Proof Couplings,
Fig. 933. The fillers are set approximately 5 inches apart
on centers and are connected to the horizontal rails with
our Grip Clamps, Fig. 1050.

Dimensions of Manger. The Manger is 36 inches long
and 28 inches wide at the top and 28 inches deep. The
bottom is rounded on a radius of 9 inches. It is made of

Specifications

18-gauge galvanized sheet steel, reinforced by steel angles
on the ends and outside, and by a slotted I ^ O. D. tube
on the inside next the cow.

Other Features. The pen may be placed against a
wall or in a corner of the building so the wall or walls will
form one or two sides of the pen. A 4-inch concrete curb
should be built under the panel to prevent bedding from
being pushed out of the pen. The corner and gate posts
are fitted with ornamental knobs.

Weights. Sides of pen, curb construction, per lineal
foot, 22 lbs.: same, panel construction. 21 lbs.; Manger panel,
with lower, rail 47 ' 2 lbs. Gate, with hinges and latch, 84 lbs.
Arch-rail and gate posts above panel, 40 lbs. Manger crated,
95 lbs.

Manger Handles

Fig. 1195

Fig. 1196

Eau Claire, Wis. Dec. 13. 1915
The Louden Machinery Co.,

St. Paul, Minn.
Gentlemen:

Your goods were satisfactory in every way and you
can feel free to refer any prospective buyer to me for
an indorsement of your barn equipment.

Very truly yours. Dr. E. L. Mason.

Fig. 1 195 is our Malleable Iron Manger Handle
and Fig. II 96 is a Handle made of 1 yV O. D. tubing
These handles are large and strong and are suitable
for many purposes.

Page One hundred twenty-four

rrmrrnn

^

Louden Maternity Pen, Curb Construction — Fig. 995

Many cows have been injured and calves lost for the lack of suitable quarters in calving. The Louden
Maternity Pen has been designed to supply this want and to save this loss to the dairy farmer. That it
"fills the bill" in the most satisfactory manner is the verdict of all who have used it. It is so simple and
will be so easily understood that any extended description is hardly necessary.

Suffice to say that it is composed of tubular steel uprights with corner posts set in a concrete curb and
held at the upper ends on a tubular steel top-rail by means of our dust-proof malleable iron connections.
It is provided with a tubular steel gate hung to the gate post by our adjustable center pivot hinges,
and is held in closed position by one of our safety hold-shut latches, elsewhere described. The gate
posts are extended above the top of the pen and are connected together by a tubular steel arch-rail.

It is also provided with a galvanized feed manger set on a pivot so it can be tilted in for feeding and
tilted out for filling or cleaning, being held in either position by drop-pins mounted in the frame of the pen
above the manger. By lifting these drop-pins the manger may be tilted out until it rests on the floor,
where it will be easily washed or disinfected. The upper edge of the manger nextthe cow is bound with a
slotted tube to make a round edge and thus avoid sharp corners to injure the cow's neck.

The Louden Maternity Pen may be constructed in two ways. 1st, by inserting the fillers as well as the
posts in the concrete curb as shown by Fig. 995; and 2d, by connecting them to a bottom rail, as shown
by Fig. 996. The former is much the best way as well as cheaper. 1 1 is considerably stronger and is more
easily kept clean.

Two or more Louden Maternity Pens are a necessity in any dairy barn. They are ideal as hospitals
during sickness in the herd. Besides, there is a simple artistic beauty about the Louden pens that helps
to set off the appearance of the stock to the best advantage. Many breeders say they are a good invest-
ment for this feature alone.

Page One hundred twenty-five

LOUDEN

CORNER MANGER

Louden Tubular Steel Bull Pen—Fig. 1164

Specifications

Size of Tubing. The corner posts of the pen and the
manger, the posts and frame of the large gate, the top-rails
of the pen and manger, the stanchion bars and the arch of
the gate are all made of 1 Jg O. D. steel tubing. The fillers
of the pen and large gate, and the frame of the manger gate
are of 1 5 g O. D. f teel tubing. The fillers of the manger gate
are of 1 1^ steel tubing.

Length of Tubing. The height of the pen above the
floor is 5 feet 3 inches. The tubing goes 10 inches into the
cement (6 inches in the curb and 4 inches into the floor)
making all the posts and main fillers 5 feet 5 inches long,
except the large gate posts which are 6 feet 7 inches long.

Size of Gates. The standard size of the Main Gate is
56 inches high and 41 inches wide, out to out. The gate
opening is 4 feet wide, center to center of gate posts. The
manger gate (or feed gate, as it is sometimes called), is 41
inches high and 16' 2 inches wide, out to out.

Connections. The top-rails including the curved top-
rail of the manger, are connected to the corner posts by our
corner couplings(see N-6. Plate 15. page 1 36). The top-rails are

connected to the large gate posts by our Interlocking Dust-
Proof Couplings (Fig. 933). The fillers are set approxi-
mately 6 inches apart and are connected to the top-rails
by our Grip Clamps. Fig. 1050.

Size of Pens. The pens should be 10 to 12 feet square
to give the bull sufficient freedom. It may be built against
the wall or in a corner of the building in which case one or
two of the sides will not be required, but wall flanges will
be needed to join the top-rails to the wall.

Size of Mangers. The size of the Corner Manger has
already been given. The size of the Tilting Manger is
39 inches long, 36 inches deep on the outside and 30 inches wide.
It tilts into the pen 25 inches and out into the alley 22 inches.
The stanchion bar can be adjusted wide enough apart for the
largest bull and close enough together to hold a calf.

Approximate Weights. The material for the sides of the
pen weighs 29 '2 lbs. per foot. The standard size of gate
with posts and arch rail, and the hinges and latches complete,
weighs 1 77 lbs. The gate, with latches only, weighs 1 1 8 lbs.
The tubing and fittings for the corner manger with stanchion
complete weighs from 123 '2 to '26 lbs., according to size.
The tilting manger, crated, weighs 159 lbs.

"A bull in a china shop" is not more to be dreaded than a bull "broke loose" in the barn yard. His
giant strength will be sure to manifest itself in a way that will not be pleasant and may be dangerous. No
matter how gentle a bull may seem you never can tell what may happen to arouse him to deeds of violence.
Therefore, it is not safe to take chances in using a stanchion to hold a bull the same as a cow. A Louden
Bull Pen should be used.

Page One hundred twenty-six

■m*,'i:feT.>!IL'M;T

FAIRFIELP. IOWA

Louden Tubular Steel Bull Pen — Continued

In the Louden Bull Pen, "safety is first" — safety for the herd, safety for the bull and safety for human
life. In its construction the best quality of heavy steel tubing is used — the lower ends set firmly in solid
cement and the upper ends held securely together by the Louden Malleable Iron Connections described in
this catalog. It is provided with a heavy bull-proof gate made of the same material and held shut by a
pair of bull-proof latches, both of which have to be lifted out of the catches before the gate will open.

Fig. 1 164 represents a Louden Bull Pen fitted with two mangers — a tilting manger made of wood
with galvanized steel ends and the Louden Corner Manger made of concrete protected by bars of tubular
steel. It will be understood, of course, that two mangers are not to be used at the same time, and the two
are shown here to better enable the purchaser to decide which kind to use. The tilting manger is made of
2-inch planks securely held together by heavy steel angles secured to edges of the galvanized steel ends.
It is mounted on a pivot bar set in one side of the pen so it may be easily tilted in for feeding, as shown in
the cut, or tilted out for filling and cleaning.

The Louden Corner Manger is a new departure and we believe it is the best manger ever devised for a
bull pen. It is all inside of the pen instead of being mounted in one of the sides where it will be out in
the alley a part of the time. There is nothing loose for the bull to play with and keep up an incessant racket.
It is stronger and more durable and is more easily kept clean than a wooden manger. It takes less room
because it occupies only one of the corners instead of projecting into a central part of the pen.

Louden Bull Pen with Corner Manger

Bull Pen Stanchion Patented Dec. 7. 1915. and July 25, 1916

Fig. 1165 is an inside view showing the Louden
Corner Manger with a Bull Pen Stanchion open to
receive the bull's head. It gives an especially good
inside view of the manger, showing the high sides with
cut-out for lower end of stanchion, the curved top-rail
connected to the top-rails of the pen and the vertical
railing which encloses the manger to hold hay, and to
prevent the bull from getting into the manger with
his feet or soiling it. It also shows the smooth
rounded corners and the absence of cracks or crevices
to catch and hold dirt.

Fig. I 1 65 also gives a good view of the Louden
Bull Pen Stanchion which is used only to hold the bull
while cleaning, his head being securely held in the
manger while the attendant is in the pen or the gate
is open. At all other times the bull should be given
the freedom of the pen. With the stanchion in one
side of the pen, the bull's head would be out in the
alley where he could injure a person who might hap-
pen to get too close. This cannot happen with our
Corner Manger.

The Louden Bull Pen Stanchion consists of two
bars of 1 "a O. D. tubular steel hinged to clamps on a
lower rail having its ends connected to aajacent ver-
tical posts or fillers, as well as embedded m tfie concrete
when the corner manger is used. The upper ends of
the stanchion bars are fitted with malleable sleeves
which slide on the top-rail, and with latches which
engage catches clamped on the top-rail, so as to hold the stanchion bars securely in closed position. The
hinges below and the catches above can be adjusted on the rails so as to set the stanchion bars wider
apart or closer together to suit bulls having different sizes of necks from the largest to the smallest. The
latches are protected by guards so it is impossible for the bull to open them with his horns.

The manger gate is placed on the side of the pen next the alley for convenience in placing feed or a bucket
of water in the manger, or for cleaning it while the bull is in the pen. The bull can be shut out from the
manger by closing the stanchion bars. The latches of the stanchion can be easily reached from the outside
of the pen. In everyway it is convenient and easily managed. The corner manger also makes the pen
stronger, while a tilting manger set in one of the sides tends to make it weaker.

Some one has said that the phrase "Sunny Disposition" was coined by a dairyman who observed the
contentment of his bull in a clean, light, well-ventilated Louden Bull Pen after seeing another bull in

Fig. 1165

Page One hundred twenty-seven

Pr^

Bull Pen with Corner Manger — Cont'd

gloomy, foul places where bulls are sometimes kept,
not this is correct, no one can doubt the fact that a bull
uden Pen will be always in the best condition and besides
g more contended he will be a healthier and a more profit-
bull, and that in addition to this, the element of safety,
more than pay for the pen.

1 1 66 is a top or plan view of the Curved Top-Rail used
in the Louden Corner Manger. Also, a plan view
of the outside curb of the manger, showing the
location of the posts and fillers and the manger gate.
The cut shows two sizes — 36x36x36 inches for
medium and smaller size bulls, and 42x42x42 inches
for larger bulls. The bottom of the manger should
be I to 2 inches above the level of the floor of the
pen and should be rounded to leave no sharp
corners in the mangers. It should also be provided
with means for drainage.

Fig. 1166

Two Other Types Of Bull Pen
Mangers

Fig. 1300 and Fig. 1301 show two popular types
of open bull pen mangers. Fig. 1 300 shows a low
manger built on the outside of the pen, 26 inches

Fig. 1301. Showing Regular Corner Manger
with Low Railing Outside

Page One hundred twenty-eight

Fig. 1300. Bull Pen with Low Outside Manger

wide, 38 inches long, and 30 inches high, from the
floor. Size may be varied if desired.

Fig. 1301 shows our regular corner manger with
low outside railing. All measurement are the same
as for regular corner manger except height of out-
side railing, which is 30 inches high from the floor.

Either of these mangers is suitable for a gentle
bull, but for a vicious animal the completely en-
closed manger is safest.

The open manger gives the animal a little more
freedom, is more easily filled, and is cheaper than
the enclosed type.

Our regular bull stanchion is used in both the
mangers shown.

Louden Tubular Steel Hog Pens — Fig. 1167

TTTilUJ

Fig. 1167 — Hog Pen With Swinging Section and Concrete Trough

Specifications

Size of Tubing. Corner posts, top and bottom rails,
frame of swinging panel, gate posts, guard rails, and uprights
to which guard rails are clamped, are made of \ ■' ^" O. D.
steel tubing. Fillers are made of 1 ^t-" O. D. steel tubing.

Length of Tubing. The height of the panel above
the floor is 3'10". Fillers for main panel are 3 feet long.
Fillers for swinging panel are 2'6" long. Corner posts are
4'4" long, and should be set 5" in the concrete.

Size of Gate. The standard size of gate is 3'4" high

over all, by I'll" wide over all. The gate opening is 2'6"
wide, center to center of gate posts.

Connections. The top rails are connected to the corner
posts by corner couplings. They are connected to the gate
posts by interlocking dust-proof couplings. (Fig. 933, page
77.) The fillers are spaced 2^ ■>• 3. 3' 2. or 4 inches apart on
center. a£ ordered, and are connected to top and bottom
rails by grip clamps. Price of panel varies according to
spacing of fillers.

There is a rapidly growing demand for the Louden Tubular Steel Hog Pens. Farmers are learning that
to make hogs profitable they must — like cows — be kept clean and made comfortable. The question
is whether the hog will have to spend his energy in fighting filth and disease, or, by proper treatment, be
free to devote it to the production of fat which the world wants and for which it is willing to pay a good
price.

A hog to be profitable must be a fat producer, as a profitable cow must be a milk producer. The
greater fat producer a hog becomes the more tender he will be, the more liable to contract disease and
the more care and attention will he require. The "Razor Back" was a healthy hog and needed little
or no care, but there was no profit in him. This is generally the case with things which do not require
care. They do not increase the bank account. s

Page One hundred twenty-nine

'i 'I

RAISING HOGS
FOR PROFIT

Three Views of E. E

Lehmann's Louden %'\J\'
Planned and Equipped
Hog House, Lake Villa
Illinois.

i ' \S

mi

terforView of -■
_;hmann's HoXBam

ff"-

"'SIM' ,

fpTtrrmi

^^^^^m

^

FAIRriELD.

Louden Tubular Steel Hog Pens — Continued

Hog House on Homewood Farms, Moline, III. — Louden Equipped

hog houses in this country. It is fitted throughout with the Louden Tubular Steel Hog Pens

so clean and is so well ventilated that it is entirely free from the disagreeable odor common to hog pens

If we will stop to consider we will
find that the hog has been outrageously
abused in many ways which it is not
necessary to recount here. The hog is
not irrevocably a filthy animal. It is
largely the way he has had to live that
has made him filthy. The fattening
process is more or less a heating process,
and the hog goes into the mud hole to
cool the fever in his blood. The hog
needs clean comfortable quarters and
this can be secured by using the Louden
Tubular Steel Hog Pens, set in a con-
crete floor, and supplied with plenty of
pure water to keep him clean.

The illustration to the left shows a
section of the Hog House on the Home-
wood Farms near Moline, 111., — Owned
by Wm. Butterworth, President of
Deere & Co. This is one of the finest

It is kept

Fig. 1286. Panel With Guard Rail.

Fig. 1 167 shows one of the Lou-
den Pens fitted with a swinging panel
set over a trough so that the panel
can be swung either to the inside or
to the outside of the trough and be
locked in either position. The ob-
ject is to swing the panel in to keep
the hogs out of the trough while fill-
ing it and then swing the panel out
to give the hogs the entire width of
the trough while they are eating.

Fig. II 68 is a sectional view of
the arrangement. The panel is
hinged to the top-rail of the pen
and is held in position by a chain,
C, which is passed over the top-rail

Fig. 1168

and under the lower rail of the swinging panel, and is then fastened to opposite j— '

sides of the trough. The chain is passed through a locking piece, L, which is

slidably mounted on the top-rail. This locking piece has an opening in its

center large enough for the chain to pass through and let the panel swing to the sides as far as the dotted

lines in Fig. 1 168.

The ends of the locking piece have narrow slots and when slid to either one side or the other it will catch
the links of the chain and will hold it in locked position. The arrangement is extremely simple and it is
easily operated It is also strong and reliable in its operation. Fig. 1 168 shows a concrete trough.

The pens in which brood sows are housed should be provided with strong guard rails along each side
to prevent the sows from lying on the young pigs.

The Louden Guard Rails are made of I "^ g inch steel tubing, supported by short curved pieces of the
same material clamped to extra heavy uprights in the panel. They are strong, durable, and ornamental.
Fig. 1286 shows a section of a pen fitted with guard rails.

Our Tubular Steel Pens are also well suited for sheep and we are supplying them for this purpose. We
are prepared to equip either hog houses or sheep houses, large or small, with pens to suit requirements,
and will be pleased to furnish further information or mail blue prints showing different installments.

Page One hundred thirty-one

rrTTTrm

jjiiii^^lJ^T^tiLiM

rAIRFIELD. lONVA

Louden Tubular Steel Gates

Fig. 1169
is the Louden
Heavy Tubu-
lar Steel Gate
with patent
Ad justabl e
Center Pivot
Hinges and
heavy Hold-
Shut Twin
Latches, suit-
able for bull
pens and other
places requir-
i n g great
strength. Fig.
1 170 is the
L o u d e n
Standard
Tubular Steel
Gate with
Adj us tab 1 e

Center Pivot Hinges and a Single Hold-Shut Latch, suit-
able for maternity pens, calf pens and similar uses. These
gates are made of the best quality of steel tubing. For strength and durability as well as neatness, con-
venience and cleanliness, these gates have no equal.

Fig. 1170

Fig. 1169

Specifications

Sizes of Tubing. The frame of the Bull Pen Gate is
made of I J^ and the fillers of I ? s O. D. steel tubing. The
frame of the maternity pen gate is made of 1 * g and the
fillers of 1 1^ O. D. steel tubing. The frame of the calf pen
gate is made of I % and the fillers of I A O. D. steel tubing.

Fig. 1171

Dimensions. The standard size of Bull Pen Gate is
3 feet 5 inches wide and 4 feet 8 inches high; Maternity Pen
Gate, 2 feet 1 1 inches wide and 4 feet high, and Calf Pen
Gate, 2 feet 5 inches wide and 3 feet 4 inches high. All
measurements are from out to out of frame.
Hinges and Latches. The Hinges described on another page, will be fur-
nished in the heavy size for the bull pen gates and in the standard size for
the maternity and calf pen gates. The Latches for the bull pen gate are
made of rs"' 's steel bars doubled back as shown in the cut. For the mater-
nity and calf pens the Latch is made of J^xlJ^ steel bar. doubled back the
same way.

Weight. The standard Bull Fen Gate complete with hinges, latches and
hold-shut catches, weighs 128 lbs.; Gate for maternity pen with hinges, latch
and catch, weighs 84 lbs. : Gate for calf pen, with same fittings, weighs 58 lbs.

Louden Improved Alley Gate

Fig. 1171 is the Louden Improved Alley Gate with vertical fillers
and a latch that will slam shut from either side and never swing
past. This latch is absolutely stock-proof. No cow or horse
can by any possibility open it. It is furnished with hinges which
will swing both ways.

Specifications

The Standard Sizes of Alley Gates are 3 ft. 4 in. high
and 2 feet 1 1 inches, 3 feet 5 inches, and 3 feet 1 1 inches wide,
out to out. These sizes are suitable for alleys 3) j. 4 and 4}4
feet wide in the clear. Other sizes will be made to order.

Sizes of Tubing. The frames are made of l^s O. D.
tubing and the fillers are 1 ^^ O. D. tubing. The fillers
are spaced on centers 8 to 9 inches apart.

Weights. With latch and hinges and two collars,
which go with the gate, the 2-foot II -inch size weighs 57
lbs.; 3-foot 5-inch size, 65 lbs., and 3-foot 1 1 -inch size, 73 lbs.

Page One hundred thirty-two

In ordering be sure to specify the outside diameter of
posts. If different sizes are used, give size to which the
gate is hinged and also size of post to which the latch is
connected. If square posts are used so state in order.

f

Red

i.a

ke Falls. M

nn..

lu

iv

3. 1916.

Louden Machinery

Co..

St

Paul. Minn

,

Gentlemen:

Your equipment

that

1

put in my

new

barn

has proved |

very satisfactory and m

Y i

oreman is well

p

eased

with It.

Yours t

ru

y

J

A

Duffy.

1

rrmrmn

^^^"^^^ FAIRFIELD. IOWA ^^^^"^

Louden Adjustable Center-Pivot Gate Hinges

Fig. 1172 Fig. 1173 Pat'd Jan. 18. 1916. Fig. 1174

The above are views showing three different ways of using the Louden Adjustable Center-Pivot Gate
Hinge. Fig. 1172 shows the use of the hinge with \^i or Ijs O. D. tubing. Fig. 1173 shows the hinge
attached to a large post or column, and Fig. 1 1 74 shows a double hinge attached to a large post or column
to hang a gate on each side of the column. For 1^8 or I Ja O.D. tubing, four pieces of malleable castings
are used which are rigidly clamped to the tubing by six heavy bolts.

The hinges can be clamped to the posts at different angles as shown by Figs. 1 1 75 and I 1 76, to vary
the distance between the gate frame and the post to which it is hinged, to suit requirements. This is an
important feature. If the space between the gate posts should happen to be a little too wide or too narrow
an adjustment of 2} 2 inches can be made in setting the hinges, so the latch on the gate and the catch on
the post will always be correctly adjusted.

Fig. 1175 Fig.

These figures are sectional views showing the adjustment of the hinges. Fig. 1175 shows the hinge
extended or widened and Fig. 1 1 76 shows it contracted or narrowed. Fig. 1 1 77 shows the attachment to
a large post by means of clip bolts which can also be adjusted as explained. (See Plate 16, page 138.)
When a gate is hinged on each side of a large post, as shown by Fig. 1 1 74, the hinge castings for the large
post is bolted together as shown, and by using longer bolts on one side and shorter bolts on the other side,
the castings may be adjusted on the post. The center pivot permits these adjustments and also offsets
the hinge so the gate can be opened clear back against the panel of the pen which is another important

feature not possessed by other kinds of hinges. Of all other gate hinges for
M|g tubular posts or columns, none are so strong or so convenient in use, or

MH Bl^ have the desirable adjusting features of the Louden Hinge.

Fig. 1178

Patented May 16. 1916

Fig. 1180
Patented April 18. 1916

Fig. 1179

Pat'd April 18, 1916

Louden Safety Gate Latches

Fig 1178 is a detailed view of the Louden One-Way Safety Gate Latch used on our animal pens. It
is provided with a Latch Guard which swings out over the latch as soon as it drops into the catch and
prevents it from being lifted out of the catch until the keeper is pushed back out of the way. No animal
can open the latch when it has this Latch Guard. Fig. 1 1 79 is a detailed view of our Two-Way Safety
Latch for alley gates which swing in both directions. The Latch Guard is pivoted above the notch and will
swing to one side or the other enough to allow the latch to slide up the catch from either side and drop
into the notch, but not enough to permit it to pass clear through. To unlatch the gate in either direction the
keeper is pushed to the other side. Fig. I 1 80 is a Two-Way Safety Catch for a square wooden post or a wall.

Page One hundred thirty-three

mmt,\»>\ikikihUniiii,M

Louden 812 Stalls with Column to Ceiling— Fig. 934

Fig. 934 shows how the Louden Stalls may be connected to large posts or supporting columns in the barn.
All that is necessary is to make the stalls the required width to fill the spaces between the columns, cut the
top-rail to suit and use the proper size and style of clamps to make the necessary connections. The cut
shows a combination of our 810 and 81 2 Stalls. If the stalls are narrow the side posts adjacent to the columns
will be left off. If preferred, or if the columns do not come right to connect the stall partitions to them, the
columns may be used in place of one of the 812 Double Posts. It is much better to have the stall posts m
perfect line with the columns than to have the columns set either in the manger or on the stall floor.

Fig. 1183

Fig. 1184

The Louden Stalls can be readily set up on floors that are already in without tearing out the old floors.
Figs. 1 183 and 1 184 show the most approved plans. In Fig. 1 183 a layer of new cement 6 mches thick is
used for the stall floor and 2 or 3 inches is cut out of the old floor at "X" for the gutter.

In Fig I 184 the layer of cement for the stall floor should be 8 or 9 inches thick. In this plan nothing
has to be cut out of the old floor for the gutter. If thought best a layer 2 or 3 inches thick may be added
for the litter alley floor which would then be that much higher than the feed alley floor.

Page One hundred thirty-four

The LOUDEN MACHINERY COMPANY

Louden Reinforced Building Columns

The Louden Reinforced Building Columns are made of an outer shell
or tube of steel compactly filled with concrete. They are the strongest
and most durable building columns made. They are especially adapted
for supports in farm buildings. Each column is fitted with a suitable
metal Cap and Base. Gas pipe columns can be furnished, if desired,
at the same prices — See second table.

Carrying Capacity in Tons — Reinforced Columns

Outside
Diam.

Weight

in lbs. of

Plain Col.

Shaft

per ft.

Length of Column in Feet

of
Column

6'

7'

8'

9'

10'

11'

12'

13'

14'

15'

16'

3"

9.64
13.09
17.02
21.05
25.90
36.82

Tons
6
9
13
14
20
28

Tons
6
9
13
14
20
28

Tons
5
8
12
13
19
27

Tons

Tons

Tons

Tons

Tons

Tons

Tons

Tons

3 4"

8
12
13
19
27

7
11
12
18
26

4"

10
11
18
26

4I2"

10
17

25

5"

17

24

16
23

6"

23

22

Carrying Capacity in Tons — Gas Pipe Columns

Outside
Diam.

Length of Column in Feet

of
Column

6'

7'

8'

9'

10'

II'

12'

13'

14'

16'

18'

20'

30

12.94
16.18

12.27
15.48

11.60
14.78

10.94
14.09

10.27
13.39

9.61
12.69

8.94
11.99

8.27
11.30

7.61
10.60

6.27
9.20

3^"

7.81

6.41

4"

19.73

19.00

18.27

17.54

16.81

16.07

15.34

14.61

13.88

12.42

10.95

9.49

4^2"

23.45

22.69

21.93

21.17

20.40

19.64

18.88

18.11

17.35

15.83

14.30

12.78

5"

27.90

27.10

26.30

25.57

24.71

23.91

23.12

22.32

21.52

19.93

18.34

16.74

6"

37.23

36.36

35.50

34.63

33.77

32.90

32.04

31.17

30.31

28.58

26.85

25.12

In ordering be sure to give outside diameters.

Fig. 1185

The Measurements of Tubing

There are two kinds of measurements used for tubing — the inside
diameter, or pipe measurement, and the outside diameter (O. D.), or
structural measurement. The following table gives the O. D. measure-
ment of the different sizes of pipes from ^-inch to 6-inch:

% inch pipe 1 1's inches. O. D.

I inch pipe \xs inches, O. D.

1 J4 inch pipe 15^ inches, O. D.

1 \-2 inch pipe 1 J^ inches, O. D.

2 inch pipe 2?'g inches. O. D.

2J^ inch pipe 2J^ inches, O. D.

3 inch pipe 3 J^ inches, O. D.

3}^ inch pipe 4 inches, O. D.

4 inch pipe 4}^ inches. O. D.

4 ]/2 inch pipe 5 inches. O. D.

5 inch pipe b^/i inches, O. D.

6 inch pipe 65^ inches, O. D.

Page One hundred thirty-five

A Few Louden Dairy Barn Fittings — Plate 15
We have over 1000 Barn Equipment Patterns and can equip any kind of barn

Corner Couplings N-6 to N-13, Inclusive, Patented August 17, 1915

Page One hundred thirty-six

thf LOUDEN MACHINERY COMPANY

Some of the Louden Dairy Barn Fittings

Plate 15 on preceding page shows a few of the Louden Fittings for Dairy Barn Equipments. The
letters and figures attached are neither figure numbers nor pattern numbers, but are intended to designate
the parts only in connection with this plate. Pat'd Sept. 20, 1910 and Aug. 17, 1915.

In ordering, be sure to give the Plate Number (13) as well as the names and the letters and
figures attached to the parts. Also, give size or sizes. All measurements are outside diameters. See
table of diameters on another page.

Specifications

N-l, is our improved Single Piece Elbow. It is made in two
sizes, standard, for I's". and large, for IJs" O. D. tubing.
In all couplings the 1 J^" size can be used for I ^g" by bushing.

N-2, Improved Interlocking Tee-Coupling, made in three
sizes, standard, for !■'>(". and large, for 1^^" O. D. tubing:
also, for I J's" O. D. heads and 1 ^g" O. D. Tees. See Fig. 933.
page 77.

N-3, Improved Cross Coupling, made in three sizes, stan-
dard, large and small, for IJg", 17/8"and li^"0. D. tubing.

N-4, Inverted Y-Coupling, one size, head tubing, 1 ]/g"
O. D., legs, 158"0. D.

N-5, Side or Angle Tee-Coupling (45 degrees), one size,
head for 1 Jg" and Tee for 1 Jg" O. D. tubing.

N-6, Right Angle Corner Coupling, two sizes, standard, for
IS/g" O. D., and large, for IJg" O. D. tubing.

N-7. Seventy-two (72) degree Corner Coupling, two sizes,
for 15^" and IVg" O. D. tubing.

N-8, One hundred and twenty (120) degree Corner Coup-
ling, two sizes, for IJs" and 1 Jg" O. D. tubing.

N-9, Straight Side Partition Coupling (90 degrees), two
sizes, for IJg" and IJg" O. D. tubing.

N-10, Angle Side Partition Coupling, the sides being
disposed at an angle of 144 degrees and the partition being
set at an angle of 72 degrees to the sides, two sizes, for I J'g"
and I 7 s" O. D. tubing.

N-ll, Three Piece Center Partition Coupling, each set at an
angle of one hundred and twenty (120) degrees to the other,
two sizes, for I ''g" and 1 Jg" O. D. tubing.

N-12, Four-Piece Center Partition Coupling, each set at
an angle of 90 degrees (right angles) to the other, two sizes,
for 1 = g" and I J/g" O. D. tubing.

N-13, Five-Piece Center Partition Coupling, each set at an
angle of seventy-two (72) degrees to the other, two sizes, for
1 H" and I J/g" O. D. tubing.

N-14, Tee-Coupling for large posts or columns, eighteen
sizes. The smaller or Tee ends are made for l^g" and IJg"
O. D. tubing. The larger or head ends are made for 2 J g, ZJg
or 3. 3^2. 4. 4}2. 5, 5,'2 or S^g. 6 and 6-'^" O. D. posts or
columns. In ordering give sizes of all connections.

N-15, Cross Coupling for large posts or columns, eighteen
sizes, smaller ends for 1 ^g" or IJg" O. D. tubing, center for
23g. 2 Jg or 3, 312. 4, 43 2. 5. 5 J^ or 5H. 6 and 65^^" O. D. posts
or columns. Give sizes of all connections.

N-16, Large Floor Flange for IJ^" O. D. tubing: will fit
I5i" O. D. tubing by bushing.

N-17, Wall or Flat Post Range for I'g" O. D. tubing.
Will fit 15g" O. D. tubing by bushing.

N-18, Wall or Flat Post Flange, two sizes, for I A" and 1 ^"
O. D. tubing.

N-19, Grip Clamp, made in eight sizes, the O. D. of the head

tubing being given first and of the Tees, second. I 'g x 15^;
IJg X I A: I '.^ X I A: Pg X 1 ?s: Pg x 1 A: I ^g x I J5: I ^x I Jj,
and I i'exl j',." O. D. tubing. (For description of Grip Clamps,
see page 139.)

N-20, Interlocking Stanchion Holder and Manger Spring
Holder, two sizes, for IJg" and IJg" O. D. tubing.

N-21, Collar, two sizes, for 15^" and 1 J^" O. D. tubing.

N-22, Double or Center Pivot for Manger Hinges, two
sizes, for 15^" and l^g" O. D. tubing.

N-23, Single or End Pivot for Manger Hinges, two sizes,
for I 5 g" and IJ8"0. D. tubing.

N-24, Pressed Steel Clip, for throat chains, stanchion side
chains and "Hold Shut" for Gate Latch: three sizes, for 1 ■^",
l^^"and \h"0. D. tubing.

N-25, Center Brace Rod Clamp for Manger Divisions, foi
1 Jg" O. D. tubing.

N-26, End Brace Rod Clamp for Manger Division, for I ^"
O. D. tubing.

N-27, Right Angle Side Partition Coupling for large posts or
columns with built-on clamp: sixteen sizes, small ends for
1 ^/s" and I Vs" O. D. tubing. Center for 2J8 or 3. 3 J2. 4. 41^.
5, 332 or 5?8, 6 and 6Jg" posts or columns. This is the same
as N-15 with a built-on clamp added.

N-28, Right Angle Center Partition Coupling for large
posts or columns, with built-on clamps. Sizes the same as
N-27. Give sizes of all the parts in ordering.

N-29, Acute Angle Cross Coupling for large posts or
columns, with built-on clamps set at an acute angle to the
Tee-Heads and to themselves. Sizes the same as N-27.
Built-on clamps may be placed on the other side of coupling
if desired, making as many as 6 small clamps, 2 integral and
4 built-on. If necessary, the angles of built-on clamps may
be varied to some extent. In ordering, give sizes of all
the parts and the angles of built-on clamps.

N-30, (Overlooked in Plate 15). Right Angle Corner
Coupling for large posts or columns with built-on clamps for
I5g or \ys" O. D. tubing. It is like N-14 with one built-on
clamp. Same size as N-27.

Page One hundred thirty-seven

Louden Special Connections for Posts and Columns — Plate 16

Plate 16 shows horizontal sections of some of our Special Connections for posts and columns which
are clamped thereon by clip-bolts. These connections may be used for a number of purposes, such as
lugs for gate hinges, pivots for manger hinges, catches for gate latches, sockets for pipes or tubing, such as
are used for pivot pins for manger hinges with our double post stalls, etc. Seven of the figures show the
attaching parts of the connections broken away which means that these parts may be made for various
purposes to suit requirements.

The object in presenting this plate is to show that the bodies of the connections and the clip-bolts which
are used to clamp them on the various sizes of posts and columns are standardized so that no matter
what use may be made of the connections, their bodies and the clip-bolts which go with them, will always
be the same for each size of post and column.

The bodies of the connections are made of thin malleable iron which is easily sprung to suit the size
of the post or column for which they are intended. For heavier work, such as gate hinges, etc., two clip-
bolts are used with each connection which is made wider and is furnished with four bolt eyes instead of two.
The plate shows I I different sizes of posts or columns, the outside diameters of which are as follows: \y8,
\}i, 2^8, 2/8 or 3", 3>^, 4", 4>^, 5", b}4 or S-^s, 6" and 6f8. Sometimes common pipe is used, hence the
inside measurements of pipe given in the plate.

There is a little variation in two of the sizes. This is caused by the difference in the outside diameters of
the corresponding sizes of pipe and tubing. The outside diameter of a 23^-inch pipe is 2Jb or ^8 less than
a 3-inch tube, while the outside diameter of a 5-inch pipe is byi or yk more than a 5j^-inch tube. The con-
nections are made to allow for this variation.

Page One hundred thirty-eight

^^^^^^

FAIRFIE L D. IOWA

Fig. 1150

Louden Grip Clamp

(Patented April 7, 1914)

Fig. 1 1 50 is a good representation of our Grip Clamp referred
to in the specifications of our Figs. 810 and 959 Cow Stalls, and
extensively used in all of our animal pens, hundreds of thousands
of them being used for this purpose. It is the smoothest, neatest
and best clamp of the kind ever made. It requires no holes to be
drilled in the tubing. Only two bolts are used which are so located
that they will exert equal pressure on all the adjacent parts of
the tubing — a feature that is fully covered by our patent.

We make 8 sizes, outside diameter of the head tubing being
given first. The prices of the different sizes with bolts, coated
with our Special Dairy Barn Paint and galvanized, are given in
the accompanying price list.

Size

No. 1 . . 1 ^g X

No. 2. . I/^ X
No. 3 .. 1 % X
No. 4..l5^x

1^8

ItV

IKs

Size

No. 5.

.15/8 x1t\

No. 6.

.I58X ItV

No. 7.

. ItV X ItV

No. 8.

.lAxhV

Fig. 879

Fig. 1073

Anchor and Hook Bolts

Fig. 727

Fig. 879 is an Expansion Bolt which we use to make attachments to brick and hardened cement work.

Fig. 1073 is a smaller view of an Anchor Bolt to make attachment to either green or hardened cement
work. It is provided with a Helical Steel Lining and is set in a hole which is bored with a common auger
bit in green cement or drilled with a star drill in hardened concrete, the hole and the lining being filled with
soft cement before inserting. The bolt can be readily taken out or replaced when the cement hardens,
the lining remaining.

Fig. 727 is a Hook Bolt to fasten stanchions to wood top-rails.

We furnish only the sizes necessary to attach the fittings used with our equipments.

ttm

Fig. 1190

Louden Parallel Clamps

These Clamps are used for attaching water pipes or air pipes for milking
machines, to the top-rails of stalls, or for any other purpose where two
pipes or pieces of tubing are to run parallel with each other. There are
four sizes, ly^ x l^a and I "3 O. D., and IjV " l^a and 1 Js O. D. The two
former will connect an inch pipe with \^a or 1 "s tubing. The two latter
will connect a 54-inch pipe with the same sizes of tubing.

Easy to Install

There is no troublesome or expensive installation with the Louden goods. The patterns
are made to fit; the malleable castings are all "dropped" to straighten and make them uniform, and
everything is made to go together easily and quickly. The most complete and specific directions
are furnished for installing standard work and nothing is left for guesswork or to be figured out.

Page One hundred thirty-nine

m^^^^MH

irrnmir

TheLOUDEN MACHINERY COMPANY

3j(vC^ rAIRFIELD. IOWa'^vUCS

Louden Cupola — Fig. 1269

Specifications

Sizes

Size

Ventilating
Flue

Base

Moulding

Height

No.
No.
No.
No.
No.

4 Louden
3 Louden
2 Louden
1 Louden
100 Louden

20-inch
24-mch
27-inch
30-inch
36-inch

36x36 inches
46x46 inches
49x49 inches
54x54 inches
64x64 inches

9 feet

11 feet

12 feet

13 feet

14 feet

Weights and Estimate of Size of Cupola Wanted

Building 20x28. one No. 4 Louden Cupola; shipping weight. 160 lbs.
Building 24x28. one No. 3 Louden Cupola; shipping weight, 180 lbs.
Building 30x40. one No. 2 Louden Cupola; shipping weight, 200 lbs.
Building 36x50, one No. 1 Louden Cupola; shipping weight. 220 lbs.
Building 40x70, two No. 1 Louden Cupolas; shipping weight, 220 lbs.
Building 60x60, one No. 100 Louden Cupola.
No charge for crating

The Louden Cupola is built along standard lines on
principles that have been accepted by the leading ventilator
authorities and most ventilator manufacturers.

It is a well-built, substantial cupola and will last a life-
time. As an ornament to the barn it is surpassed by no
other ventilator. It is storm proof and bird proof. It is
not how cheap but how good we can make the Louden
Cupola. We do not spare any cost to make it lasting.

Have your carpenter figure on a wooden cupola, say
6x8 feet, which at its best is not as good a ventilator as
the Louden. Do not overlook the cost of weather vane,
which would be $3.00 to $5.00, and $3.00 to $5.00 for
painting, which would have to be done every few years,
and would be additional expense. Then compare with
our price and we believe you will find that the

Louden is much cheaper, and after all it is abso-

lutely impossible to build a good ventilator out
of wood.

You buy a cupola once in a lifetime and you
want it as substantial as you can get it. Any
ordinary mechanic can put it on the building
in from two to four hours. Wherever a carpenter

Fig. 1269-A

puts a Louden Cupola on a barn he finds that
he does not want to make one out of wood
again, but will always recommend the Louden.
He knows that he is saving money for the
man that he is building the barn for and
giving him a better cupola than can be built
of wood.

The Louden Cupola's
One-Piece Base

The Louden base requires no frame on the
roof before putting it in place, as the base is
made up complete in one solid piece of galvan-
ized material.

Page One hundred forty-one

'^jm* }*^kih^<iiiiii*M

Cross Section

of the

Louden

Cupola

We also use our own specially designed moulding with angle-braced wood
frame inside, which adds great strength to the moulding and base proper,
besides being very artistic. We only use the best of galvanized material in
their construction including all galvanized bolts and washers.
They are built strong and will stand windstorms and will not
get out of shape, and are also screened to keep out birds.
They are built on scientific principles for ventilation and it
does not matter which way the wind blows or what the
surroundings are as the Louden Cupola will always have an up-draft
within and will ventilate the building well. They require no paint-
ing and will last longer than the ordinary frame building. They
do not weigh one-third as much as the old style wood cupola and
will not sag the roof. The Louden Cupola is furnished with 30-inch
Full Body Gold Leaf Weather Vane, the best that can be made,
and one that will stay bright, in the following designs: Horse, Cow,
Sheep, Pig or Rooster. In ordering always state the kind of
weather vane you want.

Louden Ventilators
Fig. 1268

Every living creature must have
fresh air — none can live without it.
When air enters the lungs and is
breathed out, there has been removed
from it the life-giving qualities. It
has changed to poisonous gas.

The warmer and better a barn is
constructed the more necessary is artificial
ventilation. On thousands of farms there are
"well built" barns where lack of pure air is
sapping the vitality of the stock. Upon open-
ing the doors of such a barn in the morning a
man would almost be nauseated by the sick-
ening, poisonous air were it not for other more
noticeable but far less dangerous odors.

An average 1 , 000-pound animal will consume
about 3,000 cubic feet of air in 24 hours. This
"consumed" or used air must be removed from the
barn and fresh air must be allowed to enter to
take its place.

Most new barns have vent flues to carry off
this impure air, but in many barns these outlets

are not doing the work for which they are intended. In some cases this failure is due to a
or "ventilator" that hinders rather than assists the ventilating system.

Note: We do not furnish bases with Louden Ventilators. Different roof pitches and
different conditions for attaching make it impossible to do so.

Fig. 1268

cap

Page One hundred forty-two

rrrTTrmn

TheLOUPEN MACHINERY COMPANY

Specifications

Size — Diameter

Gauge Metal

A

rea in

Weight

Capacity

of Throat

in

used

sq

inches

without

in cu. ft.

inches

Base

per Hour

12

24

113

261b.

36,500

18

24

254

65 1b.

82,000

24

22

452

124 1b.

145.900

30

22

707

195 lb.

231,000

36

20

1,017

245 lb.

304,000

The above capacities are based on a wind velocity of 9.3 mileb per hour, which is the average for the entire country, a difference
of 20 degrees between the inside and outside temperature and a straight flue 30 feet high. If you wish to know the capacity
of any size ventilator under conditions different than the above consult our engineering department. The service is free.

When the Louden company decided to design and manufacture a ventilator we started planning
from the "ground up." The fact that some big selling ventilators were made in a certain way did not
influence our plans. Neither did we permit mere personal opinion to influence our decisions. We
purchased and have used the most expensive and reliable instruments or machines (anemometors) for our
tests and reached our conclusions through their records. The anemometors used are the official testing
apparatus of the government.

It is a fact well known to ventilation engineers that the most efficient way to produce a draft in a flue is
to pass a current of air across the top of the flue. Careful tests show that a plain flue projecting through
the roof will give much better results than most so-called "ventilators" now in the market.

The ideal ventilator must depend upon correct scientific principles for its construction and operation.
It must convert the largest possible per cent of the energy contained in the wind into a pumping or pulling
force to draw the foul air up the flues and out of the building. At the same time there must be no air enter
the ventilator from the outside to carry in rain and snow. Rain and snow entering the ventilator would run
down the flue, necessitating gutters to catch it and drain it out. This would be undesirable as the openings
would often clog up in the winter. Neither should there be any moving parts to get out of order and give
trouble.

The Louden Ventilator fulfills all requirements.
The exhaust openings are of ample area and they are
all so placed that the wind blows across — never into
— the openings. Every opening in the Louden
Ventilator is an exhaust opening. No air enters
the ventilator at any point. Even on the side
exposed to the wind the air is constantly coming out
of all openings. No matter how strong or light the
wind may blow — from north, east, south, or west — in
a March blizzard, in April shower, or on the sultriest
days of August — there is always a strong, steady draft
up the flue that will give ample ventilation. It will
also do its duty regardless of the difference of
temperature inside and outside the building.

The Louden Ventilator is absolutely storm proof.

Construction of Louden Ventilators

The appearance of Louden Ventilators is artistic
and attractive in its simplicity.

The construction is heavy, rigid, and of the very
best materials. Neither time nor expense was spared
in designing this ventilator to have it accomplish the
needed ventilating results and be time, storm, and
rust resisting.

The lower band of Louden Ventilators is strongly
braced inside, clear around, by eight braces. This _

gives the whole ventilator an exceptionally strong and rigid construction. The cone-shaped cap offers
the least possible resistance to the wind and gives no opportunity for rain, snow, or sleet to collect.

The smaller sizes of the Louden Ventilator are made of 24-gauge steel, the 24 and 30 inch sizes of 22-gauge
steel, and the larger sizes of 20-gauge steel. All parts are carefully riveted with special rust-resisting rivets
or are electric welded, and at the joints the sheet metal is joined in the most scientific and substantial manner.
Figure 1268A shows how the ventilator is constructed.

Fig. 1268A

Page One hundred forty-three

Hospital Barn — Homewooj
used iol Hospital Stal

Bull Pwi

NERY COMPANY

P .

arm showing roomy Pens
ind Maternity Fens.
I far end

Louden Window Ventilator

Specifications

Special ventilators for higher windows

Size Window: Fits any window where sash does not exceed 48 inches in height.

can be furnished, at slight additional cost, on special orders. j -, ■

Fixtures Include: 2 shields (one right and one left), two dogs, two braces, I catch and I keeper, 22 screws, and 2 rivets.
Finish: Galvanized.

Fresh air in the barn is as necessary for the comfort and health
of the stock as fresh water and pure food. According to experts
the average cow consumes more pounds of air than she does of
either food or water. A 1,000 pound cow consumes about 224
pounds of air daily.

The Louden Window Ventilator makes possible an abundance of
fresh air without injurious draughts. Instead of opening like an
ordinary window the sash tilts inward from the top and rests
against metal shields, as shown in
Fig. 988-A. The cold air, instead of
striking the stock directly, is thrown
upward, and mingles with the warm
air near the ceiling before it comes
in contact with the animals.

When it is necessary to keep stock
in the barn during warm weather the
window may be opened and raised,
as shown in Fig. 988-B, to give a
direct and cooling circulation of air
throughout the barn. This feature
is a decided improvement over the
hinged type of window, which cannot
be raised. With the Louden Window
Ventilator the sash may easily be removed from the window if desired.
All photos shown are inside views.

Fig. 989 is a cross section of a window fitted with a Louden Window
Ventilator. It shows the window open and slightly raised. The sash is
held in the raised position by two locking dogs, one on each side.

The shields are made of galvanized sheet steel. They are secured
to the casing by screws along the inner edges. Flanges along the

outer edges, turned in, support the sash when
open. The shields are stiffened by brace
rods, riveted on.

The Louden Window Ventilator is made
in different sizes to fit any window. To get
the proper size, give height of sash. This
measurement is absolutely necessary before
we can make up the shields. No other is
needed.

The Louden Window Ventilator is the
most perfect window ventilator made. It is
inexpensive and extremely simple. Specify it
when you build or remodel your barn

Fig. 986
Window Closed

Fig. 988-A
Window Open

Fig. 988-B

Pat'd Feb. 7, 1916

Window Open and Slightly

Raised

Pigeon Falls, Wis., July 10. 1916.
The Louden Machinery Co..

St. Paul. Minn.
Gentlemen:

A line or two of comment about the service of
Louden Goods:

The Louden Equipment is the best and most per-
fect barn equipment that 1 have ever seen.

Die Kolden. Kolden Stock Farm.

Fig. 989
Cross Section

Page One hundred forty-six

Louden Manger and Gutter Drains

Specifications

Manger Drains are 4^ i inches wide at top, and 4^i inches deep, with outlet
to fit either I ' .-inch or 2-inch pipe, also 4-inch Cast Iron Soil Pipe or
Sewer Tile, andare furnished with bell trap strainer and brass cover.
Weight, 5^4 pounds. , , . , . . ,

Gutter or Floor Drains are 8 inches wide at top and 7 inches deep with out-
let to fit either a 4-inch Cast Iron Soil Pipe, or Sewer Tile, and are fur-
nished with bell trap strainer, grating, and with or without brass cover.
Weight. 21 pounds. i i • c j

Gutter Drain is always furnished with brass cover unless otherwise specihed.

NOTE: For other types of Drains and Cess Pools, see page 212.

Proper drainage of the barn is second in importance only to
proper lighting and ventilation. In many barns the drainage is
so poor that it offsets to a great extent the advantages of proper
ventilation facilities. .

In addition to the sanitary advantages of proper dramage.
the saving of the liquid manure makes the system an economy.
Land to which liquid manure is applied will very shortly return
in increased crops the entire cost of the installation.

Illustration shows an excellent method of barn dramage. In
the gutter at the left of the picture is a cross section of our floor,

or gutter drain. , .„ • l- j l

As can be seen in the illustrations, on this and on the
next page, both the gutter drains and the manger drains are

Page One hundred forty-seven

Fig. 1270' 2

Manger Drain fitted to 4-inch

Drain Tile

Fig. 1271

Gutter Drain fitted to 4-inch

Tile or Soil Pipe

equipped with bell trap so that no odors or gases can escape into tl
barn. Each is equipped with strainers which are a part of the bell'
trap. This prevents trash entering and clogging up the drain pipes.

Drains are made of cast iron throughout with the exception of the
close-fitting, water-tight brass lid.

The brass lids have a perfectly milled seat, the same as found on valves of automobiles and gasoline
engines, which are recognized standard. The lids, while easily removed, close the opening air tight by
their own weight.

The lifting rings on the brass lids are counter sunk, so there is no danger of the lid being displaced by
the animals stepping on it, or rooting with the nose. While fitting snugly, the lifting ring is so arranged
that lid can be removed instantly with the fingers, no tools being required.

Manger Drain Installation

Figures 1 270 and 1 270 J 2 show how Louden Manger Drains fit different sizes of drain pipe. The manger
drain pipe should never be less than I ' j-inch pipe, and our drain heads will fit that size; also a 2-inch pipe
or 4-inch soil pipe or tile. Illustration shows how far below the manger floor level the drain pipe may
rise to allow for proper installation.

The advantage of having a drain for the mangers is great. With the drain closed with the close-fitting
cap, the animals may be watered conveniently, and the mangers scrubbed out as often as desired.

Gutter Drain Installation

Louden Gutter Drains are made to fit either a 4-inch Cast Soil Pipe or Sewer tile. Illustration shows
proper installation. The inside wall of the Drain is 4 inches in diameter, the same as the 4-inch inside of
the drain tile. Set the flange end of tile next to floor and Drain when set in it with cement will be abso-
lutely rigid. Every barn should have a drainage system that will make it possible to save every bit of
the liquid manure. Different conditions in the barn surroundings will make the installation of a liquid
manure system a matter of personal choice, but the main point — save the liquids — can not be too strongly
urged.

1 1 is an easy matter to arrange cocks at the cistern so that the water from the mangers need not enter
the cistern, but be carried to other places.

Let Our Experts Help You

We have a large corps of men who are experts on barn construction, barn arrangement,
ventilation, drainage, and kindred subjects. These experts are at your service and advice is
free. If you are going to build or remodel your barn do not hesitate to write us. Our sugges-
tions may save you many dollars.

Page One hundred forty-eight

rrrmmn

TheLOUPEN MACHINERY COMPABJY

The Louden Guarantee

We guarantee all our products to be exactly as herein represented, and to perform the
work for which they are intended in a satisfactory manner. Also, that the material and
workmanship is free from defects, and we agree to replace without charge anything which
may be defective.

This has been our practice during our fifty years of building Barn Equipments, and
upon this policy our extensive, world-wide business has been built. Those who know the
Louden Company or the Louden goods do not require any formal guarantee. They KNOW
that everything made by us will be FIRST CLASS IN EVERY RESPECT.

Our most enthusiastic customers are those who have used other equipments and have
LEARNED FROM EXPERIENCE the superior merits of ours. We want the prospective
purchaser to ask the men who use our equipment and to find out for himself which is THE
BEST from every point of practical service and genuine utility.

We invite a thorough investigation, and solicit a trial with other equipments, whenever
practical, because we know that this is the best way to demonstrate the decided superiority
of our goods. Our long established reputation for fair and honorable dealing, in addition to
the established merits of our goods, is ample protection for every purchaser.

THE LOUDEN MACHINERY CO/

By

President.

i>airybakN

COATING

Coatings for Dairy Barn Equipments

After many years of scientific research and painstaking experiments, we
have succeeded in producing an improved Coating for Dairy Barn Equip-
ments, which will be known as "Louden Tantite." It is a beautiful tan
color, not too dark nor too light, but just right to harmonize with and satisfy
all the requirements of an up-to-date dairy barn. It is made from our own
formula which was worked out after years of patient investigation and consul-
tations with the foremost experts in the manufacture of paints. Next to gal-
vanizing it is the most durable coating made for barn equipment. In a well
ventilated barn, where the moisture is properly taken care of, it will stand as
well as galvanizing, and will cost considerably less.

All the metal work of our equipment will be coated with "Tantite" unless
the order calls for galvanizing. The tubing and other metal parts are first
carefully cleaned to free them from scale and dirt, and are then dipped in a
heavy mixture of "Tantite," which will run into all openings, thus coating
the inside of the tubing and castings as well as the outside. After dipping,
the parts are run on an overhead track into a large steam heated oven where the "Tantite" is thoroughly
baked on. The result is a heavy coating of "Tantite," both inside and outside, producing the very best
finish — really an enamel — which will be as durable as the finish is excellent.

We strongly recommend the coating of stalls and stanchions, the metal parts of mangers, and all
animal pens, at least once a year, in order to keep them in a strictly sanitary condition. This is nec-
essary, whether galvanized or coated with paint, and when this is done the galvanizing will be but little
advantage. Also, in view of the rough handling in shipping and while erecting, it will pay to give the
material a coat of "Tantite" after it is erected and when the cement work is dry. No one would think
of painting the material for a house before it was built and not painting the house afterward. The rough
handling is sure to more or less damage the very best finish, and to make the equipment look strictly
first class it should be coated after erecting.

We furnish free with each order a small can of "Tantite," sufficient to touch up the scars which may
be received in shipping and handling. We also put up "Tantite" in two sizes of self-sealing cans, labeled
as shown in cut, to be used for additional coating. The larger can is a half gallon, and the smaller is a
quart. When properly spread, a half gallon will coat I 5 to 20 stalls, and other work in proportion.

AH cracks and crevices, wherever they may be, should be filled with some durable filler, such as iron
cement, or even good putty with white or red lead added to give it body. This is advisable to make the
equipment completely sanitary.

Page One hundred forty-nine

LOUDEN CARRIERS

LITTER, FEED, MILK CAN, HARNESS, AND
MERCHANDISE

PAGE

Litter Carriers 1 54- 1 66

Feed Carriers 1 67- 1 70

Feed Trucks 171

Harness Carriers 171

Merchandise Carriers 1 72

Milk Can Carriers 173-174

Steel Track and Track Fittings 175-183

Swinging Cranes 185-186

Rod Track and Fittings 187-190

Plans of Installation 191-193

Profit and Loss on the Farm

Losses on the farm result from exactly the same
causes which make failures of mercantile establish-
ments. The successful farmer must exercise the
same care to prevent losses as must the superin-
tendent of a great railway system.

Waste Steals Profit

Whether it is of labor or of material, waste is
the most persistent and insidious cause of loss.

The most valuable by-product of the farm is
manure. The litter of the barn is the balance
wheel of the farm. Every crop harvested, every
blade of grass eaten by cattle uses just so much of
your cash capital in soil fertility. You must replace
it by fertilizing. Now comes the opportunity for
waste. What method do you use for handling
manure? All soil experts agree that manure used
fresh and containing its full share of liquid is at
least 50 per cent more valuable than old manure.
Are you losing that 50 per cent through lack of
facilities for handling it? A litter carrier installed
in your barn will enable you to load fresh manure
into a wagon or spreader and make the work mere
child's play.

If you do not have our little booklet entitled
"Some Interesting Facts on a Homely Subject,"
which treats of manure values and methods of
caring for same, send for it — it is free.

Stop Stable Drudgery

Labor costs money. Whether you clean your
barn and feed your stock yourself or hire it done,
you cannot afford to waste the time and energy

called for by the old wheelbarrow method. The
saving in time alone gained by the use of a litter
and feed carrier will pay handsomely on the
investment.

Cleanliness Next To Godliness

Just as much so in the barn as in the kitchen.
A clean barn means healthy cattle, more and better
dairy products. Removing the unpleasant feature
of cleaning the barn by using a litter carrier will
result in more frequent cleaning. The carrier
places the litter either in your wagon or at any
desired distance from your barn, insuring not only
a clean barn, but a clean yard as well.

Check Up the Profits

Count them on your fingers: The increase in
the value of fresh, wet manure and consequent
increase in the fertility of the farm; the saving of
time in the handling; the improved health of your
cattle; the increase both in quantity and quality
of dairy products. Any one of these reasons should
be sufficient to induce any farmer or dairyman to
equip his barn with a Louden Litter Carrier. Many
farmers say that by using a Louden Feed Carrier
they are able to prevent a waste of feed that soon
pays for a feed carrier — to say nothing of the
time saved. If you could reduce each profit to
figures, add them up for a year, setting down the
answer in dollars and cents, you would very quickly,
like everyone of your friends who have installed
Louden Litter and Feed Carriers, come to the con-
clusion that you could not get along without them.

Page One hundred fifty-two

)J^;T!}^»)iio>^.^i:^Nth;i^r4v

Why You Should Buy Louden
Carriers

Because they are the best. This is a "look-
you-square-in-the-eye" statement of facts. We
know they are the best because we have made a
hfe study of overhead carriers. We own the
first patent issued by the United States Patent
Office on Litter Carriers. We have studied and
experimented constantly, with a full and complete
knowledge of the requirements to make our carriers
perfect. Whenever we find an improvement possi-
ble we make it. We discard undesirable features.
Our patents to-day cover practically every valuable
feature on litter carriers. They cover many special
features which can only be had in Louden Carriers,
and without which no carrier can be perfect.

Quality

Quality and workmanship have always been of
first importance with us. Our policy of building
the best goods possible, and selling them at the
lowest prices consistent with good business methods,
has built up an enormous trade for us; one which
binder no circumstances would we take any chance
of jeopardizing by allowing goods of an inferior
quality or workmanship to leave our factory.

Price

We have never been engaged in the wild
scramble to build cheap goods. With us it never
has been a question of "how cheap," but always
"how good." In making up your mind to install
a litter carrier in your barn, bear in mind that it
is not for a day, a week or a month, but for years
that you want this carrier to work at all times and

to give you good service. That once you have
discarded the wheelbarrow you do not want to be
compelled to go back to it, while making repairs on
a carrier system which was built too cheaply to
stand up under the work.

We build carriers of different styles, of different
weights of materials, and at a wide variation in
price to suit both the needs and the purse of all.
But from the highest-price outfit to the lowest
price, each one represents the highest standard of
excellence — the Louden Standard — and is posi-
tively the best value that can be bought at the
price.

We invite prospective purchasers to make com-
parison between Louden Litter Carriers and others.
See them both work. Ask the man who is using
them. When you have done this with a mind
open to conviction, you will join us in saying —
"None so good as Louden Carriers."

Let Us Help You

In this catalog we endeavor to make every
detail of our different carriers, track and methods
of installing, very clear and concise. If after care-
ful reading you should feel at a loss as to the best
carrier or the best method of installation to suit
your purpose, write us, giving a floor plan of your
barn, showing location of stalls, and indicating
about where you would wish to run the litter
carrier tracks. Upon receipt of this information
we will submit a plan of installation suitable for the
conditions existing at your barn and will give you
an estimate of cost.

No matter how situated, nor how complicated
the arrangement, we can install Louden Litter and
Feed Carrier equipment to work and give you
perfect satisfaction.

Page One hundred fifty-three

The Kind of Carrier for You

The kind of carrier you will need depends upon the arrangement of your barn, size of barn, number
of cattle housed, and the disposition you wish to make of the litter.

In the great majority of cases, one of the carriers operating on a solid steel track will be found the
most desirable, but the arrangement of some buildings allows the use of the lighter wire track outfits
with satisfactory results.

If it is your intention to drop the litter into a wagon or spreader, or if it is necessary to use many
curves or switches, the solid steel track carriers are the only practical kind for your use.

If, however, you simply wish to get the litter out of the barn quickly, running it into a dump some
distance away, one of the wire track carriers will answer your purpose.

Following we give a brief summing up of the special features of our different carriers, which may
help you to determine which outfit will best suit your purpose. All carriers are described in detail on
the pages following.

Litter Carriers

NEW IMPROVEMENT. All Louden Litter Carriers are now equipped with
roller bearing track wheels.

EMANCIPATOR. The Emancipator Carrier is the final summing up of
all the desirable features which can be incorporated into a Litter Carrier. It
is the desirable carrier for use in large dairy barns where the work is heavy.
It will stand up under all kinds of handling. Every part is built heavy. If
you want the best litter carrier made, place your order for the Emancipator.
It will not disappoint you. Full description, page 157.

STANDARD. This is the old reliable, the first Litter Carrier placed on
the market using a worm gear hoist. It is a little lighter than the Emancipator,
uses cables for supporting the box instead of chain, and can only be raised
a distance of 4^ or 5 feet, so is not so desirable for buildings with high
ceilings. Where ceilings do not exceed 8 or 9 feet in height, no better value
can be bought than the Standard Carrier. See page 161.

iSELF-ACTING. The strongest, best behaved litter carrier ever built to
run on a wire track. If you simply want manure conveyed from the barn
to the yard and piled there, load it in this carrier and give it a shove. It will
run out, empty itself and come back. This carrier can also be emptied into
spreader or wagon, but requires a little more head room. This is a very
popular carrier. See page 163.

u

LITTER

LovJ?fN-

QUICK OUT. The Quick Out Carrier is a combination of many
of the good points of the Emancipator and Standard Carrier with
the automatic quick return of our Self-Acting Carrier. It runs on
wire track and has improved raising and lowering device. Can be
used to empty litter into wagon or spreader, or to be operated auto-
matically. These carriers require no posts in the yard, unless track is
over 100 feet long. This carrier described fully on page 162.

Page One hundred fifty-four

Feed Carriers

NEW IMPROVEMENT. All Louden Feed Carriers are now equipped with roller bearing track wheels.

DOUBLE END FEED CARRIER. The largest feed carrier we make.
It is built with sloping shovel board at each end so two men can work at the
same time. It is the carrier for heavy work; is the best carrier for all barns,
and particularly desirable where you are feeding more than twenty head of
animals. The carrier is strongly reinforced in all parts. It is built to stand
heavy work and give long service. See page 1 67.

SINGLE END FEED CARRIER. If one man is doing the feeding, this
carrier is the right one for all barns. It is easy to handle; can be furnished
with any style of hoisting gear, and is a handy all-around feed car; is suitable
for carrying silage from silo to feed alley, or for carrying corn or other grains
to bunkers or feed troughs. Carrier is strongly built of the best materials.
Description on page 168.

SIDE DELIVERY FEED CARRIER. This carrier was designed to
meet the demand for a carrier to be used where feed is to be distributed in
feed bunkers or on feeding floors. It is so arranged that the feed box can be
tilted over sideways allowing feed to pour out a little at a time or feed can
be scooped out easily. It is easily handled and is a great saver of time and
labor. See page 170.

ADJUSTABLE FRAME FEED CARRIER. This carrier is attached to
the truck with a chain and may be hung high or low as required. It fills every
requirement where it is not necessary to raise or lower the box during feeding
time. The materials used in the manufacture are the same as in other Louden
Feed Carriers. The raising and lowering chains are quickly adjusted.
See page 1 69.

WIRE TRACK FEED CARRIER. This carrier has the chain adjust-
ment for accommodating the carrier to the height of the ceiling, and is built
for a wire track. No wire track carrier on the market is more satisfactory.
The box is the same as those we use on our other carriers. Full description
on page 169.

Page One hundred fifty-five

Fig. 828. (Hospice)

Emancipator Litter Carrier — Fig. 828

/ Specifications

Operates on Louden Double Bead steel track. Fig. 571. (For track fittings see pages 175 to 183.)
Body of box is made of 20 gauge galvanized sheet steel, reinforced with angle iron.

Ejids of box are made of 16 gauge galvanized sheet steel. ^ • ia u u i

Length of box. 48 inches: width. 27,1 « inches; depth. 22 inches, outside measurements. Capacity, 10 bushels.
Box is fitted regularly to raise and lower 7 feet; may be fitted to raise and lower as much as 20 feet at slight additional cost.
Track wheels are roller bearing.
Diameter of track wheels. 4 inches.
Clearance necessary for track wheels, 5 inches.

Total clearance necessary, box upright, 50 inches; box dumped, 56 inches. . r ■ . . i l

Length of hand chain. 1 1 feet, ends joined together. Where ceilings are high, longer chains can be furnished at slight
additional cost.

Shipping weight, 208 pounds.

In a litter carrier the demand should be for dependable, long continued service and safety, together
with ease of operation and convenience as these features are essential. Study carefully the construction
and design, then consider the factory which makes the carrier, and the reputation it bears for quality and
square dealing.

The Louden Emancipator Litter Carrier is the acme of years of study and experiment; the result of
Louden experience and Louden determination to manufacture the best barn equipment on earth.

It-is made for the man who wants the best, who is satisfied with nothing short of perfection.

Page One hundred fifty-seven

There is no other carrier like it; no other carrier that has the same strength, symmetry, lifting power,
or ease of propellment along the track. No other carrier has the exclusive special features of the Eman-
cipator, without which any litter carrier falls short of perfection.

As has often been said, "The best evidence of worth is the name of
the maker." The Louden Machinery Company is too well established,
too well known, and too proud of its reputation for quality and square
dealing, to offer any product that is not satis-
factory and SAFE.

Hoisting Device

We discarded all clutches, brakes and ratchets
in connection with litter and feed carriers years
ago. We own the first patents issued on litter
carriers, but thorough tests so clearly proved the
superiority of our present construction that we
threw away all the old style models and are offer-
ing only those which we know to be absolutely
trustworthy.

It makes the lowering and raising of the box
so easy that with the same effort practically
double as much can be raised as with any other hoisting
device. A boy can raise a bigger load with this device than
can a man with any other litter or feed carrier. A lifting
chain of sufficient length to raise and lower the box seven
feet is furnished regularly, but at small additional cost the

carrier can be equipped to hoist twenty feet.

Fig. 881. The Emancipator
The wheel "A" (see illustration) is the wheel over which Hoisting Gear,

the hand chain passes. This chain is endless, like the chain

on a bicycle, and the links fit snugly over the sprockets in the wheel. The eixle of wheel "A" revolves
with the wheel, and a thread — the worm — turns just as fast as you turn wheel "A" with the hand chain.
Now examine wheel "B". It has lugs, or pins, all around, into which the worm threads fit, and when
these threads begin to turn as a result of pulling on the hand chain the advantage you gain over the load

is enormous. It permits a one pound pull on the chain to raise forty in the box.

This is the greatest leverage giving principle ever discovered.

Another exclusive Louden feature is the way the lifting chain operates. This,
like other Louden features, is the result of 48 years' study, and it eliminates all
possibility of the carrier box dropping too quickly. It also does away with trouble-
some ratchets and brakes that would make its use by careless help a constant danger.

It will be seen in the illustration how the lifting chain is attached to the carrier
box, how it runs over the pin wheel "B" and up to and around the drum. This
lifting chain CANNOT run unless there is a pull on the hand chain. The lifting
chain, the hand chain and the worm MUST work in unison.

The chain guides (or floats) "D" on both the wheel and the drum, work perfectly
and always keep the chain even and fitting snugly. Everything is mechanically
correct and is tested thoroughly before leaving the factory.

Still another exclusive Louden feature is the extra strong swivel joints "E"
which connect the track wheels to the frame, and which support the weight of the
load. Instead of using an ordinary bolt that bends and gets out of shape after a
little usage, we use a heavy swivel knee joint, the bearing surface of which is
2g inches in diameter. This swivel joint permits the carrier to round curves as
easily as it runs on a straight track. There is no sticking or binding or heavy
friction to overcome.

The track wheels are set as far apart on the track as possible. This does away

with the unsteadiness and "jerkiness. " The wheels are large — four inches in

Fig. 885. diameter — are roller bearing and run smoothly on the track. The wheels turn on

Page One hundred fifty-eight

iiiimiiii.^ij,:i\

The Emancipator Box.

special tempered steel axles | inch in diameter. The axles are bolted into the supporting casting full size and
no weak shoulders. The wheels are strong enough to carry tons more than will ever be required in a litter
carrier. The flanges of Louden Track Wheels are made so that each flange has two bearings against the edge
of the track, instead of one which ordinary wheel flanges have. This prevents the wheels from wabbling on
the track. This is a valuable, patented and exclusive feature. The Louden Double Bead Steel Track
(Page 175) used with the Emancipator Litter Carrier is made to stand great strains, and is strong enough
to carry any load you can pile on the carrier box.

Carrier Box

The Emancipator Carrier Box is built of heavy galvanized steel,
reinforced with angle iron. You can't overload it. Fill it full of sand
or water, rush it over the track — you can't do it a bit of damage.
The box is water tight and will hold every drop of liquid manure; no
spilling of liquids along the walk. The most valuable part of the manure
is saved. The box is built regularly 48 inches long, 27,' 3 inches wide
and 22 inches deep.

Dumping Device

Here again is the Louden Carrier in the lead. This exclusive arrange"
ment was adopted after thoroughly testing and discarding other plans.

The box is hung to- the exact fraction of an inch to make the balance Fig. 723.
most perfect. The trip lock in the end of the box is adjusted so that it
is impossible to dump the box unless it is so desired, yet makes it an easy matter to dump the box with
a shovel or fork. This trip lock is also arranged so that the box may be dumped with a rope, where the
track arrangement used will allow the carrier to run by gravity to manure pit or spreader. The rope
can be used to return the carrier to the barn for reloading. The box, on account of its correct balance,
can be righted with pitchfork or shovel. No touching with hands is necessary.

The Best For You

If quality, workmanship, durability, and perfection of mechanism count with
you, install the Emancipator Litter Carrier. There is none like it; none to com-
pare with it; none that will give you that lasting satisfaction of having made a
wise investment. It is tested and true. It is used the world over, and it is backed
by the oldest, largest, and best known litter-carrier manufacturer in the world.

Track

The Louden Double Bead Track, Fig. 571 (Page 175), is used with the
Emancipator Carrier.

Louden track is stronger, more reliable in use, easier to put up, and is in every
other way SUPERIOR to other styles of track used for this purpose. It will
not buckle to one side or let the carrier run off as side-hitch tracks will do. We
warrant all our goods to be SUPERIOR to anything of the kind on the market,
and we do not ask purchasers to keep any article which will not fill the
warranty.

A recent test in the Louden factory proved conclusively that, under exactly
the same conditions. Louden tracks will carry almost double as much weight as
other tracks. Every article bearing the name Louden is far stronger than
necessary for practical use and is built that way to handle safely the unusual
strain that might be placed upon it.

Roller Bearing Track
Wheels

Each wheel used on our
steel track litter carriers
is fitted with 1 7 tempered
steel roller bearings. Size
of bearings for steel track
carriers -i^xl inch. These
revolve around a J y -inch
cold rolled steel axle or
shaft. The ends of the
steel roller bearings work
against our special pat-
ented revolvable washer.
This reduces friction to a
minimum. Also eliminates
excessive wear, prevents
binding or grinding to-
gether of the rollers. The
Louden Trolleys with
roller bearings travel
easily and outlast any
other trolleys of this kind
that are made.

In speaking of Louden equipment, Walter J. Domes, Crescent Hill Ayrshire Farm,
McCoy. Oregon, writes:

"I have been using Louden Stalls and Stanchions and Feed and Litter Carriers for several
years and am more than pleased with them. Will install two more carriers this summer.

"Were it not for my Louden equipment I would not be able to keep my herd of 100
registered Ayrshires in the shape they are, nor would I receive the high score I do by
the Dairy Inspectors.

"My two cow barns cost me over $8,000.00 and have several hundred feet of Louden
track."

Page One hundred fifty-nine

Louden Standard
Litter Carrier— Fig. 720

Specifications

Operates on Louden Double Bead Steel
Track, Fig. 571. (See pages 173 to 183, for
Track and Track Fittings.)

Body of box made of 20-gauge galvanized
sheet steel, reinforced with angle iron.

Ends of box are made of 16-gauge galva-
nized sheet steel.

Length of box, 48 inches: width, 27)^8
inches; depth, 22 inches, outside measure-
ments. Capacity, 10 bushels.

Box is fitted regularly to raise and lower
43^ feet.

Track Wheels are roller bearing.

Diameter of Track Wheels. 4 inches.

Clearance necessary for Track Wheels, 5
inches.

Total clearance necessary, box upright, 48
inches; box dumped, 54 inches.

Length of hand chain, 1 1 feet, ends joined
together.

Shipping weight, 185 pounds.

This was the first Litter Carrier

manufactured using the worm gear

hoisting device. Seeking to overcome the objection of

ratchet and lever gear, we planned and perfected this

standard carrier. It was the pioneer Litter Carrier in its

class, and is today the most popular and best selling Litter Carrier in the United States,

The Standard is built along the same lines as the Emancipator except that cables instead of chains are
used for supporting the carrier box. These cables wind on drums which form
the connection between the pin wheels at each end of the carrier. The drums
will carry about five feet of cable, which limits the raising and lowering of the
carrier to about ^]/2 feet. (See detailed view, Fig. 722.)

Using the worm gear, the same lifting power is secured as with the Emanci-
pator. No ratchets or levers are used and it will stand at any point.

The material used in the construction of this carrier is the same as that used
in the Emancipator Carrier. The difference in the two carriers being in the
hoisting gear. It is built regularly for our Double Bead Steel Track. Track
Wheels are roller bearing.

The same special steel axle with roller bearings for the wheels, the same
strong swivel connections for joining the trucks to the main frame, the same
connecting bars and the same latching parts as used in the Emancipator Carrier
are also used in the Standard Carriers. In all of their vital parts the two
carriers are alike in that they have ample strength for any work they will ever
p. _22 be called upon to do.

Fig. 720. (Merkens).

Louden Machinery Company. Fairfield, Iowa. Murray, Iowa, May 8, 1913.

Dear Sirs:

The Litter Carrier I bought of you last fall is more than I expected. I have it installed in one of my horse barns
whicii holds fifty head of horses, and it is the greatest labor-saving piece of machinery I have ever bought.

One morning I fed the fifty horses hay and grain and cleaned out the barn in one hour and twenty minutes by
myself. If I had used a wheelbarrow to carry out the manure it would have taken me nearly two hours to clean out
the barn, and some hired men have been half a day at the same job.

I looked at various other makes of carriers before I bought, but on account of having some of the Louden goods
on my farm 1 was determined to see the Louden Litter Carrier before buying, and when I saw your outfit at the State
Fair I was very anxious to buy one because I thought it was far better than any other I had seen. I don't know of
any place it could be made better — it works fine.

I have showed the Carrier to a great many people and they have always had words of praise for it.

Yours truly,

Lewis Evans, Prop., Horse Exchange Stock Farm.

Page One hundred sixty-one

Pat'd May 9. 191

^m^

Louden Quick Out Litter
Carrier — Fig. 882

Specifications

Operates on 0000 Basic Steel Wire Track. (See
pages 187-190 for Track Fittings.) Body of box is
made of 20-gauge galvanized sheet steel; ends of box
are 16-gauge sheet steel strongly reinforced.

Length of box, 42 inches: width, 24 inches: depth.
15}2 inches: capacity, 3 bushels.

Box is fitted to raise and lower 3J^ feet.

Track Wheels are roller bearing.

Diameter of Track Wheels, 6 inches.

Clearance necessary for Track Wheels, 6 inches.

Total clearance necessary, box upright, 42 inches:
box dumped, 47 inches.

Length of hand chain 8J^ feet, ends joined together.
Where ceilings are high, longer hand chains can be
furnished at slight additional cost.

Shipping weight, 125 pounds.

The Quick Out Carrier is equipped with f- ««■> n • t

an improved raising and lowering device. '^' " ^"""^ '•

The lifting power is secured by a worm gear hoist on the same principle used with the Louden Carriers
for solid steel track. The main frame consists of two %.inch pipe shafts held in position by two
heavy malleable iron castings. These castings form heavy, substantial sockets for receiving the swivel
yokes which carry the wheels. This forms the swivel knee joint connection between the trolleys and
main frame of the carrier (where the entire weight of the load is carried) and is one of the important and
exclusive points of superiority found on all Louden Litter and Feed Carriers.

The horizontal pipes stand parallel with each other and
about three inches apart. When the carrier box is raised, the
bail of the box, which is also of pipe, enters between the two
horizontal bars interlocking with them, forming a rigid frame.
This prevents any endwise swinging or rocking motion and
permits the carrier to be operated automatically a much
greater distance than other wire track carriers.

Hoisting Gear On Quick Out Carrier

The hoist on the Quick Out Carrier is built on the same
principle as the hoisting gear on Louden Carriers for solid
steel track. The worm gear gives ample lifting power for the
heaviest loads. The box is supported by double chains. The
upper ends of the chains are fastened to the two main shafts
and the surplus chain winds up on these shafts as the carrier
is elevated. Heavy loads can be elevated easily and the double
Fig. 883. chains give strong support.

Special Features of Louden Wire Track Carriers

The Quick Out Carrier and the Self-Acting Carrier (shown on next page) were designed for use in
barns where the work is not so heavy and where the arrangement of track is very simple requiring few
switches or curves. These carriers really operate best where the track
runs in a straight line. When loaded, a good push will send the carriers
out into the yard 60 to 80 feet, where they will empty themselves and
return automatically to the barn. The carriers cannot be operated auto-
matically around curves or over switches. Where curves and switches
are necessary the carrier must always be followed until the last curve or
switch is passed and from that point it can be sent out to the end of the
track and will automatically return.

SWIVEL TRUCKS. Both the Quick Out and Self-Acting Carriers
are fitted with swivel trucks. This truck frame or supporting frame for

{Continued on page 163)

Page One hundred sixty-two

Fig. 753. (Hurl).
Spring End Stop.

■i.u;iJfeNm.'t^i5

Louden Self-Acting
Carrier — Fig. 721

Specifications

Operates on 0000 Basic Steel Wire Track. (See pages 187-190
for Track Fittings.)

Body of box is made of 20-gauge sheet steel; ends of 16-gauge
sheet steel strongly reinforced.

Length of box, 42 inches; width, 24 inches; depth, 153 2 inches,
outside measurements. Capacity, 5 bushels.

Track Wheels are roller bearing.

Diameter of Track Wheels, 6 inches.

Clearance necessary for Track Wheels, 6 inches.

Total clearance necessary, box upright, 52 inches; box dumped,
57 inches.

Shipping weight, 93 pounds.

The Self-Acting Carrier is like the Quick Out Carrier
except it is not fitted with a hoisting gear. Where it
is not necessary to raise and lower the load this is the
best litter carrier ever made to run on wire track. It
will run the easiest and farthest, trip the most positive at
any point along the track, and return to the barn without
getting off the track.

Where the manure shed can be placed immediately
opposite the stable door so the track may be run straight
from the barn to the manure shed, or if the practice is
followed of piling the manure out in the yard, the Self-
Acting Carrier is handy and quick and can be installed
at very small expense.

^ In handling the work you simply shovel the litter and manure into the carrier box and when the
box is full get behind the carrier and give it a good strong push out into the yard. The trip which
fastens to the track at point of unloading is adjustable and can be moved from place to place. When
the loaded carrier reaches the trip the latch on the carrier box is released and the box turns over spilling
its load. At the end of the track is the Spring End Stop. This prevents the carrier from running
into the post or building at the end of the track and also gives the carrier a start on its return trip
to the barn.

The outer end of the track should be elevated about 12 to 18 inches above the inside end — the carrier
comes back quickly and smoothly. While the carrier is making the trip out to the shed or yard, the
man in the barn is busy getting ready for another load. It makes quick, easy and satisfactory work.

THE FRAME. The frame of the carrier is solidly constructed of heavy inch pipe, held together at
the ends by a double set of malleable iron corner clamps. These clamps form the swivel socket into
which fit the lower end of the yokes carrying the wheels. This form.s the strong, easy working swivel
knee joint between the carrier trucks and the main frame where the weight of the load hangs, and which
is found on all Louden Carriers.

Fig. 721. (Hymn).
Patented Oct. 6, 1908.

{Continued from, page 162)

the carrier wheel is of heavy malleable iron. At the upper end of this casting is fitted the steel axle on
which the wheels turn. At the lower end the truck is joined on to the main frame of the carrier by means
of a swivel joint — one of the strong features in all Louden Carriers. On the upper side of the truck there
is a small keeper which prevents the wheels from getting off the track. These special swivel trucks allow
the carriers to be operated around very short curves and over switches.

THE WHEELS. The wheels are made of best quality of gray iron.
They are 6 inches in diameter. The wheels have deep wide grooves,
turned perfectly true, and these are supplemented by a small groove in
the middle to fit the wire. The small groove holds the wheels in line and
prevents the wabbling motion which so greatly retards speed, and which
is a serious objection in other makes of wire track litter carriers. The
spokes in the wheel are heavy, and the wheels turn on roller bearings.

ROLLER BEARINGS.

The wheels are fitted with our special case

Fig. 19.

Page One hundred sixty-three

LP. IOWA"^j^;g^

hardened steel roller bearings. These bearings are of the finest steel, turned perfectly true. Fifteen
of them in each wheel revolve around a tempered steel axle. On each end of the axle (see Fig. 19, page 163)
there is a revolving washer which prevents the friction that would be produced if the ends of the rollers were
allowed to rub against the castings. This is one more important Louden improvement covered by our
patents. Our wire track carriers can be operated a greater distance with less exertion than any other
light carrier made.

THE BOX. The box for both the Quick Out and Self-Acting Carrier is made 42 inches long.
It is 22 inches wide and I 5,' 2 inches deep. The ends, sides and bottom of the box are made of high-grade
galvanized iron, reinforced by strong angle iron at the upper edges.

SPRING END STOP. An important improvement with our Wire Track Litter Carrier is the patent
Spring End Stop. (See Fig. 753, page 162.) This end stop not only prevents the wheels from jumping the
track no matter how hard the carrier may be running, but it also starts the carrier back on its return trip.

THE TRIP. The trip for both the Quick Out and Self-Acting Litter Carrier is adjustable. The
trip can be placed on the track at any point, and can be moved from place to place on the track without
removing any bolts. In fact the position of the trip may be shifted from the ground with a fork or shovel
handle.

The trip for the carriers is so arranged that when carriers reach the trip the latch on the end of the
box is released, allowing the box to turn over and empty its load. Another good feature of our tripping
device on the wire track carriers is the fact that when tripped they stay tripped. After striking the trip
on the track the carrier box will turn over and can not be latched in upright position until the latch is
properly set. The setting of the latch is done without an instant's delay when the carrier comes back
to the barn.

Goes — and Conies Back

Rochelle

. lU.

May 5, 1913. 1

Louden Machin

ery Company,

Fairfield.

Iowa.

Gentlemen;

In regard to my Litter Carrier, whic

h has been

m

daily use for 1 3 nionths now, I can

say it has

been a success

from the start.

It has never failed

to

dump when

reaching trip, nor has it

ever failed

to

come back

to door of b

irn after

dumping.

A

great machine.

M. Su

Ilivan.

Page One hundred sixty-four

bjm iq <t«^ II >r^riuTf5Tfii!i

Combination Steel and Rod Track for Quick-Out
and Self -Acting Carriers

Fig, 1287— Using the Louden Self-Acting Carrier on the
Louden Combination Steel and Rod Track

Specifications
Rigid Track

Made of 14 gauge steel, bent
"C ' shaped to give it great
strength and rigidity. Depth, I 3<j;
inches; width, ^2 inch. Weight
per foot, 1 pound. Hangers of
malleable iron and strap steel.

Rod Track

Made of 0000 basic steel wire.
Diameter i\i2 inches; weight per
foot, 6i< ounces. The rod track
is anchored to a post in the yard
by means of a tension bolt in the
same manner as for our regular
rod track carriers.

Advantages of
Combination Track

Our combination steel and rod
track arrangement has many of
the advantages of both the steel
and the rod track outfits, and
is ideal for small barns where
a carrier of not more than five
bushels capacity is needed.

Fig. 1288

Hanger for

Combination

Track

T

, ••111 , ^°^ track is not satisfac-

tory mside the barn where curves and switches are used. The steel track used in our
combmation track arrangement is more substantial and rigid, and does not subject
the barn timbers to so great a strain as does the rod track.

With the advantages of the steel track in the barn this arrangement
combmes the advantages of the rod track in the yard.

It isn't necessary to follow the loaded carrier into the yard. A strong,
steady shove will send it out from fifty to one hundred feet, where it
dumps automatically at any desired point and returns to the barn by
gravity. This feature saves time, and is especially appreciated in bad
weather, or when the yard is muddy.

The Louden combination track arrangement does not require a special
carrier or special track wheels. Either the Quick-Out Carrier, page 162
or the Self-Acting Carrier, page 163, may be used. If you already have
Fig. 1293 °"^ °^ ^^^^^ carriers installed in your barn with complete rod track
Cross Sec- arrangement, and wish to substitute the combination track, you may
Exact Size <^° ^o without making any change in the carrier.

Construction and Installation of Track

The rigid track is made of 14 gauge steel, bent in the shape of a letter "C." This form gives it
ample strength and rigidity for any load that can be placed in either of the carriers that operate
on it. ^lg. izyi shows a cross section of the track, exact size.

I

Fig. 1289
Cross Section of

Combination
Track and Hanger

Page One hundred sixty-five

Combination Steel and Rod Track— Continued

Fig. 1296
Three-Way Switch for Combination Track

Fig 1297
Two-Way Switch for Combination Track

The track hanger consists of two parts, connected by a short bolt, between which there is an
adjustment of 1 ,' 2 inches to take care of any unevenness in the joists to which the track is hung.
This adjustment is secured by means of a slot (Fig. 1289) in which the connecting bolt may be set
at any point desired. The hanger provides eight inches clearance between track and joists when the
adjustment is at center.

The lower part of the hanger fits inside the track, as shown in Fig. 1289. The support is
immediately beneath the wheels of the carrier; no chance for the track to buckle with a heavy load.
All the hangers required for each section of track are slid into the track from the end before it is
hung. The hangers are small enough to work loosely inside the track, and are easily adjusted.

A wedge-
shaped key
is furnished ^ V%-

hha

Fig. 1290
Brace for Combination Steel and Rod Track

rattling and allows no

shown in Fig. 1291. This prevents
easily removed at any time.

The upper part of the hanger is made of ,'4x1 >^ inch steel,
the track) is made of malleable iion. The hanger is secured to
or screws.

The rod track is connected
to the rigid track just inside
the door opening by means of
a malleable clamp, 7^2 inches
long, and is secured by
bolts, as shown in Fig. 1292.

roreac
ger. When
the hanger
is in place
the key is
dropped into
the track
and driven
under it, as
end play in

Fig. 1291

Showing How Hanger is

Wedged

the track. The keys are

The lower part (which fits inside
the joist by means of four nails

Fig. 1292-

Side Removed To Show How Steel and Rod Tracks Are Joined.
No Chance To Pull Apart

d track. The track is smooth at the point of transfer

Twoof these bolts pass through

the brace shown in Fig. 1 290,

bringing all of the strain from

the wire track on the brace, and not on the rig

and does not jostle the carrier as it passes from the

The brace (Fig. 1290), is 64 inches long, and provic__ - , ■ , r j l l .k

for a rod track. The heavy casting to which it is connected at the lower end is bolted through the
door jamb, as illustrated. It allows 8 inches clearance between the jamb and the track.

The rod track is anchored to a post in the yard as described on page 188.

th€

Steel to the rod track,
ides the most secure anchorage ever

levisec

Page One hundred sixty-six

Louden Double End
Feed Carrier — Fig. 845

Specifications

Operates on Louden Double Bead Steel
Track, Fig. 571. (See pages 175 to 183
for Track and Track Fittings.)

Box is made of wood, reinforced with
strap iron.

Length of box, 76 inches; width, 29
inches; depth, 20 inches, outside meas-
urements. Capacity, 14 bushels. Box
is fitted regularly to raise and lower 7 feet:
may be fitted to raise and lower as much
as 20 feet at slight additional cost.

Track Wheels are roller bearing.

Diameter of Track Wheels, 4 inches.

Clearance necessary for Track Wheels,
5 inches.

Total clearance necessary, 56 inches.

Length of hand chain, 1 1 feet, ends
joined together. Where ceilings are high,
longer chains can be furnished at slight
additional cost.

Shipping weight, 230 pounds.

Fig. 845. (Turbin).

Feed Carriers

There are a great many advantages in having a Feed Carrier. A carrier can be run under the
silo chute or spout from grain bins, and enough feed loaded into the carrier to feed 20 or more cows or
other stock. With a feed carrier operating on an overhead tracit you always have clear right of way, with
no obstructions to hinder or take time in removing. You can run the carrier along the feed alley in
your barn, or out over the feed bunks in the yard, distribute the feed and get through with that part of
the work in less than half the time it would take you otherwise. If you are weighing your feed, attach
your scales to the carrier frame and weigh out the feed as you go along, if you are feeding a balanced
ration, partitions can be placed in the carrier at small extra cost, so two or more kinds of feed can be
handled at the same time.

You will often find it convenient to have your feed track connected by means of switches with the
track for the litter carrier. By doing this you can get your feed carrier to all parts of the stable, through
narrow alleys, and where it would not be possible to operate a truck running on the floor. The tracks
for Louden Feed Carrier and Litter Carrier are the same, and can be connected up to secure any sort of track
arrangement your building may call for.

Louden Double End Feed Carrier

The Louden Double End Feed Carrier is a large carrier, built extra strong for heavy work. Each
end of the carrier has a sloping shovel board, so two men can work at it handy. The carrier is furnished
regular with the Louden Emancipator Worm Gear Hoisting Device. The carrier can be furnished and
used, however, with any type of Louden Hoisting Gear and Trolley. The Emancipator Worm Gear
Hoisting [)evice is the same as that used with the Louden Emancipator Litter Carrier, and is the most
powerful lifting device used with any carrier. One man can easily raise and lower 600 or 800 pounds.
The track wheels being large and roller bearing, the loaded carrier can be pushed along the track with
scarcely an effort. There are no brakes or ratchets to bother with, and absolutely no danger of the
carrier dropping down and smashing.

The Hoisting Device

The Worm Gear Hoisting Device, used with all Louden Carriers, is a marvel of efficiency and
simplicity. The worm castings are riveted solid to the main shaft. These engage the pins or lugs on
the special sprocket or pin-wheel, causing it to revolve. This gives a lifting power at the ratio of 40
to ]. One pound pull on the hand chain will lift 40 pounds in the carrier box. (See Fig.881, page 158.)

Page One hundred sixty-seven

Sprocket Wheel and Chain

The carrier box is supported by chains. These chains operate over the special
sprocket wheels, the surplus winding up on the storage drum. The carrier is
fitted regular with chains 7 feet long. On special orders the carriers can be fitted
with chains permitting the box to be raised and lowered any distance up to
20 feet. The chains are a special electric weld. Each link is true, they fit the
sprocket perfectly, and there is no chance for the chain to slip or for anything
to give way.

Trucks and Wheels

The wheels are 4 inches in diameter at the tread, and are reinforced and
strengthened by heavy webs. The castings supporting the wheel are extra
strong, and are attached to the main frame by heavy knee joint swivels. The
bearing surface of this heavy swiveled joint is 21 inches in diameter. It is the
strongest connection between the main frame and truck castings used on any
carrier. The large track wheels cause the loaded carrier to travel along the track
easily and smoothly. The trucks and wheels on the Double End Feed Carrier
are fitted for Louden Double Bead Steel Track.

The Feed Box

The feed box is made with regular box straps, and the bottom is tongued
and grooved like a wagon box. The corners are bound with iron and the upper
edges have regular wagon box straps. They are well constructed throughout, and
are warranted superior to anything of the kind on the market. The box is
76 inches long, 20 inches deep, 29 inches wide, and will hold 15 to 18 bushels
of feed or grain.

Standard Feed Carrier
Fig. 763

Specifications

Operates on Louden Double Bead Steel Track. Fig.
371. (Seepages I 75 to 183 for Track and Track Fittings.)

Box is made of wood, reinforced with strap iron.

Length of box. 67 inches: width, 29 inches; depth,
20 inches, outside measurements. Capacity, 12
bushels-
Box is fitted to raise and lower 4J^ feet.

Track Wheels are roller bearing.

Diameter of Track Wheels, 4 inches.

Clearance necessary for Track Wheels, 5 inches.

Total clearance necessary, 53 inches.

Length of Hand Chain. 1 I feet, ends joined together.
Shipping weight. 210 pounds.

The Standard Feed Carrier is the same as
the Double End Carrier except the box is built
with shovel board in one end only, and m the
illustration the carrier is shown with a Stand-
ard Hoisting gear the same as with the Standard
Litter Carrier (Fig. 720, page 161). The carrier
can be furnished with any style of hoisting
gear, or for any style of Louden Track. The
carrier is built for long service. The box is made of clear, straight grain, select lumber with heavy, strong
reinforcements. The bails which support the box are made of Axl J i-inch steel straps. In addition to
offering ample strength for carrying heavy loads, these bails provide a stiff support to hold the sides of
the box always in shape. i i •

The carrier illustrated is one of our best sellers and it cannot be recommended too strongly. It is
neat, serviceable, and no better single end carrier has ever been offered.

Construction of Track
Wheels

Each wheel used on our
Steel Track Feed Carriers
is fitted with 1 7 tempered
steel roller bearings. Size
of bearings for steel track
Carriers, i%xl inch. These
revolve around a J^-inch
cold rolled steel axle or
shaft. The ends of the
steel roller bearings work
against our special pat-
ented revolvable washer.
This reduces friction to a
minimum. Also eliminates
excessive wear, prevents
binding or grinding to-
gether of the rollers. The
Louden Trolleys with
roller bearings travel
easily and outlast any
other trolleys of this kind
that are made.

Fig. 763. (Halve).

Page One hundred sixty-eight

■■.li>.'iJfet^itL'M:7

FAI RFl E L D. IOWA

Single End Feed Carrier with
Adjustable Chain — Fig. 886

Specifications

Operates on Louden Double Bead Steel Track,
Fig. 571. (See pages 175 to 183 for Track and Track
Fittings.)

Box is made of wood, reinforced with strap iron.

Length of box, 67 inches; width. 29 inches; depth,
20 inches, outside measurements. Capacity, 12 bushels.

Track Wheels are roller bearing.

Diameter of Track Wheels, 4 inches.

Clearance necessarv for Track Wheels, 5 inches.

Total clearance necessary, 52 inches.

Shipping weight, 1 70 pounds.

Fig. 886 is the same as the Standard Feed
Carrier, except that it is fitted with an adjustable,
rigid frame, instead of the raising and lowering
device, as in some buildings the feed and ensilage
is located so it can be reached handily without
raising and lowering the feed carrier. The box
is supported by chains which permit adjustment
for the high and low ceilings. The rigid frame
carrier operates around curves and switches the
same as the regular carrier and is cheaper.

Fig. 887. (Hoard).

Fig. 886. (Hedge).

Wire Track Feed Carrier — Fig. 887

Specifications

Operates on 0000 Basic Steel Wire Track. (See pages
87-190 for Track and Track Fittings.)

Box is made of wood, reinforced with strap iron.

Length of box, 67 inches; width, 29 inches; depth,

inches, outside measurements. Capacity, 12 bushels.

Track Wheels are roller bearing.

Diameter of Track Wheels, 6 inches.

Clearance necessary for Track Wheels, 6 inches.

Total clearance necessary, 54 inches.

Shipping weight, 1 72 pounds.

Fig. 887 is the same as Fig. 886 except that it
runs on wire track. It will run around our special
curves and over our special switches for wire track
and can be installed for practical work under any
condition where a wire track carrier can be used at
all. We can furnish special Spring End Stops with
latches to catch and hold the carrier at each end,
and the carrier can be operated automatically
reasonable distances between the silo and the stable
or the stable and the feed rooms. This carrier
has the chain supports for the box, permitting
adjustment for high and low tracks.

Louden Machinery Company,

Fairfield, Iowa.
Dear Sirs:

I am more than pleased with the Feed Carrier I bought of you. It does all expected of it sc
carry mill feed and silage for a dairy of seventy cows, and it has never caused a minute's trouble,
labor saver in a dairy.

Yours truly,

Geo. H. Keller,

far. We use it to
I consider it a great

St. Charles, 111.

Page One hundred sixty-nine

Louden Improved Side

Delivery Feed Carrier —

Fig. 1042

Specifications

Operates on Louden Double Bead Steel Track,
Fig. 571. (Page 175). On special orders can be fitted
with any style of Louden Hoisting Gear.

Box made of wood, reinforced with strap iron.

Length of box, 60 inches; width, 31 ,'4 inches;
depth, 21 inches, outside measurements. Capacity,
1 5 bushels.

Track Wheels are roller bearing.

Diameter of Track Wheels. 4 inches.

Clearance necessary for Track Wheels, 5

Total clearance necessary, box upright,
box dumped, 56 inches.

Shipping weight, 2 1 0 pounds.

inches.
53 inches;

FEED

IoudeN/

Patented
Sept. 10, 1907,

and
Dec. 15. 1908.

A side delivery Feed Carrier is, in a number
of respects, more convenient than shoveling
the feed out of the end of the feed box. Where
a large number of stock is to be fed, and it is
practical to run the track close enough to the

troughs or manger to dump directly from " F»g- 1042. (Side)

carrier, the Louden Improved Side Delivery Carrier will prove a great time and labor saver. This
carrier is especially recommended for out door feeding where it is comparatively easy to arrange the
troughs or bunks to accommodate a simple track arrangement.

The gearing is very simple and well arranged and a boy can tip the box when it is full of grain or silage,
and do it as safely and satisfactorily as a man One turn of the crank will tip the box one third way over
as shown in Figure 1044, allowing a part of the feed to empty, and will stay there till crank is given another
turn, throwing the box half over. Three turns and the box is bottom side up, and three more turns will
revolve it all the way around. The crank is pivoted on the end of the axle which carries a small gear that
meshes in the large gear secured to the end of the box, and is provided with a spur which springs into the
pockets in the face of the castings on which it is mounted, holding the feed box in any desired position.

To rotate the box the handle of the crank is
drawn out to release the spur from the pocket.
When the operator lets go of the handle a
spring throws it in as shown in the cuts, and
forces the spur into the nearest pocket.

Like all products bearing the name of
Louden, the Improved Side Delivery Feed
Carrier is the result of years of study. Each
piece of wood and each piece of metal that
goes into its construction is the
the purpose that 1

money can buy.
Louden quality is
evident through-
out. If you feed a
considerable num-
ber of stock, this
carrier will pay for
itself in a short time
by labor and feed
saved.

Improved Side Delivery Carrier,
Adjustable Chain, Emancipator Truck.

Fig. 1044.

Patented October 3, 1916

Fig. 1044-A.

Page One hundred seventy

rrrnmin

TheLOUPEN MACHINERY COMPANY

Louden Feed Truck — Fig. 973

Specifications

Box made of wood, reinforced with strap iron.

20-bushel size: Length of Box, 86 inches; width. 28
inches: depth, 22 inches.

25-bushel size: Length of Box, 86 inches; width. 28
inches; depth, 26 inches.

The Louden Feed Truck, Fig. 973, is furnished

regularly in two sizes, having a capacity of

twenty and twenty-five bushels, respectively. This

is a thoroughly well built piece

of equipment, and is designed ,,. ._. ,„

•i-L ,. J L F'g- 973. (Hove),

to withstand rough usage.

The swiveled small wheels at either end and the large wheels in the
center make the Louden Truck easy to handle. It may be moved
about with little effort, even with a heavy load, and is so balanced
that it can be turned within its own length. The sloping ends of the
box make shoveling the feed out easy.

The body of the truck is removable, see Fig. 1065, and four stakes are
supplied with each, making a very handy piece of equipment.
Fitted with the stakes, it is suitable for handling sacked grain, ground
feed, etc.

Louden Harness Carriers

Fig. 1276— 12-hook Carrier

Specifications

Length of Carrier, 7 feet.

Total clearance necessary (without harness), 38 inches.

Length of hooks (from tip to tip), 24 inches.

Track wheels are roller bearing.

Weight, 63 pounds. »

Fig. 1048 — 4-hook Carrier

Total clearance necessary (without harness), 26 inches.
Length of hooks (from tip to tip), 24 inches.
Track wheels are roller bearing.
Weight, 16 pounds.

Figures 1276 and 1048 illustrate two inexpensive harness carriers. They operate on roller bearing
trolleys like those used in our Emancipator Litter Carrier. The frame and hooks are of tubular steel.

It is desirable in every barn to have a harness room separated from the rest of the barn by solid parti-
tions. The Louden Harness Carrier offers a convenient means of carrying the harness from the horse
stalls to the harness room. The trolleys will operate on the same track as the litter carrier or feed carrier.
Usually a short switch from the main line of the litter carrier track into the harness room
is all the extra track needed in order to install the harness carrier

These carriers will be found handy and convenient in livery barns and in other
stables where a number of horses are kept. In farm barns it has always been
the custom to hang the harness on pegs or holders immediately back of the horses.
The odors and ammonia fumes in stables are one of the greatest
enemies of iron and leather. They attack the iron, causing it tocor-
'rode badly and also cause the leather to rot. If the practice was
followed of carrying the harness into a separate room closed entirely
by means of tight partitions, from the stables where the horses stand,
it would stop one of the big leaks on a farm. There could be no easier
or handier way of carrying the harness from the room than on a
^Louden Harness Carrier, and the expense of installing an outfit of
this kind is so little that it amounts to practically nothing, in com-
parison with the saving effected.

Fig. 1049.

Page One hundred seventy-one

FmtffmmiTTTiTrrTnwfrf

Louden Merchandise Carrier — Fig. 888

Fig 888.
(Gotch).

•^^^
Specifications

Operates on L ouden Double Bead
Steel Track. Fig. 571. (See
pages 175 to 183 for Track
and Track Fittings.)

Length of Carrier, 1 5 inches

Track Wheels are roller bearing.

Diameter of wheels, 4 inches.

Clearance required above track,
5 inches.

Clearance from track to bottom
of hook, 10 inches.

Shipping weight. 22 pounds.

Carrying capacity. 2000 pounds.

The Hoist and Barrel Grabs are
not a part of the Merchandise
Carrier, but are sold separately.

Fig. 888 is our new Merchandise Carrier. This car-
rier is suitable for use in warehouses, storerooms and fac-
tories, for moving heavy packages, such as boxes, barrels,
machinery, or other heavy merchandise. The carrier is
fitted with large track wheels, and heavy truck castings
which make it easy to operate on the track while the strong
swivel joints insure ample strength. It is built for our
Double Bead Steel Track only.

Fig. 889 shows our Merchandise Carrier supporting a
load. The barrel is lifted and held suspended at any height
our Perfect Hoists.

with one of
The hoist can be furnished in differ-
ent sizes with capacity from 400
to 3000 pounds. Either screw eyes
or brackets may be used for support-
ing the track.

Specifications

Perfect Hoist

Two sheaves above and below.

Diameter of sheaves, 4 inches.

Size of rope which may be used, 3 2 inch

to ? 8 inch.
Capacity, 1500 pounds.
One man can lift 500 pounds.
Weight (without rope), II 1-2 pounds.

Note: The Per-
fect Hoist is made
in 8 styles, having
from 400 to 3000
pounds capacity.

Length, 21 inches.
Weight, 63/| pounds

Fig. 890.

Louden Double Truck Merchandise
Carrier — Fig. 890

Specifications

Operates on Louden Double Bead Steel Track, Fig. 571. (See pages 175 to
83 for Track and Track Fittings.)

Length of Carrier. 28 inches.
Diameter of wheels, 4 inches.
Track wheels are roller bearing.
Clearance required above track, 5 inches.
Clearance from track to bottom of hook, 15 inches
Shipping weight. 55^2 pounds.
Carrying capacity, 4000 pounds.

Hoist and Chains are not a part of carrier, but are sold
separately.

Fig. 890 is our Double Truck Merchandise Car-
rier. This is really two of the regular carriers joined
together by a strong connecting bar. It is adapted
for use in marble factories, stone quarries, heavy
machinery factories, nursery warerooms. The trucks
are swiveled, and the carrier can be operated around
short curves and over switches and run to any part of
building.

Page One hundred seventy-two

The LOUDEN MACHINERY COMPANY

Platform Milk Can Carrier— Fig. 802

Fig. 571. (See pages

Fig. 802. (Hank).

Specifications

Operates on Louden Double Bead Steel Track,

175 to 183 for Track and Track Fittings.)
Platform made of wood, bound with angle iron.
Length of platform. 56 inches; width, 14 inches.
Capacity, four railroad milk cans.
Track Wheels are roller bearing.
Diameter of Track Wheels. 4 inches.
Clearance necessary for Track Wheels, 5 inches.
Total clearance necessary. 66 inches.
Shipping weight, 84 pounds.

Fig. 802 is our Platform Milk Can Carrier for use on our
solid steel track of the Double Bead pattern. The carrier
consists of a wooden platform braced across the bottom and
reinforced around the edges with angle iron. The carrier is suspended from swivel trucks the same as
are used with our regular litter carriers and feed carriers by means of a heavy steel frame or bail.
This carrier is built regularly to hold four ordinary railroad milk cans, but can be built in special sizes.

Railroad Milk Can Carrier— Fig. 1045

Specifications

Operates on Louden Double Bead Steel Track, Fig. 571. (Page 175.)

Capacity, three railroad milk cans.

Fitted regularly to raise and lower 7 feet; may be fitted to raise and lower greater

distance at slight additional cost.
Track Wheels are roller bearing.
Diameter of Track Wheels, 4 inches.
Clearance necessary for Track Wheels, 5 inches.
Total clearance necessary, loaded, 54 inches.
Length of Hand Chain. I 1 feet, ends joined together. Where ceilings are high, longer

chain may be furnished at slight additional cost.

This is a convenient, inexpensive device for handling the milk cans at
milking time, and for transporting them from the cow barn to the dairy
building. The carrier can be furnished with either Standard or Emancipator gear (Emancipator gear illus-
trated) to operate on Louden Double Bead Steel Track. With one of these gears the cans can be lowered to
within a few inches of the floor and operated from one end of the building to the other. This keeps the cans
up out of the dirt and at the same time within easy reach of the milkers. The carrier may be operated
on the regular Litter or Feed Carrier tracks. It is built to handle three railroad milk cans.

Wire Track Milk Can Carrier — Fig. 766

Specifications

Operates on 0000 Basic Steel Wire Track. (See pages 187 to 190 for Track and

Track Fittings.)
Platform made of wood, reinforced by 2x4 supports underneath.
Length of platform, 42 inches; width, 16 inches.
Capacity, three railroad milk cans.
Track Wheels are roller bearing.
Diameter of Track Wheels, 6 inches.
Clearance necessary for Track Wheels, 6 inches.
Total clearance necessary, 56 inches.
Shipping weight, 733 2 pounds.

Fig. 766 is our Platform Milk Can Carrier to run on wire track.

It carries three large railroad cans. It is fitted with the swivel trucks

the same as our wire track litter carriers, and can be operated over c- -rcc

. , J J •^ hig. 7bb.

switches and around curves.

By using our special Spring End Stops with latch to catch and hold the carrier and which we furnish on

special orders, the man in the barn can safely send thirty gallons of milk to the milk house one hundred

feet or more away. The latch will catch and hold the carrier until unloaded. The man at the milk

house can take charge of the milk, unlock the latch and by a little push send the carrier back to the barn.

(Burlington).

(Hark).

Page One hundred seventy-three

^J^in^'?"^^^-*-^^^*^'**-'*^'^'^

Suspended Milk Can Carrier — Fig. 767

Specifications

Operates on 0000 Basic Steel Wire Track. (See pages 187 to 190 for

Track and Track Fittings.)
Capacity, five hand milk or cream cans.
Track Wheels are roller bearing.
Diameter of Track Wheels, 6 inches.
Clearance necessary for Track Wheels. 6 inches.
Total clearance necessary, loaded, 50 inches.
Shipping weight, 45)2 pounds.

Fig. 767 is our Suspended Milk Can Carrier for carrying
five hand milk or cream cans. The hooks for attaching the
cans to the carrier go with the carrier. This carrier is also
fitted with the swivel wheels to run over curves and switches.
We can furnish this carrier with trucks to run on our solid steel
track when desired.

767. (Harper)
Patented
Oct. 6, 1908

■^atii

n

Fig.

Railroad Milk Can Carrier for Wire
Track — Fig. 1046

Specifications

Operates on 0000 Basic Steel Wire Track. (See pages 187 to 190 for

Track and Track Fittings.)
Capacity, three railroad milk cans.
Fitted regularly to raise and lower 3J^ feet.
Track Wheels are roller bearing.
Diameter of Track Wheels, 6 inches.
Clearance necessary for Track Wheels. 6 inches.
Total clearance necessary, loaded, 50 inches.
Length of hand chain, S'-i feet, ends joined together.
Shipping weight, 60 pounds.

1046. (Pacific)
Patented
May 9, 1911

This carrier operates on the same principle as the regular Railroad Milk Can Carrier, Fig. 1045. It
has a different gear, however, built to run on wire track. It will handle three railroad milk cans.
The cans can be raised and lowered for convenience at milking time, and for lifting in and out of
cooling tanks. This carrier is often used where the dairy building stands some distance from the cow
barn, wire track being stretched between the buildings. The track may also be continued to the inside
of the cow barn, and the cans kept in the place most convenient for the milkers.

Louden Platform Hay Carrier — Fig. 809

Specifications

(See pages

Operates on Louden Double Bead Steel Track, Fig. 57
175 to 183 for track and track fittings.)

Platform made of wood, reinforced by 2x4 supports underneath.

Length of platform, 72 inches: width, 30 inches.

Track Wheels are roller bearing.

Diameter of Track Wheels, 4 inches.

Clearance necessary for track wheels, 5 inches.

Total clearance necessary, 68 inches.

Weight, 130 pounds.

Fig. 809 shows a Platform Hay Carrier for conveying
either loose or baled hay into the feed alleys. The carrier
consists of a wood platform supported by means of a steel
bail or frame from the trolleys. On each side of the carrier
there is a special tubular shaft, into which are fitted steel

teeth. These teeth can be folded down to lie flat on the platform, and the carrier may be used for
handling baled hay, milk cans, etc. When hauling hay the steel teeth are opened outward as shown
in the illustration. A very large bunch of loose hay may be handled with this carrier.

Fig. 809. (Troy).

Page One hundred (eventy-four

P^rt^ 9^t} n ijjciu h\¥ ; I iTran

Steel Track, Track Hangers, Rafter Brackets, Etc.

Louden tracks are made of the finest and strongest
high carbon steel and are especially adapted to
carrying heavy loads. The shape of Louden track
eliminates all unnecessary friction, and much less
power is necessary to operate a car than with the
ordinary, cheaply constructed track. A thin, flat
sided track will buckle over or become wavy, carrying
half the load that Louden track will carry with ease.

Fig. 571. (Clara).

No. 2.

Fig. 832. iTrout).
Patented
Sept, 1. 1908

Fig. 1066.

Figure 571 is our Double Bead steel track. Number 2 is an end view. This track weighs 2 pounds
to the foot. Width of track 2 inches; height, 1 ^^ inches.

Figure 832 is our link track hanger which we furnish in assorted odd
inch lengths up to 6! inches. Link track hangers at least 5 inches in
length should always be specified with Steel Track Litter Carriers.
Longer lengths may be specified where track passes under beams.
Five-inch length track hanger, weight per dozen, 73-2 pounds.

Figure 1066 is our Adjustable Link Track Hanger. Handy for use
where joists are uneven. Weight (5-inch length) per dozen, Sj/^ pounds.

In specifying Link Track Hangers for Steel Track Carriers to permit
track to pass under the girder or beams, the hanger should be 3 inches
longer than the thickness of the timber under which the track is to pass.
Example — For an 8-inch timber an I I -inch link hanger would be
neccessary.

Figure 424 is our Standard Rafter Bracket.
This is the bracket to order for the litter carrier
track where the track is supported from joists or
beams running at right angles to the track. Weight
per dozen, 43^2 pounds.

Figure 465 is our Ridge Pole Bracket which
is used when the track is hung parallel to a joist "^

or other 2-inch timber. Weight per dozen, 3
pounds.

Figure 675 is our Side Rafter Bracket, used
where track is supported from sloping rafter
running at right angles to the track. Weight
per dozen, 53^ pounds.

Figure 725 is our Side Beam Bracket for
hanging track to a timber running parallel with
the track. Weight per dozen, 6 pounds.

465. (Cubeb).

Fig. 424. (Casper).

Fig. 725. (Beam).

Fig. 675. (Cute).

Fig> 523. Junior, (Cage).

Figure 726 is a Screw Eye used for supporting
the track under ceilings, or this Screw Eye may
be substituted anywhere for the brackets
if preferred. Weight per dozen, 6 pounds.

Figure 523 is an end stop block to clamp
on the end of track to prevent carrier from
running off the open rail. Weight, % pound.

Fig. 726, (Eli).

Page One hundred teventy-fiva

frnirrrrifTlTTiTmfTmTTrlTl

^^in't*)"^^'*-*-^^*^'**-*'*'^!^

^Sjy^^*^ FAIRFIELD. I OWA ^j\'!>^^

Outside Track Supports — Fig. 1277

Where the practice is followed of hauling manure to the field as fast as made
arrangement as shown in the accompanying illustration is handy and eliminates
posts in the yard. The track is bracketed to the end of the barn far
enough out to permit the manure to be dropped into the spreader or
wagon. No switches are necessary and the arrangement is strong
and neat looking. We furnish all of the metal parts as

shown in the detailed view. Fig. 1277-A except the track

and track hangers.

\l/here desired wood brackets may
used for supporting track at the end
barn ana in which case all material

be
of

would be arranged for on
y the ground.

Fig. 1277-A

Specifications

Main frame or rail
which supports the track
1 ,'8-inch steel tubing.
Braces holding same from
the wall I ■"' s - inch _ steel
tubing 3 feet 9 inches
long.

Fig. 1278.

Supporting straps Jixl inch steel, 6 feet long.

Connections are of malleable iron. Upper end of supporting straps are fastened by means ot lag screws,
end of straps attach to main rail by means of special clamp holders.

Heel of brace is held in place with wall flanges secured by lag screws.

Lower

Page One hundred seventy-eight

FAIRFIELD. I 0>

Steel Support for Yard Track —
Fig. 1279

Specifications

Standard lengths of post. 8, 10. 12. 14 and 16 ft.

Diameter of post 4' i inches, outside diameter.

Length of upper horizontal arm, 36 inches.

Length of brace. 44 inches.

Diameter of arm and brace, 1 1/% inches.

All connections are of malleable iron.

Fig. 1279 shows the best method of supporting litter carrier or
milk can carrier track in the yard. A steel post is used, with
strongly braced tubular steel arm. A 2x8 wood beam is hung
beneath the supporting arm, and the track is attached to it in the
same manner as in the barn.

Fig. I279-A shows in detail the method of attaching beam to
supporting arm.

|/''^/frn<T""^| The posts should be

set in concrete to
make them rigid.
This makes a perma-
nent support that will
not be affected by
"soft" weather and
that cannot be pushed
out of line or broken.

■■!-ri-

te/v-i

*t.

Fig. 1279-A

Fig. 1295 shows two good methods of supporting the track
in the yard by means of wood posts. The posts should be set
in conciete to make them rigid and to prevent rotting off.

'■',\

When a single post is used it should be well anchored by
means of a guy rod or wire to offset the unbalanced strain
r'?>?r?r! put upon it by running a heavy load over the track. No
anchor is necessary when two posts are used.

1 U'

Fig. 1295 — Two Good Methods of Supporting
Track in Yard By Means of Wood Posts.

Any kind of wood posts may be used, but the steel posts are
better and more lasting.

In hanging a track to joists it is

Fig. 576.

sometimes necessary to run under beams "B". To do so spike

a 2-inch piece "D" to the joist "J" so as to come

down even with the lower edge of beam "B". When
the track runs lengthwise with the joist nail a
ridge pole bracket to lower end of the drop
piece "D" and attach the track hanger to this, as
shown in Figure 576. When the track runs crosswise
of the joist use a regular bracket as shown in Figure
577. In place of the drop "D" a screw eye and link
hanger can be used, as shown in Figure 578. The
link hangers should be about three inches longer than
Fig. 578. the depth of beam.

Page One hundred ceventy-nin*

Pat'd

Nov. 17, 1903

June 23, 1908

Two-Way Switch

Two-Way Switch for Louden Steel
Track

Length of Mounting Block, 38 inches.
Width of Mounting BlocK, 15 inches.
Distance from top of block to bottom

of track, 10 in.
Weight, 29 pounds.

Louden Track Switches

Louden Track Switches are the easiest operated, strongest and altogether
the most satisfactory on the market. When the switch cord is
pulled, the track is thrown into the desired position, and an auto-
matic safety catch makes it impossible for a car to run off the track.
\ Switches can be furnished unmounted on special orders, but

mounted switches are recommended as they are much easier
to install.

Fig. 849 shows our Cross Track Switch mounted
on a board ready to attach to ceiling. It is
often necessary or convenient to have two
tracks cross at right angles. The
central section of the cross track switch
is thrown into position for either track
as desired by pulling on the cords. The
guards work automatically, dropping
in place to guard the open rail and
elevating to clear the carrier wheels
when the central track is in place.

Switches take 2 feet of space in track.
Switches should never be placed in door-
way, especially when sliding doors are
used.

Fig. 736. Jur

This can nearly always be avoided by reversing
the switch inside the building and making
the side line to the main line.

The illustration at right shows a Three-
switch mounted on plank "B" ready to
attach to the joist or ceiling of building.
The Switch "S" is hinged to the main
track "A" at "H." By pulling on the
cords "C" and "D" the switch or hinged
section will slide on the plate "E" and
change from one track to the other, so that

Two-Way. (Cat)

Junior, f Acorn).
Pat'd Mar. 12, 1912
Cross Track Switch for Louden Steel Track
Length of Mounting Block, 24 inches. Width, 12 inches.

Fig. 795. Three-Way Switch. (Caboose).

Three-Way Switch for Louden Steel Track

Length of Mounting Block. 38 inches.

Width of Mounting Block. 13 inches.

Distance from top of block to bottom of track, 10 in.

Weight, 31 pounds.

the operator can use any one of the three tracks
at will. The hinged track "S" is locked in
place by latch "F." It can be operated from
below no matter how high the track may be
hung. A guard "G" which works automat-
ically, is used to prevent carrier from running
off track, should switch be left open. We
furnish the switches Two-Way or Three-Way,
and as many tracks or switches as are neces-
sary can be used. The track can be run to
any part of the barn.

Disteince from top of Block to bottom of track.
Weight. 28 pounds.

10 inches.

Page One hundred eighty-one

FAlRriELD. IOWA

Track Brace

Standard length of brace 2 feet. Brace is made of 5^ x I -inch steel. Clamp is of malle-
able iron.

Where extremely long link track hangers are used to permit track to be
hung under beams or in suspending track from a very high ceiling, it is
sometimes necessary to brace the track at the ends to prevent the track
from swinging endwise and from creeping. Fig. 1209 shows two views of the
Clamp and Brace attached to a link track hanger. The brace can be placed
in any position, one end being clamped to the hanger and the other end
attached to any convenient timber or wall where it can be secured with a
lag screw or bolt. This brace is also used to prevent sidewise swinging
of the track.

Track Opener For
Sliding Doors— Fig. 859

Specifications
Louden Automatic Track Opener

Fig. 859.
Includes section of Track, Splice Clamp,
two Special Rigid Hangers, two special Straps
for supporting timber and Operating Bar
for attaching to door.
Length, 46J| inches.
Weight, 13}^ pounds.

Fig. 1209.

Fig. 859. Junior. (GaitJ.

Patented Nov. 13. 1909

Louden Track Openers are for use on sliding doors through which Litter and Feed Carriers pass. This
device automatically opens a way through the track so the door may be opened or closed without a
moment's delay. (See illustration Fig. 860.) A bar "T." having its ends downwardly inclined, slips
under and lifts the section "S" when the door is closed. When the door is open the section "S" drops
into place joining the two ends of the track, making the track continuous, ready for the earner to pass
over. (See illustration Fig. 859.) By having both ends of the bar "T" downwardly inclined it may
be set at either edge of the door and will open the track from either side.

Special rigid hangers "H" and
"J" are required to hold the adjoin-
ing ends of the track "A" and "B"
in position so the section "S" v/ill
always drop into its place without
missing, and so the bar "T" will
always lift it instead of pushing it to
one side; also special straps "1, "bent
at an angle to fit the side of the barn
and the sides of the timber "E" and
hold it clear of the door hanger and
low enough to attach the hanger "H."
When the door is hung on the inside
of the barn, the section "S" is hinged
to the track "A" and the support
"C" is secured to the track "B."
This is a simple device, is easily fitted up and works perfectly. The outfit consists of the opener
"T" with brackets to attach to the door, hangers "H" and "J," the section "S" with its hinged con-
nection, the support "C" and the straps "I."

tig. 860.

Page One hundred eighty-two

^S^y^-^ FAIR TIE LP. lOWA^jyi^S

Track Curves.
Fig. 639. (Grade).

Curved Track

Figure 639 is a diagram for measuring a track around curves.
Where a 6-foot Right Angle Curve "C" is used, it will make up for
approximately 4 feet of straight track on each side from "A" to "B," or
about 8 feet in all. When an 8-foot curve is used, it will make approx-
imately 5 feet on each side, or 10 feet in all. Generally a 6-foot curve
is long enough to turn a square corner.

Track Through
Swinging Doors

Where the track is to pass through swinging door a nice way to
arrange the door is as illustrated in Fig. 1208. The top of the door is
sawed off and the space on each side of the track under the door jamb
is built down to meet the door.

Another plan would be to place a hinged section on the top of the
door. This could be dropped down when necessary to open the door.
When the door is closed the hinged section on top of the door could be
hooked up into place, fitting neatly around the track.

Removable Section For
Sliding Doors — Fig. 633

A--

633. (Craft).
Louden Removable Section.

piece firmly in place, but
it can be easily lifted
out to allow the door to shut, or be replaced when the carrier is to be used.
"J" is a joist; "B" the brackets; "1" the hangers; "A" the track;
"E" the ridge pole; "H" ridge pole brackets, and "G" a wall bracket
to fasten ridge pole to barn. Where the door opening is too low for the
track to run out level from the joists and a swinging door is used, it may
be arranged as shown in Fig. 643. Removable sections are made in two
and four foot lengths.

Fig. 1208.

Where the track passes through a door, a removable
section "L," Fig. 633, may be used instead of the track
opener described above. This is furnished with special
splice clamps that bolt to the ends of the adjoining
track sections "M. M." These clamps hold the loose

v^wJSm^y.

B

X

T

B

m

DOOR OPENINQ
Fig. 643.

Louden Machinery Company, Dec. II. I9I4.

Fairfield, Iowa.
Gentlemen:

In reply to your inquiry we wish to say that we began using your Overhead Track and carriers some five or six years
ago and at the present time we have had about one-third of a mile of the iron track in use on our farm. We use it
for carrying feed and grain and also for the manure carriers. The Track has given perfect satisfaction, as have the
Feed Carrieis. and we think the Manure Carriers are as good as can be had.

You also made for us a large Milk Vat that runs on a carrier and in which we carry the skimmed milk to the calves.
This has been of much help to us.

Wishing you continued success, we remain.

Sincerely yours.

The Maplecrest Stock Farm Co.;

Kalamazoo, Mich.

Page One hundred eighty-three

Louden Swinging Steel Crane

Specifications

Main Boom made of 2 ? g inch O. D. steel tubing.
Cranes 30 feet long or over are side trussed.
Cranes less tfian 30 feet long are not side trussed.
Truss Rods made of I ,'t-inch O. D. steel tubing.

Truss Stays made of 1 fj-inch O. D. steel tubing.
Guy Wires made of 0000 basic steel wire.
Vertebra hinge of refined malleable iron.

lbs

Weight of 12-ft. Crane complete.

Fig. 974 with track. 114

•■ 22

" 976 •• •• 192

•■ 30

•• 978 •■ " 348

" 40

■• 980 •■ •■ 472

(NOTE: A Crane of any length up to 40 feet is practical that does not exceed in number of feet the distance from the
point where the base of the Crane is to set to the plate on which the rafters rest, multiplied by 2 ' o- 't is well to
remember that there is the same inward pressure at the base of a Crane as outward pull where the guys are attached. This
pressure and pull, however, comes at the barn's strongest points — the mow floor and the rafter plate, and a little
bracing is all that is necessary to neutralize the strain on the end of the barn. See Figure 1067. page 186.

In erecting Crane see that the longest guy wire carries enough of the weight to pull it taut, intermediate guy wires may
be slightly slack but the guy reaching to the end of the Crane should always be taut.)

A Louden Swinging Steel Crane is attached to the barn above the door in Hne with the Litter Carrier
track, and extends out over the yard for a distance of 1 2 to 40 feet without posts or supports of any kind
in the yard being necessary.

The use of the Swinging Crane not only makes unnecessary all posts and supports in the yard, but
gives a far greater area in which manure may be dumped as the Crane may be swung around from left to
right till it strikes the sides of the barn. To all practical purposes a Swinging Crane of 30-foot length
gives a dumping area as great as a straight, rigid track running out a couple of hundred feet from the barn
door. To empty the Litter Carrier direct into wagon or spreader, all that is necessary is to drive to any
point within the Crane's radius.

The Swinging Crane is also a great convenience where litter is to be dumped on the opposite side of a
yard fence or down a hillside from the barn, and, as it may be swung around close up against the barn
when not in use, is entirely out of the way of passing stock or wagons.

Page One hundred eighty-fiva

Fig. 1062.

The Louden Crane is built regularly In
lengths of 12 feet, 22 feet, 30 feet and 40 feet.
Each Crane will carry many times any prac-
tical load. In factory test a 40 -foot Crane
was operated with a 1,500 pound weight at
extreme end. It is absolutely guaranteed to
handle 1 ,000 pound loads. For very heavy
loads, however, care should be taken to see that
the timbers of the barn, to which the Crane is
anchored, are strong and well braced.

Construction

The Louden Swinging Steel Crane is guar-
anteed to be the strongest and most substan-
tial Crane for Litter and Feed Carriers on the
market. All Louden cranes 30 feet long or
over, are side trussed. This is the only Crane
made that is side trussed with tubular steel
(see Fig. 1067). It is built on the same scientific principle employed in steel bridges, and is 50 per cent
stronger than a more cheaply constructed wire trussed Crane. It is absolutely impossible for it to buckle
under the heaviest load, as the tubular steel truss will handle an enormous back pressure.

Cranes under 30 feet in length are
not side trussed.

Figure 1062 shows the construc-
tion of the Crane at doorway.
A special malleable iron vertebrae
hinge made in our own factory in-
sures the free, easy, and steady move-
ment of the Crane. It will handle
double the load that it will ever
be called upon to handle.

Where swinging crane passes
through sliding door and this hinge
is used, the door should be made
double. Doors can then be notched
to fit closely around the hinge as
shown in Fig. 1062. The type of
hinge used is the best for the
purpose.

Swinging Track at Door — Fig. 791

Specificatiotis

One set of fittings consists of malleable hinge
and bolts for attaching to barn, steel supporting
rods and special clamps and fixtures for connect-
ing to track at outer end.

In instances where the litter carrier
track extends out of the barn at the end
where the hay is taken up, it is some-
times desirable to have a section of track
which will swing around out of the way
or lift out. This plan is shown in
Fig. 791.

Please remember that we have a
solution for any problem that may come
up in the installation of our goods.

Fig. 791.

Page One hundred eighty-six

Fixtures for Louden Wire Track Litter Carriers

The Track

The track is made of the finest grade of Basic Steel Wire and is manufactured expressly for us. Its
tensile strength is remarkable, and while it makes a good spring it will bend double twice without
breaking. We furnish the standard size. No. 0000 which is amply strong for all work. This size is
13-32-inch in diameter and runs 27 inches to the pound. The track can be run 100
feet or more without center supports (see Figure 1068, next page).

When longer lengths are required additional supports may be used by means of
our Patent Spring Suspender, as shown in Figure 746, which supports the wire
and permits the carrier to run past the post. The body of the suspender is of
inch pipe fitted with a strong spring 10 inches long which supports the track
and at the same time makes it flexible to suit the weight of the load and to let the
carrier run easily over it.

A similar suspender made shorter may be used in connection with a pulley, as
shown by Figure 747, to raise and lower the track in the stable as may be desirable,
and to assist the loaded carrier to run out and the empty carrier to return. The
outer end of the track should be set 15 to 18 inches higher by the level than
the end in the barn for each 100 feet long. The cut shows the tension bolt passed
through the wall below the sill to facilitate the raising and lowering of the track.
Otherwise it should be passed through the sill. Common pulleys and hooks may
be used to hold up the suspender. When a tackle block hoist is specified, extra
charge is made.

Fig. 746. (Horizon)

Specifications

Patent Spring
Suspender.

Length, 17' 2 inches.
Weight, 4I4 pounds.

Sometimes it is necessary to run
one end of the track to one side of a
straight line. This we do by means
of our Angle Iron, as shown in
Figure 750. The curved end of the
iron has a groove in which the wire
fits and the other end is held by a
guy secured to a post or otherwise,
so as to hold the track in proper
position. The guy should be of
sufficient length to freely raise and
lower with the track. The carrier
wheels will readily pass over the

I U

Fig. 747. Louden Tackle Block Suspender.

(Including pulley.)

Specifications

Weight, 6j 2 pounds.

Wire Track to Two Barnsi

curved end of the iron. We make two sizes, one
20 and the other a 35 degree curve.

Roy L. Moyer of Maroa, Illinois,
who has been using a Louden Litter
Carrier says:

"The Louden Litter Carrier outfit
that I purchased of you is all that you
claim for it. This
outfit has been in
use now about two
years and carries
litter without any
bother. Before in-
stalling this outfit
the boys were a
little careless about
keeping the barn Fig. 750.

cleaned out, but Angle Iron for
now with the Wire Track.
Carrier, we nave a r. -c «.•

clean barn all the bpeClhcatlOns
time." Weight, 2 pounds.

Page One hundred eighty-seven

Anchoring Louden Wire
Track

The anchoring of the track is an important
matter. If it is securely anchored it is surprising
what loads it will carry, but if not securely
anchored, it will sag and get out of shape and
cannot do good work. The post must be
securely set in the ground. The other end of
the track will most probably be anchored to the
sill of the barn and the post should be made as
solid as the sill.

A large flat stone or a good broad plank
should be placed below the end of the post (see
Figure 745). Unless the ground is as solid as a
rock it will not stand the pressure of the post
and it will settle, and keep settling every time
the track is tightened. The next thing is to
place a log or timber 8 to 10 inches, or more, in diameter and 5
the ground. Our anchor bolts "A" are ^-inch in diameter by

Wire Track Anchor

to 6 feet long, not less than 4 feet in
6 feet long. They will stand a strain
of at least 8 to 10 tons, and the log should be solid enough to stand that also.

Our anchoring device has no equal. It reaches clear to the top of the post, a heavy cross pin being
used to prevent the loop "X" from slipping down on the tension bolt "T." The anchor bolt, which
goes through the log, has a long threaded end above the ground (not below where it is of no use) and is
arranged with a yoke "Y," so the anchor can be tightened as may be necessary to hold the post in
proper position. We can use both the tension bolt and the anchor bolt to tighten up the track, whereas
others can use the tension only. Extra heavy wire is used in our anchor to insure ample strength.

Another important precaution is to set the post slanting as shown in Figure 745. If set straight it
will be much harder on the anchor wire than
on the track wire. It is the anchor wire which
generally gives way. If there is room, the longer
the guy wires are the better. Also be sure the
anchor wire is in direct lines with the track wire.

When you buy an article bearing the name
Louden you may be sure that it is the best,
and when a method of installation is recom-
mended you may be sure that our recom-
mendations are based upon actual tests. That
is why Louden goods are known in every
civilized country of the world.

Louden Tension Bolt
Fig. 1207

Louden Tension Bolts are made
steel. They are furnished in
sizes 54 X 30 inches, ^4 x I 5

of

three

inches and J8x30 inches. The
heavy bolt should be used for ex-
treme long lengths of tracks or
where the work is very heavy. The
bolts have heavy deep threads and
will not strip. Each Tension Bolt
is furnished with large hexagon nut
and washer. The 5^x30 inch bolt
will always be furnished unless
otherwise specified.

Fig. 1207.

Fig. 1068.

Page One hundred eighty-eighf'

^~'WjC^ fairfiejld. IOWA '■^TSi'^ ^^*^i^^i&

Louden Wire Track Switches

Fig. 892.

(Hurrah).
Patented Oct. 6, 1908

Specifications

Length, 72 inches.
Weight, 5^4 pounds.

Fig. 893.

We have the most perfect switches ever devised for a wire track. They are made of pipe ("C" and
"D") slotted on the lower side to fit over the wires and are held securely in place by specially fitted
keys "E," which are readily driven in or out without kinking, or otherwise injuring the wire. The
switches can be easily and quickly placed or removed and will run in both directions so as to form a
Three- Way switch.

Figure 892 shows the switches set for carrier to pass from the main line "A" to the left hand line "B."

Figure 893 shows switches set for carrier to pass onto the right hand side line "B." To change the
carrier to the opposite side, the wheels must be lifted from the track and swiveled around so the castings
supporting the wheels will be on the same side of the main wire as the switch that is being used. This
is easily and quickly done by lifting the entire carriage, one end at a time, and setting the wheel on the
opposite side of the wire.

The switches are interchangeable and one switch instead of two may be used, changing the switch
from side to side. Where it is desired to use the main line "A" and pass under the cross line "B," place
the end of both switches in the hook "H" and remove the cross track
holder. The sag of the main track "A" will easily let the carrier
wheels pass under the cross track "B."

When two tracks cross and switches are used something is needed

to hold the tracks together. This we accomplish by means of cross

track holder, Figure 749. It is hooked on the wire "B" so the point

"P" will pass under the wire "A" and then over the wire "B" on the

opposite side. It is held in place by pressing the hook "C" up over ^ -r i u u r-. ,.« ... . ^
the wire "A." .- t- = t- Cross Track Holder. Fig. 749. (Hopple).

There is more strength and less friction in the Louden wire track Specifications

switches than any others, and they are the easiest and quickest to
change from one position to another.

Weight, 14 pound.

Oconomowoc, Wis.

Louden Machinery Company, Fairfield, Iowa.
Dear Sirs:

Three years ago we had one of your carriers installed. Today I wouldn't have it taken out for five times what
it cost. It is as good as new and has never cost us one cent for repairs. Can feed twenty-five head of cattle with one
filling of carrier. We have had the stanchions, calf pen, bull pen and one box stall for two years and we are perfectly
satisfied with them. Yours truly.

Miller Bros.

Page One hundred eighty-nine

ThpT^OUDEN MACHINERY COMPANY

Louden Wire Track Reverse Curve

Fig. 797. (Tense.)
Patented Mar. 31, 1908

Specifications

Length, 41 inches.
Weight, 20 pounds

By the use of our reverse curves and
switches the Wire Track Litter Carriers
may be run around either inside or out-
side curves. Figure 797 shows our re-
verse curve as it appears when used inside
of building, where it is attached to and
supported by the joists or ceiHng.

Sundry Wire Attachments

Fig. 753. (Hurl.)

Spring End Stop.
Distance from bottom of spring to
track, 16 inches.

Weight, 4 pounds.

Fig. 755.

Specifications

Anchor Loop.

Length, 14 inches
Weight, 2 pounds.

(Hone.)

Improved Clamp Loop.

Weight, ^4 f>ound.

Fig. 756.

Anchor Yoke.

Length, 20 inches.
Weight, 438 pounds.

Figure 753 is a detail view of our Patent Spring End Stop, the most complete device of the kind ever
invented. It is composed of two malleable iron pieces bolted together so as to slide freely on the track,
and connected to a special spring as shown. The wheel yokes of the carrier straddle the pointed ends
of these pieces and cannot run off. The spring eases off the momentum of the carrier and starts it back
on its return trip. The spring and the pieces "A" can be easily removed from or replaced upon the track.

Figure 755 is a detailed view of our Improved Anchor Loop which goes over the top of the post as in
Figures 745 and 1068 (page 188). It is made of 0000 wire, the same as the track, and will stand any strain
that can be put upon it. Figure 756 is our Patent Anchor Yoke with malleable casting for anchor bolt,
as shown in Figures 1068 and 745. It will stand a tremendous strain. Anchor Loop, Figure 755 and
Anchor Yoke, Figure 756 are included with the Complete Anchor, Figure 745, page 188.

Figure 757 shows different ways of looping the track and guy wires. The upper is the common way
of twisting the wire around itself. The lower is our Improved Clamp Loop. The first is good enough
for a moderate strain, or where the wire is double, as in our anchor loops or anchor yokes; but when
there is only a single loop the Clamp is much stronger and better, as well as easier made and attached
and detached. All that is necessary is to remove the bolts which hold the clamps, and it can be hooked
into an eye, which cannot be done with a twisted loop.

Kootenai, Idaho.

Louden Machinery Company, Fairfield, Iowa.

Gentlemen: j l u I ( I

I have used your Stanchions and Manure Carriers since last fall and am wrell pleased with them. In fact. 1
don't know how 1 got along without them before. The manure I notice is far better this spring. The horse manure
used to burn in the pile, and now 1 get it mixed with the cow manure and it improves them both.

Respectfully yours.

Matt Schmitt.

Page One hundred ninety

Plans for Installation

Plan No. 1.

We show here a few plans to illustrate some of the many ways in which Louden Carriers can be
made to meet any plan, no matter what the seeming difficulties. The plans mean nothing so far as size
and shape of buildings are concerned and the length and width are given that you may understand
how to figure the number of feet of track and the number of other fixtures required.

Plan No. I shows a straight run of solid steel track extending from the rear of the building 30 feet
out in the yard. For this arrangement the following would be required:

Figure Page

70 ft. Double Bead Steel Track 571 173

24 Link Track Hangers (3-inch length) 832 1 73

14 Rafter Brackets 'B" 424 173

10 Ridge Pole Brackets "M" 465 173

1 Automatic Track Opener 859 1 82

2 End Stop Blocks "ES" 523 173

I Emancipator Litter Carrier 828 1 37

In all of the plans where the Automatic Track Opener, Figure
Section, Figure 633, page 1 83, may be substituted if desired.

859, is specified, the Removable

Joists are usually 18 inches on center. We recommend a supporting hanger and bracket every other
joist or every 3 feet for the Double Bead steel. If the joists are 24 inches on center it would be well
to use a hanger on every joist, as four feet is rather too wide a space between hangers, especially if
the work is to be heavy.

Page One hundred ninety-one

Thp LOUDEN MACHINERY COMPANY

Plans for Installation — Continued

Plan No. 2.

Plan No. 2 shows the same plan as No. 1 but equipped with our wire track Litter Carrier System.
This illustrates the use of the Self-Acting Carriers which can be loaded at any point along the track,
given a push and they will run out and empty at the trip "D," strike the spring "G," and return
to the building. For this plan the following would be required:

Self-Acting Carrier

Figure Page

1 Self-Acting Litter Carrier 721 163

70 ft. 0000 Basic Steel Wire Top of 187

2 Tension Bolts. ''4 x 30 "T" 1207 188

1 Wire Track Anchor "Q" 745 188

1 Patent End Stop "G" 753 190

2 Loop Clamps "L" 757 190

One trip "D" is furnished free with each wire track Litter Carrier. Where two or more tracks
are used or the carrier is to be unloaded at two different points extra trips "D" should be specified.

£^

^■^.

Plan No. 3.

Plan No. 3 shows a barn with a stable on each side and a solid steel track for litter carrier in each
stable. One track runs in a straight hne 40 feet out into the yard. The other track, after passing
through the door, is curved and carried along the end of building, another curve is used before it joins
on the switch and joined onto the straight track with a two-way switch.

Note. — When track runs at right angles to joists. Rafter Brackets, Figure 424, page 175, are used.
When the track runs parallel with and is supported under a 2-inch joist or other timber the Ridge Pole
Bracket, Figure 465, page 175, should be specified. Screw Eyes are used for smooth ceilings and may
also be substituted for the brackets whenever desired.

Page One hundred ninety-two

trrrmTOrmmr:

i\n>W§:fjeM^iWi

Plans for Installation — Continued

Plan No. 5.

Plan No. 5 shows a building with three tracks inside joined together by a three-way switch near the
door and a single track continuing 40 feet out into the yard. For an arrangement cf this kind the
following items would be necessary:

Emancipator Carrier

216

4

Figure

ft. Double Bead Steel Track 571

Bent Sections "C" for Curves 639

80 Link Track Hangers (3-inch) 832

56 Rafter Brackets "B" 424

24 Ridge Pole Brackets "H" 465

1 Three-Way Switch "S" 795

1 Automatic Track Opener 859

4 End Stop Blocks 523

1 Emancipator Litter Carrier 828

Page

175
183
175
175
175
181
182
175
157

If the arrangement of the building does not permit placing the switch inside, the three tracks may
be joined on the outside by supporting the two side lines along the end of the building as shown in plan
No. 3, page 192. If desired, one of the side lines of track can be run straight out from the building and
the tracks connected by the use of two Two-Way Switches instead of one Three-Way Switch.

-^^

Plan No. 7.

Plan No. 7 shows an arrangement for solid steel track in a building with a double row of stalls and
all of the litter to pass out at one door. At the rear of the building the track is curved, crosses the end of the
building and continues in a straight line out into the yard. No switches are necessary.

Page One hundred ninety-three

HORSE BARN EQUIPMENT

PAGE

Hay Racks 1 98-203

Feed Boxes 204-206

Window Guards 207

Water Troughs 207

Stall Guards 208-210

Harness Hooks 210

Salt Rolls and Holders 210

Stall Posts 211

Cess Pools 212

Oats Cleaner 213

A modern, sanitary, economical, durable, and convenient type of horse stall

Complete in every detail

Page One hundred ninety-six

Horse Stable Equipment

You have noticed how a horse sticks his nose down to the bottom
of the manger, roots around awhile, and then pulls out a hatful or
so of hay onto the floor with his nose.

You have seen him when he was eating grain, push a handful or
two over the side of the box in his earnest attempt to get a big mouthful.

You have noticed your horses do these things; but did you ever
try to imagine the total expense in this waste?

Conservative estimates place this waste at 20% of the feed given
the animals. Figured on this basis the average horse wastes something
like $15 or $20 each year.

Louden Horse Stable Equipment was designed to prevent, and
does prevent, this waste. It also gives to the barn a clean, up-to-
date appearance, is more sanitary, and keeps the horses in better
condition at all times.

The cost of the equipment is more than saved in a very few
months. The purchase is good business judgment, whether the buyer
is farmer or town man. For years the city big barn owners — stables
where from 50 to 500 horses are fed — have realized the necessity of
this feed-saving, money-making equipment, and now up-to-date,
economical farmers everywhere are putting it in.

It costs no more to install modern, time-saving, sanitary steel
and iron equipment than it does to build of lumber.

For nearly a half century we have been making a study of barn
needs and have the most complete line ever offered.

Louden Horse Barn Equipment, Louden Dairy Barn Equipment,
Louden Hay Unloading Tools, and Louden Litter and Feed Carriers
are known for their high quality in every country. It is our aim to
make the name Louden stand for all that is best in barn equipment.

THE LOUDEN MACHINERY COMPANY

Page One hundred ninety-seven

-I ^s I — r 1

Automatic Hay Racks Figs. 1210 to 1218

(Warren Patent)

Fig. 1210

Specifications

Styles Made: For horses; for cattle; for sheep. Each style in many different sizes to meet any ordinary requirement.

Construction: Neat, strong, rigid. Will stand hard usage. Main framework (Full Back construction) 1x1 inch high carbon
steel angles. Corners are rounded and reinforced with steel plates. Frame is also braced by angle cross bars and upright
l-:j-inch spring steel rods which will bend, but always spring back into place. Space between rods is varied to meet require-
ments of horses, cattle, sheep, and calves.

Open Back Construction: Same as Full Back, except the back does not have upright rods.

Full Back construction is used where both front and back of rack must be utilized to hold in hay.

Open Back construction is recommended where rack sets against solid wall, or on the outside of a pen.

Automatic Action: A special torsion coil spring which also acts as the hinge upon which rack operates.

Spring: 2 5-16 inches, outside diameter, made of ?s-inch steel. Every spring given severe test before sold, and is guaranteed
against defect or breakage.

Locking Device: Consists of two 1 J^-inch steel side arms operating in steel links. Links work in unison. Will allow rack to
be locked when opened to widest point. Rack closes completely when unlocked, except when feed is in rack.

Operation: Pull rack open till it locks. Put in hay. Raise locking arm and rack closes against hay. Pressure is constant
and hay is held firmly at all times. As the animal eats the hay, the rack closes, slowly and automatically.

Rods: Held securely by the angle steel.

Finish: Special quality black Japan.

Installation: Plain bolts for installing are furnished with each rack. Lag bolt expansion shields for brick or cement walls
are extra.

Page One hundred ninety-eight

Warren Automatic Hay Racks — Continued

Sizes, Weights

Figure

Height

1210

36 in.

1211

36 in.

1212

36 in.

1213

42 in.

1214

30 in.

1215

36 in.

1216

(Pony)

30 in.

1217

(Sheep

or Calf)

24 in.

1218

(Cow

Pen)

36 .n.

Full Back

Width

Weight

42 in.

49 pounds

48 in.

54 pounds

36 in.

44 pounds

36 in.

51 pounds

54 in.

53 pounds

72 in.

85 pounds

30 in.

33 pounds

54 in.

42 pounds

36 in.

42 pounds

Open Back

Figure

Weight

1210' ,

40 lbs.

I2III2

45 lbs.

mi'A

37 lbs.

nwA

41 lbs.

nwA

44 lbs.

1215^

74 lbs.

12161^

26 lbs.

12171^

35 lbs.

(Open Front only for Cow Pen)

Rack in Feeding Position

No means of feeding hay has ever been
devised that so totally eliminates all waste.
The horse pulls out a mouthful at a time
and the rack gradually closes as the hay
is eaten out, the hay being held with suffi-
cient firmness to keep it from falling out at
the sides of the rack, but not so tightly that
the horse cannot eat comfortably.

The value of this automatic closing fea-
ture cannot be over-estimated, for without
it no rack can completely prevent the waste
of hay. By means of the opening and
closing device, the rack can be instantly
locked open and conveniently filled. After
being filled the catch is released, allowing
the rack to close automatically against
the hay by means of the springs.

The rack is practically self-cleaning, as
dirt or chaff sifts through to the floor. In
the old-fashioned type of manger this chaff
and dirt settles to the bottom of the manger
and is often breathed into the nostrils of
the horse while eating. Failure to clean

The material used is the best steel,

out the old-fashioned manger also causes much hay to be spoiled by this chaff and dirt mixing with the hay.

Another advantage in the Automatic Hay Rack is the removal of danger to the animal's eyes.
Under the old-fashioned feeding arrangements often a horse's eyes have been injured by straws while the
animal was rooting in the manger. This cannot occur with the Automatic Rack.

There are no sharp corners or points on which an animal can injure itself. Still another advantage is
the free circulation of air about the horse's head at all times. This feature can best be appreciated during
hot weather.

The Automatic Hay Rack is constructed to withstand rough usage,
and as there are no "wearing points" the rack will last a lifetime.

The Automatic Hay Rack is made in many sizes and in different styles to meet every requirement, but
the principle is the same in each. All styles have the same strong, almost indestructible steel con-
struction with the automatic spring-press feature.

Open Back Construction

Warren Automatic Hay Racks with Open Back Construction, should be specified when to be attached
to wood, cement, or brick surfaces.

The principal advantage of having these racks furnished without the upright wiring in the back is to
eliminate the possibility of hay accumulating between the back of the rack and the wall. While the
regular full-back rack can be used, the Open Back is preferable and can be furnished at a reduced cost.

When our racks are to be installed in stables where the windows have been set exceptionally low, our
22-inch Open Back, as illustrated in Fig. 1210' j-A, can be used to advantage. This allows the rack to
be installed flush with the under side of the window sill where it will not interfere with the opening and
closing of the window.

Page One hundred ninety-nine

FrmrTTn

i^^^^^^

Open Back Construction Continued

Fig. 1210H-A
Manner of Attachment to Brick Wall

Fig. I2IOI2-A illustrates our improved
method of attaching Open Back Racks to
brick or cement walls. This is done by means
of steel clamps which are adjustable up and
down between the angle iron uprights at either
end of the frame.

In new construction bolts or 2 x 4s are
usually set in the wall to which these clamps
are attached. If bolts are used they must be
spaced the proper distance apart lengthwise.
Complete measurements with full information
will be furnished upon request.

Where the walls are already constructed
the frame may be as securely attached with
expansion bolts.

The vertical adjustment of the clamps
allows for any up-and-down variation in the
spacing of either the 2x4s or bolts.

See page 199, for sizes in which the Open
Back Racks can be furnished.

Operation of Racks and Feeding

Loft and Front Aisle Feeding

Filling the rack from front aisle is illustrated in Fig. 1221. Here the back
is the movable portion and operates the same as the front in other installations.
The locking open device and the releasing is the same as illustrated and
described on foregoing pages. When filled and released it occupies but a small
amount of the aisle space. The heavy spring pressure holds the hay to the
front feeding surface and keeps it within easy reach of the animal until entirely
consumed.

In stables arranged
for feeding the hay
from the loft, our
racks may be used
with exceptional ad-
vantage and are very
conveniently filled as
shown in illustration.
Chutes are not neces-
sary as the opening of
the rack is sufficiently
wide to catch the hay.
Where the ceilings are
exceptionally high, we
suggest the use of
Special Hay Rack,
which has greater

height.

Fig. 1221
Filling from Front Aisle

Page Two hundred

Filling Rack from Loft

Wrought Iron Center Hay Rack^ — ^Fig. 1225

Wrought Iron Center Hay Rack

Specifications

No. 1225-A. Small size: 24 in. wide by 30
in. high by 16 in. deep. Weight, 31 pounds.

No. 1225-B. Medium Size: 30 in. wide by
30 in. high by 16 in. deep. Weight, 37
pounds.

No. 1225-C. Large Size: 42 in. wide by 30
in. high by 16 in. deep. Weight, 44 pounds

Upright bars are } 2-i"ch rods, set 3 J^ inches

apart.
Main frame and cross bars are 1x34 inch size.

Where a heavy, strong hay rack is
desired to attach to the wall, and
the spring-press feature is not essen-
tial, this rack can be recommended.
It is being used in thousands of
barns and is giving complete satis-
faction from the standpoint of con-
venience, sanitation, and durability.

The construction is such that the
rack is almost indestructible. The
upright rods are ' 2-inch size, spaced
3''4 inches apart — just the right dis-
tance to make feeding convenient,
but not so far apart that the hay will
work out. The cross rod near the
top of the rack adds greatly to the
strength and rigidity.

Wrought Iron Corner Hay
Rack — Fig. 1226

Specifications

Height, 35 inches.

Projects out from corner, 24 inches.

Uprights are heavy } o-inch rods, spaced 3J2 inches apart.

Weight, 27 pounds.

Our Fig. 1226 Wrought Iron Corner Hay Rack is
a strong, durable rack that will stand hard usage. It
is suitable for either side of stall. The cross bar adds
greatly to the strength and rigidity of rack. We
recommend this rack for convenience, durability and
sanitation. It is one of the biggest selling hay racks
ever put on the market.

Wrought Iron Corner Hay Rack

Page Two hundred one

trnnrmnTnTTnTrnrmTin:

Extended Hay Rack For Hay Chute— Fig. 1227

(Flat Wall)

Specifications

No. 1227. Height, 5 feet; width, 33 inches; extends 18 inches

from wall.
Uprights are heavy J 2-i"ch rods, spaced 4 inches apart.
Main frame and cross braces are of 1x3^ inch size.
Weight, 57 pounds.

No. 1227' 2- Height. 5 feet 6 inches; width, 42 inches; extends

19 inches from wall.
Uprights are heavy ' 2-i'^ch rods.
Main frame and cross brace, li
Weight, 67 pounds.

This rack is long enough to reach to the average
mow, and where used, there is no opportunity for
hay to be scattered on the stall floor while being
filled. This advantage soon pays for the additional
cost of this rack over lower racks in the average
barn. More hay can be put into this rack at one
feeding, thus saving some labor.

The rack is strong and substantial and adds greatly
to the good appearance of the barn. It is cross
braced and heavy.

1-J

!

L\

— ^ i

,;

j

1 i '

i 1 '

™ :

i

i

1

/

\

t

mi

|P

^^^ .

Fig. 1227

Extended Corner Hay Rack
For Hay Chute- Fig. 1228

(Corner Rack)
Specifications

No. 1228. One size only.

Made either for right or left corner of stall. Cut shows left hand. (In

ordering be sure and state whether rack is to be used in right or left

hand corner of stall.)
Height, 5 ft. 6 inches.
Projects 20 inches from corner.
Uprights: Heavy J 2-'"ch rods.
Main frame and cross brace, lx'4' inch rods.
Weight, 38 pounds.

Like Fig. 1227 this rack is high enough to be filled from the
mow without wasting any hay. It is made either for right or
left corner of stall. Illustration shows left hand corner style.

The heavy cross-braced construction of this rack is a guarantee
of its durability. It should outlast the barn.

Fig, 1228

Page Two hundred two

smm^^MM

^

F-AIRFIEL D. IOWA

Wrought Iron Center Hay
Rack — Fig. 1229

(Without Crossbar)

Specifications

No. 1229-A. Small Size: 24 in. wide by 30 in. high by 16

in. deep. Weight. 29 pounds.
No. 1229-B. Medium Size: 30 in. wide by 30 in. high by

16 in. deep. Weight, 36 pounds.
No. I229-C. Large Size: 42 in. wide by 30 in. high by 16

in. deep. Weight, 40 pounds.
Upright bars are ' 2-inch rods set 3J^ inches apart.
Main frame is 1x34 in- bars.

This is a duplicate of our Fig. 1225 rack, except that
it does not have the supporting cross bar below the top
of the main frame. It is a strong, dependable rack,
made in standard sizes.

Fig. 1229

Wrought Iron Corner Hay Rack
Fig. 1230

(Without Crossbar)

Specifications

One size only. Projects out from corner 24 inches.

Height, 35 inches. Uprights, heavy J 2-'"ch rods spaced 33-2

inches apart. Main frame, 1x^^ inch bars.
Weight, 25 pounds.

This is a duplicate of our Fig. 1226, except that it
does not have the extra bar near the top of the rack.

Fig. 1231

Fig. 1230

Cast Iron Corner Hay Rack
Fig. 1231

Specifications

One size only. Projects out from corner 23 inches.
Width, 24 inches: height, 28 inches.
Uprights are spaced 4 inches apart.
Uprights are oval }2^^i inch bars.
Weight, 22 pounds.

This rack provides a very satisfactory corner feeding
arrangement at a \ovf price. Under ordinary condi-
tions it should last a lifetime.

Page Two hundred three

ZlSty^r^ FAIRFIELD. "lOWA

Sanitary Steel Feed Box — Fig. 1232

(Warren Patent)

Fig. 1232
Specifications

Construction: Body of 18-gauge Wood's refined cold-rolled steel, reinforced around the top with a steel band. All
corners are welded, making box rigid. All parts galvanized to make them rust proof. Two rods set across Inside of box
act as braces and prevent waste of feed.

Installation: Box sets in a
heavy 1 3 ^xj^ inch steel frame,
to which it is attached at
each end with heavy ma-
chine bolts which form pivots
on which the box swings when
it is tilted for cleaning. Can-
not be tilted by horse.

Attachments: Steel clamps;
one end brace, and lag bolts
for installing are furnished
with each box. If manger is
to be set away from corner of
stall, an extra supporting
brace should be ordered.
Where box is to be attached
to brick or cement wall, ex-
pansion shields will be needed,
for which a small extra charge
will be made.

Showing how box tips on pivots for cleaning; also shows cross rods which act as
braces and prevent feed waste

Sizes and Weights

(Box made in three sizes)

No. 1232-A
No. 1232-B
No. 1232-C

Length
20 in.
20 in.
14 in.

Width

12 in.

13 in.
12 in.

Depth
7 in.
9 in.
7 in.

Weight
20 lbs.
22 lbs.
14 lbs.

Nos. A and B are recommended for horses. No. C is recommended for ponies.

Page Two hundred four

^^:k^§:LUiiL^k;k

FAIRriELO

Showing amount of space an average feed occupies in the
Standard Size Box

Sanitary Steel Feed Boxes — Continued

(Warren Patent)

Our Sanitary Steel Feed Box was devised
for the man who wants the best. It is more
sanitary, more durable, more convenient, and
of neater appearance than any other all-metal
feed box on the market.

This box is practically indestructible. It is
made of heavy material and in a most substan-
tial manner. The body is constructed of 1 8-
gauge Wood's refined cold-rolled steel, and is
reinforced around the top with a steel band.
No rivets are needed in the construction, as
special double seaming machinery is used.

The most essential and exclusive feature in
the feed box is the convenient arrangement

for tilting. Near the front of the box on each end, a heavy machine bolt is attached to box and mounting
frame. (See Illustration.) This bolt acts as a pivot, and the box can be turned entirely over and cleaned
out before each feeding. As the rounded corners of the inside of the box make it difficult for dirt to accu-
mulate, the box is always in a sanitary condition.

All seams and pores are filled when the
box is galvanized, thus creating a smooth
surface, with no cracks or crevices to afford
breeding places for disease germs.

The advantage in having such an easily
cleaned feed box is self evident to the man
who knows how quickly the ordinary feed
box will accumulate dirt and dust, which,
mixed with the slobberings of the horse
makes a most unhealthful condition. Where
bran mash and other quickly fermenting
feeds are used, the need of an easily cleaned
Frame in which box sets box is still more apparent.

Preventing Feed Waste

Illustration shows the space an average feed occupies in the box. It also shows position of the two
rods or cross bars that prevent the animal from rooting out and wasting grain. It is estimated that a
horse will root out and waste from 10 to 15 per cent of the grain when fed in an ordinary box. This
saving alone would make the purchase a good investment, even without the sanitary features.

The round sloping bottom of box and the cross rods allow the grain to be well distributed, and
provide a check on the too rapid eaters.

Sizes of Boxes

No. A box is considered standard for use in the average stable. It has a capacity of about
yi bushel, and the average feed occupies the space below the cross bars.

No. B box has a total capacity of about a bushel, and where the feeding is very heavy, and bulky
feed is used, it is recommended.

No. C is built exclusively for use in pony stables.

The Louden Machinery Co.. Charles City. Iowa, July 15, 1916

Fairfield, Iowa.
Gentlemen :

Yours of the I4th inst., received. Concerning barn equipment purchased of you last year, wash to say that
so far as I can see it is very satisfactory and everything in smooth working condition on both farms. Certainly
it has been a saving in labor to the tenants for with no more help they are caring for nearly twice the stock.
Kindly send me the catalog you mention as I may need some more equipment later on.

Arthur L. Olds.

Page Two hundred five

Fig. 1234

Patent Slow-Feed Corner
Manger— Fig. 1234

Specifications

Size: 17x17x6 inches deep. Each manger has 7 cells, each
holding one pint. Total capacity. 15 quarts.

Finish: Either japanned, galvanized, or enameled.

Weight, each, 32 pounds.

If you have a horse that eats too fast, here is the prevention.

The illustration shows how the manger is divided into sep-
arate cells. These divisions make it difficult for a horse
to bolt the grain. They also prevent the wasting of feed,
as the animal cannot root grain over the edges of the box.

Fig. 1235

Roll Front Corner Manger
Fig. 1235

Specifications

Dimensions: 17x17x10 inches deep.

Construction: Cast iron, with roll front as feed guard.

Installation: Attach to wall in corner with screws or nails.

Finish: Japanned, galvanized, or enameled.

Weight. 33 pounds.

This is a large, roomy, waste-preventing corner feed manger.

The manger, being cast in one piece, is without seams or

cracks and crevices to hold dirt. , r < \. \

The roll front, which extends over the front side of the bowl

makes it impossible for the horse to drag the feed out.

Fig. 1236

Fig. 1237

Flange Front Manger— Fig. 1236 Wall Manger-Fig. 1237

Standard Size: 16xl6x9>2 inches deep.

Construction: Cast iron, with flange on inside of bowl to

prevent feed waste.
Installation: Attach to corner walls with screws or nails.
Finish: Japanned, galvanized, or enameled.
Weight, 24 pounds.

Large Size: 17x17x10 inches deep. Weight, 28 pounds.
This is a very popular type of waste-preventing comer manger.
The flange extends from one wall side to the other, and no

grain can be dragged out with the nose.

Page Two hundred six

Standard Size: 18x12x8 inches deep.

Construction: Cast iron, with feed flange on inside edges

of front and two sides.
Installation: Attach to wall with screws or nails. Can be

furnished on special orders with detachable wrought iron

attachment to fasten to wall so manger can be removed

at pleasure.
Finish: Japanned only.
Weight. 30 pounds.

Large Size: 24x14 by 11 inches deep. , , ■

Construction, installation, and finish same as Standard size.
Weight, 40 pounds.

frrrmmn

TheLOUDEN MACHINERY COMPANY

^/i inch mesh. No. 14 wire
I inch mesh, No. 14 wire
1 inch mesh. No. 1 3 wire
1 /^ inch mesh, No. 1 3 wire
I M inch mesh. No. 12 wire

Wire Window Guards
Fig. 1251

Louden Wire Window Guards will keep an animal
from severely cutting itself in a broken window when
excited. All windows near horses' heads should have
guards. A Guard hke the one illustrated is a com-
plete protection. Factories, garages, and even private
residences are often equipped with these guards as a
measure of safety.

In ordering, always give exact overall size you
want Guards made, i. e. extreme outside dimensions
from out-to-out of wires clinching around the frame.
For "Diamond" Mesh Guards, please state
which is the height.

Our Wire Window Guard can be furnished in the
diamond, diagonal, or square mesh. The illustration
shows the diagonal mesh. All of the guards are well
made, and strong. The usual size of the round rod
frame is ,\ inches; |<-inch is sometimes used for small
light guards and a ^8-inch frame can be furnished for
large ones.

Window guards are made in the following designs:

I 5^ inch mesh. No. 1 I wire

I Ji inch mesh. No. 10 wire

1 ^-i inch mesh. No. 9 wire

2 inch mesh. No. 10 wire
2 inch mesh, No. 9 wire
2 inch mesh. No. 8 wire

I J4 inch mesh. No. 1 1 wire
1 1^ inch mesh. No. 1 3 wire
13^ inch mesh. No. 12 wire
1 J^ inch mesh. No. 1 1 wire
1 J4 inch mesh. No. 10 wire

Iron Drinking Fountain Fig. 1238

Specifications

Construction: Iron. Heavy, substantial,
and sanitary. Equipped with overflow.

Dimerisions: I foot 9 inches high by 3 feet
10 inches long by 2 feet I inch wide.

Base 3 feet 4 inches by 1 foot 6 inches.

Weight. 315 pounds.

Fig. 1238
J .^'f- 'P^ shows a neat, artistic and convenient fountain for outdoor or indoor use. It is particularly
desirable for a location where horses are to be watered from all sides. It is strong and heavy, and so con-
structed that when water is splashed over the edge it will run off the fountain quickly.
This fountain needs no bracing of any kind to insure its standing in pla

lace.

Page Two hundred seven

Louden Horse Stall Partition — Fig. 1241

The stall illustrated is
an excellent type. The
space between the planks,
and the open steel partition
permit free circulation of
air, and the heavy plank
and steel construction
would make it extremely
difficult for a horse to in-
jure itself in any way.

The difference in cost
of constructing a durable
stall and a "makeshift" is
very little. Horses are
often badly injured by be-
coming frightened in a
poorly constructed stall.
The insurance alone is
worth the investment, to say
nothing of the pride a man
enjoys in having a neat,
attractive barn; and a Lou-
den Stall is as cheap as
lumber.

Figure 1241 shows an
excellent method of con-
structing a horse stall.

Different requirements
and personal opinions will
vary the type of floor insta

Fig. 1241

^U M„.^^f floor in>;talled SO we will leave that to individual choice without recommendation or
L'SeltnTe^ctt to :rthS ''^-^^ -^° '^^ ^""^^ °^ ^'^^ ''

the rear of the stall. . ^

The Stall Partition above illustrated consists ot: ■ u \ \. \

4 Ten-inch Planks, 9 feet long. (We do not furnish planks.)
1 Extra Heavy Steel Stall Post, Fig. 1246- A, page 211.

1 Steel Stall Partition, Fig. 1242. , r .u "U ^ f^J

Any style of stall partition shown on following pages can be substituted for the one illustrated.
When desired the wood sides of stall may be constructed of upright boards, in which case our Cap Rail
with grooveX wood, should be used on the upper edge, and our grooved Base Rail should be used

to hold lower end of boards firmly. , , ^ c- mac ^ U o„k=Hi-,,i-«.r1

Where bottom of post is to be attached to fioor, Fig. 1245 post may be substituted,

■■"*»>■.,,,,

f:^,f

W. B. Ayer's Horse Barn, McMinnville, Oregon.
Louden Planned and Equipped.

Horse Barn at St. Charles Seminary, Cartha-

gena, Ohio. Louden Planned and

Equipped.

Page Two hundred eight

Louden Horse Stall Guards

The construction and design of Louden Horse Stall Guards are in keeping with the durable, clean-cut
simplicity of all Louden Goods. The plainer and simpler barn and stable equipments are made, the easier
it will be to keep the stable sanitary.

Our Wrought Steel Guard is an excellent type of construction, and quite popular. The two styles
,;hown on this page and top of next page are the same general construction, except that Figs. 1242-B and
1242-C have both ends square to attach to rear stall posts. The ^2-inch round steel uprights are firmly
set in the heavy channel steel frame, making substantial and durable guards.

All three forms of construction offered are very popular and will give satisfaction in every respect. All
guards are carried in standard stock sizes, but any size may be had upon special order.

One end only
attaches to upright post

f

n

^

m

i

r

j
i

f

1

i

f

i

! 1

A

^

PI

ri

f

f

/

1

1

i

i

Li

_

H

_

L

_

.__

J .

J

^

I -^

_ ^

;

X—

^^

Li

Fig. 1242-A
Specifications

Dimensions: 2 feet high by 6 feet long. Can be made any size upon special order.
Uprights: j2-mch round steel rods set apart 3}o inches at centers, in steel channel frame.
Main Frame: IJ 4x1 J 2 inch channel steel, with steel plate top rail. Finish: Black enamel.
Weight: 37 pounds.

Both ends of this guard can
be attached to posts

Fig. 1242-B
Specifications

Dimensions: 2 feet high. Can be made any length or size upon special order.

Main Frame: U4XI ^2 inch channel steel, with steel plate on top rail.

Uprights; 3 2-mch round steel rods set apart 3J^ inches at centers, in steel channel frame.

Page Two hundred nine

FrTTiTnn

^-^im'j"^^'*-*'^^^'^'**-'*^'^*^

Louden Horse Stall Guards — Fig. 1242 — Continued

Our Fig. 1242-C Stall Guard is used principally for box stalls. It is of the same general construction
as the two guaids described on previous page, but is made any length to order. A box stall can be
made light and well ventilated by using this guard.

:;^<Jii.-V.-iP---T-:

Fig. 1242-C
Specifications

Dimensions: 2 ft. high by any length desired.

Uprights: }2-'"ch round steel rods set apart 3? 2 inches at centers, in steel channel frame.

Main frame; 1 '4XI32 '"ch channel steel with steel plate on top rail.

Finish: Black Enamel.

Weight: 6 lbs. per lineal foot.

Louden Salt Rolls and Holders — Fig. 1061

Specifications

Size of Salt Roll: Length. 4 inches; diameter. 5 inches. Weight. 5'^ pounds.

Holders are fitted with grip clamps for use on tubular steel stalls, or with
connections for attaching by means of screws or bolts to vertical timbers
of wood stalls. Can be furnished, also, for horizontal timbers. (Fig. 1061.)

Louden Salt Rolls are the most convenient and economical,
and altogether the best way of salting cattle and horses.

The Steel Holder is attached to the steel stall frame by
means of a grip clamp or can be fastened to a wood stall frame
with bolts or screws.

Heavy Harness Hook — Fig. 1260

Specifications

Fig. 1061
Salt Roll attached to wood manger

Dimensions: 13-inch
extension from wall by
8-inch total up and
down. Weight, each, 7
pounds.

Construction: Heavy
iron. Diameter of round
iron of hook, I inch.
Will hold heaviest har-
ness safely and securely.

Heavy Harness Hooks are far superior to ordinary
spikes or wood pegs to hold harness. When hung on
one of these hooks the harness cannot slip off.

The 13-inch size is generally used, but we can fur-
nish 8 and 10-inch lengths.

Page Two hundred ten

Stall Partition Top and Base Rails — Fig. 1245

Fig. 1245

Specifications

Dimensions: 3 inches diameter, with groove to hold 2-inch board. Any length furnished. Finish; Japanned.
Weight, per lineal foot. 4 '4 pounds.

In constructing a horse stall, rails for the top of the wooden partition to hold the stall guard in place
are quite necessary to get a first-class job. A base rail is often necessary to hold bottom of partition lined
up properly. Specifications on both cap and base rail are the same.

Fig. 1246

Stall Posts— Fig. 1246

Specifications

Construction: Heavy wrought steel tube. Cannot be broken like cast iron posts. Pro-
vided with grooved flange to receive stall boards.

NOTE: Heights given are to lower part of the cast top. In ordering, be sure to give exact
dimensions; also size number.

No. 1 . Heavy: 5 inches diameter, 5 feet 4 inches high. Weight, each. 160 pounds.

No. 2. E>.tra Heavy: G'^-inch diameter, 5 ft. 4 in. high.

Weight, each, 205 pounds.

Finish: Ball tops can be finished on sf>ecial order in solid brass, bronze, or nickel plate at
small extra cost.

This post is far superior to anything of its kind on the market, and makes
the construction of a neat, sanitary stall partition an easy task.

The Improved Heavy Steel Post has a flanged groove to hold the ends of
the boards in the stall partition, making it a simple matter to remove or
replace boards when desired.

The post is neat and symmetrical, and greatly helps the appearance of any
barn.

When desired, posts may be purchased long enough to reach the ceiling,
thus combining stall post with building support.
... Figure I 246 shows post to set on floor. Figure 1246-A shows the post with
lib 6-inch extension to go into cement.

Fig. 1246-A

Heavy Post Socket — Fig. 1247

Fig. 1247

Specifications

For 6-inch wood posts. Construction: Heavy iron.
Diameter of flange: 2)4 inches.

Height Weight

"iYi inches 15 pounds

5J^ inches 21 pounds

8 inches 27 pounds pj 1948

Figure 1247 shows a substantial, heavy, firm socket
for a 6-inch wood post. It is made in three heights — 3>^, 5>^, and 8 inches. Wood posts rot at the
bottom, and by using this socket the post will last longer, as well as keep in line all the time.

Socket Plate for Post— Fig. 1248

Specifications

For 6-inch wood post. Dimensions of plate: 6x12 inches. Attaches to floor with screws. Weight, each, 20 pounds.

Figure 1248 shows a type of socket used to hold 6-inch post firmly. It is, however, neither as firm
nor sanitary as the Heavy Post Socket.

Page Two hundred eleven

^^^^^m

This is a type
riage or automobile wash

Cess Pools

The advantages and conveniences in having good sanitary drains for
the stable can hardly be over-estimated, and most new barns that are
being erected are now equipped with good drainage facilities.

We show but three types of Cess Pools on
this page, but are prepared to furnish special
curved heads for gutters, "T" gutter con-
nections, and other supplies of like nature,
upon special order. Manger and Gutter
Drains are also shown on pages 148 and 149.

Heavy Carriage Wash Cess
Pool — Fig. 1261

Specifications

Construction: Heavy iron. Spigot outlet extra

long for calking.
Dimensions: Head. 10 inches square.
Outlet: 4 inches. Finish: Plain.
Weight, 43 pounds.
NOTE: Same Cess Pool can be furnished with

short spigot.

of Drain Head with Cess Pool especially designed for a car-
It has an extra long Spigot Outlet. Fig. 1261 shows

Fig. 1261-A

Drain Head raised to show Bell Trap. Fig. 1 261 -A shows same in closed position

Heavy Stable Cess Pool — Fig. 1262

Specifications

Construction: Heavy iron. Has grating

and bell trap. Made in three sizes.

Dimensions: Weigiit

15' 2 inches square, with

4 inch square outlet 60 lbs.
Same size, with extra

long spigot 70 lbs.

12 inch square, with 4-

inch outlet 49 lbs.

This is a standard stable Cess
Pool, and is considered the best of
its type. It has the grating and
Bell Trap shown in illustration.

^7 MiDCBSDCST^
£7£/AI££JKJK]U

Fig. 1262-A

Fig. 1262

Basin Cess Pool — Fig. 1263

Specifications

Construction: Heavy iron, standard type, with bell trap.

Dimensions
4x 4 inches
6x 6 inches
8x 8 inches
9x 9 inches

12x12 inches

Weight

3 pounds

5 pounds
10 pounds

I6J2 pounds (heavy)
18 pounds (heavy)

Fig. 1263

Figure 1263 shows a very popular design. The
rounding base of this Cess Pool makes installation
very simple.

Page Two hundred twelve

nOi^:i:^Tt>tiL^^

Self -Acting Oats Cleaner
Fig. 1250

(Higbie Patent)

Specifications

Construction: See general description.

Sizes: The Self-Acting Oats Cleaner is made in three sizes.

Styles: When ordering specify whether discharge of oats is to be on

right or left side. Illustration shows right side delivery.
Construction and Finish: Made of kiln-dried whitewood. with brass

trimmings, natural finish, and with two coats of varnish. When

desired to have the finish correspond with the stable finish, specify

kind of wood to be used, and ask for quotations.
No. A

Dimensions: 6 ft. 3 inches high by 15 inches wide by 8' 2 inches
deep.

Capacity: J 2 bushel per minute.

Weight, each, 65 pounds.

6 ft. 3 inches high by 16 inches wide by 1 1 inche

No. B

Dimensions

deep.

Capacity: I bushel per minute.
Weight, each, 80 pounds.

No. C

Dimensions: 6 ft. 3 inches high by 16 inches wide by 12 inches

deep.
Capacity: 2 bushels per minute.
Weight, each, 82 pounds.

Special sizes, suitable for any stable can be furnished on special
order.

Clean oats aid in maintaining the normal health of
the horse and the favorable results obtained by feeding
oats that have been drawn through a self-acting oats
cleaner are recognized by every veterinarian.

The Higbie Oats Cleaner is a valuable asset to the
modern stable. It will remove one bushel of dirt and
other foreign matter from every 25 to 30 bushels of oats.

This oats cleaner is hand built and assembled in the
most durable manner possible. It is constructed of kiln-
dried whitewood, with brass trimmings, natural finish,
and with two coats of varnish.

Extending from top to bottom of the cleaner are eleven
downwardly inclined screens, operating in pairs. Below
each pair of screens is located a table elevated in the
center, thus the oats fall alternately from the screens to
the table; the object of these tables being to divide
the oats and to give them a very rapid impetus before
dashing to the next set of screens. This system has
shown a great improvement over the old way of running
the oats down a single set of screens all together.

The operating valve is located in the top of the cleaner;
directly below this is a large coarse grate which permits
the oats to pass through but throws off everything larger,
such as stones, sticks, glass, or any coarse accumulations.
Below this grate are the zig-zag screens and the tables
extending through the entire cleaner to the discharge
spout below. The dirt box is in the base of the cleaner
and may be emptied through a hand-hole in the bottom.

Page Two hundred thirteen

LOUDEN BARN PLANS

PAGE

Get Plans Before You Build 217

Why Build From Plans? 217

Louden Plans 217

The Advantages of a Well Planned Barn 218

The Individual Plan 218

Our Complete Architectural Service 219

Our Charges 219

Louden Book of Barn Plans 220

Barn Designs 220-22 1

H

=THE LOUDEN ARCHITECTURAL DEPARTMENT

GET PLANS BEFORE YOU BUILD

Guess work in building a barn is not only slow, wasteful and expensive, but it results in a barn that
is a constant source of dissatisfaction as long as it stands.

You expect that barn you are planning to build to serve you the rest of your life — then why not get
it right? The few days or weeks you spend getting ready for a right start will be regained by the time the
building is completed, and the few dollars you spend for plans will be saved many times over during its
construction.

But most important of all, you will have a barn that exactly meets your needs — convenient, labor-
saving, properly lighted and ventilated, free from waste space — in fact, the ideal barn for you, and one
you will take pleasure and pride in.

No other organization of architects is so well equipped to give you expert advisory service and prac-
tical barn plans as the Architectural Department of The Louden Machinery Company.

Unlike most architectural concerns, its services are limited strictly to one line of work. Agricultural
Architecture. Every man on the staff is a Farm Building Specialist. As a result they are more com-
petent to advise you on your farm building problems than any organization of general practicing architects.

Our staff of skilled architects and builders is supplemented by an auxiliary of 75 practical field men
who know barns from basement to ridgepole.

There is probably a field man in your territory. Write us about your building plans and we will
have him see you, if possible, and talk the matter over with you. There's no expense — no obligation.
We're glad to confer with you about the matter that's nearest our hearts — the building of better barns
— and we sincerely believe we can benefit you.

Why Build From Plans?

Complete plans will protect you against waste of material due to guessing and working in the dark
as to measurements.

They will protect you against waste of time, due to delay necessary in figuring our details of construc-
tion, while the work is in progress.

They will protect you against the misunderstandings which so often arise between owner and builder.
Even the most reliable builder may misinterpret your desires, and go wrong, when no complete plans are
followed.

They will help you to adjust your loss in case of fire.

Louden Plans

will effect a valuable saving in material and labor. They will expedite your building operations. They
will give you the advantage of the knowledge of experts, gained through many years of study and expe-
rience. They will correctly convey your wants to your builder. They will help him to give you efficient
service.

Every plan we execute is of the highest order. Our great organization enables us to give you the
very best service at a very moderate price.

„, , , „, ,. Guelph. North Dakota, Sept. 7. 1916.

The Louden Machinery Company,

Fairfield, Iowa.
Gentlemen:

You will remember I built a barn last Fall, following your Architectural Department's plan No. 3404, and will
say I am so very well pleased with the barn, although it has been rather expensive to build in this country.

I am so well pleased with the ventilating system, and the barn is so light and pleasant, and the air so fresh and
cool in summer, and so warm and dry in winter, that it has been pleasing to me to think I carried out your instruc-
tions in full.

Very truly yours,

Chas. B. Denison.

Page Two hundred seventeen

FAIRFIELD. IOWA

The Advantages of a Well Planned Barn

The primary feature of a well planned dairy barn is its provision for cow comfort. Practical tests
have proved conclusively that the cow's physical comfort is a big factor in her milk yield.

The well planned dairy barn has a ventilating system that ventilates. The number and areas of
vent-flues necessary are scientifically determined. The window area is carefully calculated, accordmg to
the number of animals to be housed. Floors, mangers, and gutters are designed for durability and clean-
liness. The cows are provided with light, airy stalls that give them utmost freedom and comfort.

The well planned barn is convenient for the workmen, as well as comfortable for the cows and other
livestock, an extremely important feature where help is scarce and high-priced.

It is so designed and equipped that no labor is lost. The silo is located where it is convenient for
feeding, as well as for filling. The feed bins are located where they can be reached with the fewest number
of steps. The manure pit is located, if possible, so that it is not necessary to push a load uphill. The
barn is equipped with labor-saving appliances that increase the profits derived from it, and transform barn
drudgery to pleasant labor.

Louden barn plans meet every requirement for the comfort of the stock and the convenience of the
workman. Economy in construction is carefully sought, so far as it does not interfere with strength, dura-
bility, or sanitation.

Write us about your building plans. We can give you valuable suggestions.

The Individual Plan

When you build a barn you build for a definite purpose and that purpose should be kept constantly
in mind. Whether you build for horses or cows, for dairying or feeding, for the storage of feed or farm imple-
ments, or for a combination of these, the correct amount of space should be allowed for each purpose, the
total of which will determine the size of the building. ...

This rule seems simple enough, but becomes complicated when economy of construction is taken
into consideration. A barn 40 feet square, with 1600 square feet of floor space, may meet your require-
ments satisfactorily. It may be found, however, that a barn 32x50, having the same floor area, will meet
your requirements equally well, and will cost less on account of requiring lighter construction for a 32-foot

span, than for a 40-foot span. ,,,, , ,, j-i

In such matters as this our trained architects and builders, thoroughly versed in the requirements
of the modern barn, can be of real service to you.

Our Architects Make Every Plan an Individual Study

In working out a plan for you, they will make a study of your special requirements and shape the
plan to meet your needs. They will take into consideration climatic conditions in your territory, current
local prices of building materials, transportation problems, and labor conditions. If you so desire an
architect will be sent to confer with you and look over the building site, in order to niake more intelligent
suggestions in regard to drainage, disposal of manure, and general arrangement of buildings.

We are prepared to work out complete plans for you, from the ground up, or we will take your own
ideas and work them out in detail for your builder. In either case the services will be rendered free or at
a very moderate cost.

University Farm, St. Paul, Minn.. Dec. 29, 1915.
The Louden Machinery Company,

St. Paul. Minn.
Gentlemen: ■ , i • ■ • • • ..•

Am pleased to acknowledge receipt of the book of Barn Plans. You are certamly domg a real service m assisting

farmers to construct and equip for true economy.

Yours truly,

R. M. Washburn,
Asso. Prof, of Dairy Husbandry

Page two hundred eighteen

[)li|ff^<;«)ii>^>^^^i>^MiliMjLij

Our Complete Architectural Service

It is the purpose of The Louden Architectural Department not only to prepare practical barn plans,
but to assist barn owners in the solution of any problems that may arise in regard to farm buildings or
equipment.

They will give you expert advice on lighting, ventilating, heating, concrete work, strength of materials,
fire protection, drainage, disposal of manure, and upon all problems of sanitation or hygiene.

We employ a landscape architect whose work is principally upon large estates, so arranging the
farm buildings that they will harmonize with one another and with their surroundings.

Whether your farm is large or small, the buildings should be arranged with due regard to landscape
architecture and a general pleasing effect. Your farm buildings can display individuality and good archi-
tectural design, and at the same time be practical, modern and convenient, separately and collectively.

Do not hesitate to consult us on any question of Farm Mechanics.
What is the capacity of my silo?
What size silo will I need for my herd?
How much concrete will I need to build a water tank?
What size post will be necessary to support an overhead grain bin?

What size pulley will be required to run a cream-separator or a churn at proper speed?
What is a good formula for whitewash?

We can help you answer many such puzzling questions, and will be glad to do so without charge and
without obligating you in any way.

Our Charges

The Louden Architectural Department is in reality a Service Department of The Louden
Machinery Company. Consequently a large part of the valuable service it renders is free.
We make no charge for:

Advisory service covering farm building or any branch of Agricultural Engineering.

Preliminary sketches and suggestions, including suggestive floor plans and complete explanation of

each feature.
A personal visit from any Louden field representative who may be within your territory.
For any of the following services we make a moderate charge, based on the amount of time and effort
involved.
A special trip by one of our architects to confer with you on building problems or land-scape

architecture.
Complete building plans and specifications, including all information required for the completion of

the building.
Bills of Material, on which prices are quoted separately.

Albion, Idaho. Sept. I, 1916.

The Louden Machinery Company,

Fairfield, la.
Gentlemen :

We wish to thank you for the helpful suggestions and plans you so kindly furnished in the building of our horse
barn, and we honestly believe we have one of the best barns in the state of Idaho, and one that would be a credit to
any community or farm.

Yours very truly.

Ervine Dewey & Sons.

By G. M. Dewey.

Page Two hundred nineteen

rAIRriELD. tOWA.'^^.

"Louden Barn Plans"

Louden Barn Plans is a 112-page book of practical barn plans and building information, com-
piled by the Louden Architectural Department. It contains the best of the building ideas gathered in
fifty years of specializing along this line by William Louden and his able assistants.

It shows seventy-two representative designs for dairy and general purpose barns, and other farm
buildings, with full description and estimated cost of each. It treats in a clear understandable way the
subjects of grading, drainage, concrete work, framing, lighting, ventilating, strength of materials — every
problem in fact that confronts the barn builder.

If you expect to build or remodel a barn, now or later, you need this book. We'll gladly mail you a
copy on request.

Don't wait till you're ready to build — get it now!

Design 1840 — For Dairy Barn

Description

This barn is 126 ft. wide by 140 ft. long.

The foundation wall extends 18 inches above the
ground and the frame sidewalls are 16 ft. high.

The lower story is 93^2 ft. high, the hay mow is
22 ft. high from floor to hay carrier-track, the vertical
sidewalls in the hay mow are 6 ft. high, and the
ridge of roof is 36 ft. above the ground.

The foundation wall is of concrete construction,
and the entire floor of the lower story is of concrete
construction.

Capacity of mow, 3 1 5 tons loose hay.

The barn above the foundation is of plank-frame
construction and has a clear hay mow without posts.

The cost is estimated to be $9800.00.

Price of Complete working
plans and specifications
for Design 1840 $QC 00

Page Two hundred twenty

Design 1808 — For 6 Cows and 4 Horses

r

ZG'-o'

hORJSE.

I^L.<S

r^niD/rs/c- A.LLEiy'

nANGrKR

cow

57; V-

LvS

r

LITTER /\LLE.^

^
fO

Description

This barn is 26 ft. wide by 32 ft. long.

The foundation wall extends 12 inches above the
ground, and the frame sidewalls are 1 6 ft. high.

The lower story is 10 ft. high, the hay mow is
19 ft. high from floor to hay carrier-track, the vertical
sidewalls in the hay mow are 6 ft. high, and the ridge
of roof is 33 ft. above the ground.

The foundation wall is of concrete construction,
and the entire floor of the lower story is of concrete
construction.

Mow capacity, 1 4 tons loose hay.

The barn above the foundation is of plank-frame
construction and has a clear hay mow without posts.

The cost is estimated to be $1000.00.

Price of Complete work-
ing plans and specifica-
tions for Design
1808

$5.00

Page Two hundred twenty-one

,MikimniH*-i

FAIRFIE L D. I O VVA

INDEX

Hay Tools

Page

Bracket Pulley Holder 52

Cable and Cable Fittings 29

Cable Pulleys 50

Check Pulley 51

Comb Pulley 51

Combination Rack Irons 55

End Stop Block (for Double Bead Track) 8

Floor Hook 52

Floor Pulley 50

Forks

Balance Grapple (6 tine) 38

Balance Grapple (4 tine) 39

Balance Grapple (Elxtra Large 6 tine) 39

Harris Double Harpoon 40

Nellis Single Harpoon 40

Rocker-Bar 40

Triple Harpoon 40

Fork Clevis 45

Fork Pulleys 51

Guide Pulley (for Round Barn) 27

Handy Hay Sling Holder 44

Hang Hook (jointed) for Wood Track 31

Hang Hook (Straight) for Wood Track 31

Hay Carriers (Fork)

Louden Junior 8-9

Louden Senior 10-11

Louden Junior for Wood Track 13

Louden Junior for Cable Track 28

Hay Carriers (Sling)

Carry-All 14-17

Iowa 18-19

Reversible, for Wood Track 21

Cross Draft (for Slings or Fork) 22-24

Cross Draft for Round Barn 25-27

Hay Rack Clamps 54

Hoist (Power) 33-35

Hoisting Singletree 53

Ice Tongs 55

Page

Lightning Rope Hitch 52

Link Track Hangers 30

Nails (Barbed) 31

Off-Set Hinge 53. 67

Power Hoist 33-35

Pulleys 49-51

Pulleys (Fork) 51

Pulleys (Guide) for Round Barn 27

Pulleys (Parallel Sling) 48

Pulleys (Self Locking Sling) 46

Pulleys (Sling Binding) 45

Pulley Holders (For Steel Track) 52

Pulley Hooks 52

Rack 1 rons 55

Rafter Brackets 31

Rafter Hooks 52

Registering Heads 47

Ridgepole Brackets 31

Rope (Wire). 29

Rope Hitch (Lightning) 52

Rope Hook (Swivel) 52

Rope Hook (Cross Draft) 24

Rope Swivel (Junior Carrier) 9

Round Barn Outfit 25-27

Singletree (Hoisting) 53

Slings

Carry-All 42

Standard 43

Three-Rope 43

California 43

Handy . • 44

Sling Couplings 44

Sling Holder (Side Trip) 44

Sling Pulleys (Parallel) 48

Sling Pulleys (Self-Locking) 46

Sling Binding Pulleys 45

Snatch Pulley Block 51

Splice Clamps for Steel Track 30

Spreader Attachment for Singletrees 53

Stake Holders 55

Track (Steel) 30

Track (Cable) 29

Track Hangers 30-3 1

Wire Stretcher 56

Door Hangers and Specialties

Page

Bird Proof (Non-Adjustable) Door Hanger 60-62

Bird Proof (Adjustable) Door Hanger 63

Bird Proof (Covered) 64

Door Latch 67

Door Stop 67

Double Bracket for Bird Proof Track 63

Page

Double Strap Door Hanger 66

Double Tread Door Hanger 65

Garage Door Hanger 59

Standard Jointed Door Hanger 66-67

Stay Rollers 67

Stalls, Pens, Etc.

Page

Alley Gates 132

Anchor Bolts (Helical) 1 39

Building Columns (Reinforced) 135

Bull Pens 126-128

Page

Cow Stalls (See Stalls)

Calf Pens '^°''m

Cement Tools '01

Chain (Stanchion Side) 85

Pago Two hundred twenty-two

^^^^^M

Stalls, Pens, Et

Page

Chain (Throat) 85

Connections (for Posts and Columns) 1 38

Cow Pens 124-125

Cupolas 141-142

Curb Gauge 101

Cut-Out Form 101

Drills (Star) 101

Drinking Bowls 115-119

Elxpansion Bolts 139

Fittings (Stall and Pen) 1 36

Gates (Alley) 132

Gates (For Pen Gates, See Pens)

Gauge (Curb) 101

Grip Clamps 1 36-1 39

Gutter Drains 148, 212

Hog Pens 129-131

Holders (Name Plate) 94

Holders (Salt Roll) 94, 210

Hook Bolts 139

Manger Divisions (Spring Balance) 102-104

Manger Drains 147-148

Mangers (Spring Balance) 104-106

Mangers (Bull Pen) 126-128

Mangers (Calf Pen) 120-121

Mangers (Cow Pen) 124-125

Manger Templets 101

Name Plate Holders 94

Paint 149

Partitions (Stall) 79

Pens (Bull) 126-128

c. — Continued

Page

Pens (Calf) 120-121

Pens (Cow) 124-125

Pens (Hog) 129-131

Salt Rolls 94. 210

Salt Roll Holders 94. 210

Spring Balance Mangers 104-106

Spring Balance Manger Divisions 102-104

Stalls (Cow)

Cross Braced Double Post 76-78

Triple Post 82-83

Side Post 84-85

Single Post 87

Go-Right 88-90

Simplicity 91

Adjustable 92-93

Stanchions

Tubular Steel 109-1 1 1

Wood-Lined 112

Quick Adjustable 113

5-ln-l 114

For Bull Pen 127

Stanchion Anchor (Adjustable) 96

Stanchion Holder (Adjustable) 96

Step Back 97

Throat Chains 85

Ventilators 142-143

Water Bowls 115-119

Window Ventilators 146

Carriers

Litter, Feed, Milk Can, Merchandise, Etc.

Page

188
182
175
175
175

Anchors for Wire Track

Automatic Track Opener

Brackets (Beam)

Brackets (Rafter)

Brackets (Ridge Pole)

Combination Track (For Quick Out and Self-Acting

Carriers) 1 65- 1 66

Curves (For Steel Track) 183

Curves (For Wire Track) 189

End Stop Block 175

Feed Carriers

Double End 167

Standard 168

Single End (Adjustable Frame) 169

Single End (Wire Track) 169

Side Delivery 1 70

Feed Truck (Floor) 171

Harness Carrier 171

Litter Carriers

Emancipator 157-159

Standard 161

Quick Out '. 162

Self Acting 163-164

Merchandise Carriers .

Page
172

Milk Can Carriers

Platform Carrier (Steel Track) 173

Platform Carrier (Wire Track) 1 73

Railroad Carrier (Steel Track) 173

Railroad Carrier (Wire Track) 174

Suspended Carrier (Wire Track) 1 74

Platform Hay Carrier 1 74

Posts For Supporting Track in Yard 1 79

Removable Section For Doors 183

Screw Eyes 175

Swinging Crane 1 85- 1 86

Switches (Steel Track) 181

Switches (Wire Track) 189

Tension Bolts 1 88

Track (Combination) 165-166

Track (Steel)

Track (Wire)

Track Brace

Track Hangers

Track Plans

Track Support (Outside).

191

175
187
182
175
•193
178

Page Two hundred twenty-three

FAIRFIELD. I O Wa""^J|^

Horse Stable Equipment

Page

Cess Pools 212

Drinking Fountains 207

Feed Boxes 204-206

Harness Carriers 171

Harness Hooks 210

Hay Racks

Automatic (Warren Patent) 198-200

Wrought Iron (Center and Corner) 201-203

Cast Iron Corner Hay Rack 203

Oats Cleaner (Higbie Patent).
Partition Cap and Base Rails.

Posts

Post Sockets

Salt Rolls and Holders

Stall Guards

Window Guards

Page

213
211
211
211
210
208-210
207

The Louden Guarantee
Page 149

Page Two hundred twenty-four

Rand McNaliv & Co.

FORM 410 25M 1

PRICE LIST

LOUDEN PRODUCTS

Effective January 2, 1917

(All Prices Subject to Change Without Notice)

This Price List Applies to
Catalog No. 46 Only

S^STON OFFlQf

'^' 12 SO. MARKFt St.
H. E. WRIGHT & SONS

The Louden Machinery Company,

1047-1053 Broadway,
Albany, N. Y.

Factory and General Office

Fairfield, Iowa

Branch Houses

1051-59 West 35th St.,
Chicago, IlL

2288 University Ave.,
St. Paul, Minn.

PRICE LIST
Hay Tools

(Subject to Change Without Notice)

Goods marked "*" are trade goods and are not warranted by this company.

p F' Price

T 430 Junior Steel Track Fork Carrier each $ 7.00

8 1123 Trip Block for Junior Steel Track Fork Carrier each .50

8 523 Double Bead End Stop Block .^ : each .ji

9 C430-A Rope Swivel for Junior Steel Track Fork Gamer... each .50

9 830 Junior Fork Carrier with Oscillating Engine Trucks each 8.50

10 1100 Louden Senior Hay Fork Carrier ^--^r^ V f^'''^ ^■

1124 Louden Senior Hay Fork Carrier for Cable Draft Rope (not

illustrated) each 9.00

10 1123 Trip Block for Senior Hay Fork Carrier each .bU

10 523 Double Bead End Stop Block each 24

13 441 Junior Fork Carrier for Wood Track - each I.WJ

13 1127 Trip Block for Junior Fork Carrier for Wood Track each .50

14 1103 Carry-All Hay Sling Carrier each 15.25

11 1123 Trip Block for Carry-All Hay Sling Carrier each .50

14 523 Double Bead End Stop Block each .24

18 821 Iowa Hay Sling Carrier each 13.00

18 1123 Trip Block for Iowa Hay Sling Carrier each .bU

18 1128 Adjustable Trip for Iowa Hay Sling Carrier each .&U

18 523 Double Bead End Stop Block each .24

19 529 Louden Weight Return --^ , each i.&u

20 315 Reversible Hay Sling Carrier for Wood Track each 13.00

20 1130 Trip Block for Reversible Hay Slmg Carrier each 1.00

20 435 Comb Pulley TierlToz 320

20 383 Rope Hook -:,-: ;; .• - ,v ^^ fj^; itno

21 817 Cross Draft Hay Fork and Hay Sling Carrier (for slmgs) each 13.00

Cross Draft Hay Fork and Hay Sling Carrier (for wood

track) each 13.00

21 1131 Release Block for Cross Draft Carrier each 1.00

21 523 Double Bead End Stop Block each .^4

21 383 Rope Hook ^ -^- : Per do^- 3.20

24 819 Three-part Rope Hitch for Cross Draft Carrier each .90

25 1104 Round Bam Hay Sling Carrier - eacn ib.(o

25 1131 Release Block for Round Barn Sling Carrier each l.OU

25 523 Double Bead End Stop Block -"-If^, S9rt

25 383 Rope Hook ...^-.- P^r doz^ ■^f

27 1135 Guide Pulley for Round Barn.. each b.uu

27 430y2 Junior Round Barn Fork Carrier each iu.uu

28 621 Junior Hay Fork Carrier for Cable Track each 7.00

28 801 Trip Block for Junior Carrier for Cable Track each l.UU

28 C430-A Rope Swivel for Junior Carrier -• eacn

29 417 Galvanized Steel Wire Rope %-inch diameter I

29 Galvanized Steel Wire Rope 1/2 -inch diameter Vi!^^:

29 418 Galvanized Steel Strand Vs-inch diameter i^rice

Flexible Wire Draft Rope A-inch diameter •-• J

Wire Cable Loop Clamp Per doz-

29 337 ¥2 Wire Cable Stop CJamp Per doz. 3.00

30 571

30 550 space uiamp xui uuuliic uc<»u kj.,^v-» ...^-^-

30 498 Standard Two-part Track Hanger per doz. l.bu

29 337 Wire Cable Loop Clamp Pe>" doz. 4.00

29 3371/2 Wire Cable Stop Clamp Per doz

30 571 Double Bead Steel Track per 100 leet

30 550 Splice Clamp for Double Bead Steel Track each

30 498 Standard Two-part Track Hanger per aoz.

30 500 Light Two-part Track Hanger per doz. 1.4U

30 832 5-inch Link Track Hangers Per doz. 1.60

31 780 Straight Wood Track Hang Hook, 14-inch per doz. 1.20

31 781 Straight Wood Track Hang Hook, 16-inch per doz. l.dO

31 372 Jointed Wood Track Hang Hook, 14-inch per doz. 2.00

■60
31 465 Malleable "RidgeTole" Bracket.. per doz. 1.00

31 424 Improved Malleable Rafter Bracket per doz.

31 425 Common Malleable Rafter Bracket f!! j^f-

FAIRFIELD, IOWA Page 3

Hay Tools — Continued

Price

Side Rafter Bracket per doz. $ 1.20

Side Beam Bracket per doz. 1.50

Barbed Chisel Point Steel Nail per pound .16

Single Drum Power Hoist each 62.50

Triple Drum Power Hoist each 122.50

6-tine Standard Size Balance Grapple Hay Fork each 11.00

4-tine Balance Grapple Hay Fork each 9.35

6-tine Extra Large Balance Grapple Hay Fork each 15.00

Louden Rocker Bar Hay Fork each 3.75

Triple Harpoon Hay Fork each 5.00

Harris Double Harpoon Hay Fork each 1.60

31-inch Harris Double Harpoon Hay Fork each 2.00

Alfalfa Double Harpoon Hay Fork each 3.70

Nellis Single Harpoon Hay Fork each 3.00

6-foot Carry-All Hay Sling each 7.00

4-foot Standard Hay Sling each 3.20

5-foot Standard Hay Sling each 3.80

Three-rope Hay Sling each 4.00

California Hay Sling each 5.00

Louden Hay Sling Coupling each 1.00

Handy Hay Sling, 3 ropes each 2.00

Handy Hay Sling, 2 ropes each 1.50

Handy Hay Sling Holder each 2.00

Side Trip Sling Holder each 2.00

Self Locking Sling Pulleys with Handy Hay Sling Holder At-
tachment per pair 3.00

Fork Clevis each .50

Sling Binding Pulley each 3.00

Self Locking (right angle) Hay Sling Pulleys per pair 3.00

All Registering Heads each .50

Parallel Hay Sling Pulleys per pair 2.00

Senior Parallel Hay Sling Pulleys for Wire Draft Rope..per pair 3.00

High Grade Knot Passing Pulley, Wood Sheave per doz. 7.00

High Grade Knot Passing Pulley, Iron Sheave per doz. 8.00

High Grade Draft Pulley, Wood Sheave per doz. 5.60

High Grade Draft Pulley, Iron Sheave per doz. 6.60

Mammoth Pulley per doz. 10.00

Cable Pulley, 7-inch Iron Sheave per doz. 18.00

Cable Pulley, 8-inch Sheave per doz. 25.00

Upright Floor Pulley per doz. 10.00

Standard Fork Pulley each 1.00

Senior Fork Pulley each 1.50

Return Pulley per doz. 3.00

Comb Pulley per doz. 3.60

Check Pulley per doz. 1.80

Snatch Pulley Block per doz. 11.00

Cast Frame Knot Passing Pulley per doz. 4.00

Cast Frame Draft Pulley per doz. 3.20

Wood Frame Reed Pulley with Hook per doz. 4.00

Wood Frame Reed Pulley with Eye per doz. 4.00

Floor Hook, %x7 inches per doz. 1.40

Rafter Hook, %x6 inches per doz. 1.20

Small Hook, 1/2x31/2 inches per doz. 1.00

Double Bead Pulley Hook each .30

Bracket Pulley Holder each .60

Lightning Rope Hitch per doz. 3.20

Swivel Rope Hook per doz. 3.20

Hoisting Single Tree each 1.60

Spreader Attachment each 1.00

Offset Hinge per pair .80

No. 1 Hay Rack Clamps, %xl4 per doz. sets 18.00

No. 2 Hay Rack Clamps, %xl6 , per doz. sets 19.20

No. 3 Hay Rack Clamps, %xl8 per doz. sets 20.40

Combination Rack Irons per set 4.20

Page

Fig.

31

675

31

725

31

373

34

965

35

1132

38

351

39

648

39

686

40

1137

40

350

40*

353

*

674

*

676

40*

356

42

984

43

666

43

668

43

600

43

324

44

516

44

1106

717

1106A

44

328

44

1106

45 652-653

45

332

46 330-331

47

48

649

48

650

49

467

49

494

49

468

49

495

50

519

50

651

50

579

50

364

51

366

51

1139

51

359

51

435

51

360

51

623

51*

729

51*

522

51*

641

51*

642

52

389

52

390

52

391

52

470

52

348

52

367

52

383

53

344

53

345

53

349

54

645

54

54

55

593

Page 4 THE LOUDEN MACHINERY COMPANY

Hay Tools — Continued

Price

Louden Improved Stake Holder per doz. $ 4.20

Louden Common Stake Holder per doz. 2.50

Box Rack Stake Holder per doz. 2.50

Pressed Steel Stake Holder per doz. 1.50

Self-Opening- Ice Tongs, 13-inch per doz. 12.50

Self-Opening Ice Tongs, 17-inch per doz. 13.00

Self-Opening Ice Tongs, 21-inch per doz. 13.50

Louden Stretcher Hoist per doz. 14.00

Special Garage Door Hangers per set 6-foot door 5.00

Special Garage Door Hangers per set 8-foot door 5.30

Special Garage Door Hangers per set 10— foot door 5.60

Special Garage Door Hangers per set 12-foot door 5.90

Bird Proof Barn Door Track. per 100 feet 20.00

Bird Proof Door Hangers per doz. sets 20.00

Supporting Hangers and Brackets for Bird Proof Track, per doz. 1.50

Adjustable Bird Proof Hangers per doz. sets 24.00

Double Brackets for Bird Proof Track per doz. sets 3.00

Covered Bird Proof Door Track per 100 feet 30.00

Lag Screws for Covered Bird Proof Track per 100 pieces 2.45

Double Tread Barn Door Hangers per doz. 13.80

Double Tread Barn Door Track per 100 feet 10.00

Covered Double Strap Barn Door Hangers per doz. sets 12.00

Rigid Barn Door Track per 100 feet 7.30

Covered Jointed Bam Door Hanger per doz. 12.00

Sliding Barn Door Latch per doz. 3.70

Screw Adjustable Stay Roller per doz. 2.00

Slide Adjustable Stay Roller per doz. 2.00

Off Set Hinges per pair .80

Steel Door Stop per doz. 1.40

Louden Silent Salesman:

Pitted -with Louden Junior Fork Carrier each 13.60

Pitted with Louden Senior Fork Carrier each 15.40

Fitted with Iowa Sling Carrier each 19.40

Fitted with Carry-All Sling Carrier each 21.60

'age

Fig.

55

398

55

398%

55

624

55

627

55

426

55

695

55

696

56

1268

59

1273

59

59

59

60

911

60

902

61

961

63

1052

63

64

1200

65

458

65

452

66

566

66

487

66

567

67

455

67

456

67

457

67

349

67

1205

68

FAIRFIELD, IOWA

Page 5

Stalls, Stanchions, Mangers, Animal Pens and Sundry
Dairy Barn Fittings

Page Fig. Price
76-77-78 812 Louden Cross Braced Double Post Cow Stall:

Standard 812 Stall complete, as specified $ 8.00

Standard 812 End Section, as specified 4.00

79 994 Louden Stall Partitions:

Standard Partition, either style, as specified 1.30

Standard Partition as above, including one Floor Flange 1.60

Standard Partition as above, including 1 Floor and 1 Wall

Flange 1.90

82 810 Louden Triple Post Cow Stall:

Standard 810 Stall complete, as specified 8.00

Standard 810 End Section, as specified 3.00

84 959 Louden Side Post Stall:

Standard 9.59 Stall complete, as specified 6.65

Standard 959 End Section, as specified 3.00

85 1149 Louden Stanchion Side Chain 25

85 1149 Throat Chains with Holders 60

87 796 Louden Single Post Cow Stall:

Standard 796 Stall complete, as specified 5.50

Standard 796 End Section, as specified 2.60

999] Louden Go-Right Stall, without Manger:

88-89 \ Go-Right Stall, complete as specified 7.75

1000 J Go-Right End Section, as specified 2.60

91 951 Louden Simplicity Cow Stall:

Fittings for Simplicity Stall, as specified $ 3.80

Fittings for Simplicity End Section 1.60

Fittings for Simplicity Stall to set on Wood Floor, extra 50

Fittings for Simplicity End Section to set on Wood Floor,

extra .50

) Louden Adjustable Stall, complete with Individual Manger, as

specified 25.00

End section for Adjustable Stall complete, as specified. 4.00

Name Plate Holders, with Steel Plate 4x15 inches .36

Name Plate Holders without Steel Plate.. 32

For Larger Sheet, each square foot or fraction .16

Name Plate Holder with isinglass and blank card .72

Salt Roll Holder 48

Salt Rolls, sold in dozen lots only, f. o. h. St. Clair, Mich... .per doz. 2.00
Adjustable or Alignment Stanchion Holder:

For Top Rail, as specified .60

Adjustable Stanchion Anchor .30

Louden Step Back 1.25

Louden Cut-out Form .15

Louden Curb Guage .05

Louden Manger Templet, any size specified .25

Louden Cement Tools:

No. 1 each .60

No. 2 each .60

No. 4 each .32

No. 5 each 1.00

No. 6 each 1.20

101 1192 Star Drills:

%x8 each .50

%x8 each .60

%x8 each .70

%x8 each .75

104 Plate 14 No. 2 Individual Manger Divisions, no springs 2.00

104 Plate 14 No. 3 Division, Spring Balance, as specified 3.05

104 Plate 14 No. 4 Division, Spring Balance, as specified 3.30

105 990 Louden Spring Balance Galvanized Mangers:

Standard Size Mangers, as specified each 6.50

92 948-949

94

935

94
94

1182
1056

96

1298

96
97
101
101
101
101

1299
1151
970
1074
1013

For Galvanized Stalls and Parts Add 30% F. O. B. Cars, Fairfield, Iowa

Page 6 THE LOUDEN MACHINERY COMPANY

Stalls, Stanchions, Mangers, Etc. — Continued

Page Fig. Price

105 Large Size Mangers, as specified each $ 7.30

Extra per manger for fittings galvanized .60

111 861 Louden Tubular Steel Stanchions, naked each 1.85

861A Louden Tubular Steel Stanchion, with Guide each 1.95

8610 Louden Stanchion with Holder and Anchor each 2.25

861B Louden Tubular Stanchion, with Guide, Holder and Anchor 2.35

Guide or Hold-Open for Tubular Stanchion each .10

Upper or Lower Stanchion Holder each .20

112 937 Louden Wood-lined Stanchion, naked each 1.85

Louden Wood-lined Stanchion with Guide each 1.95

Stanchion with Holder and Anchor.. ......each 2.25

Louden Wood-lined Stanchion with Guide, Holder and Anchor..each 2.35

Guide or Hold-Open for Wood-lined Stanchion each .10

113 1159 Louden Quick Adju.stable Stanchion:

Stanchion, Naked each 4.50

Stanchion with Holder and Anchor each 4.90

114 1161 Louden 5-in-l Stanchion:

Stanchion, Naked each 2:50

Stanchion with Holder and Anchor each 2.90

115 1275 Gravity Water Bowl with Cover and Stall Post Attachments. ..each 2.50

Gravity Water Bowl without Cover, with Stall Post Attach-
ments each 2.00

Governing Tank for Gravity Water Bowl, galvanized each 6.60

116 1274 Automatic Sanitary Drinking Bowls, per Double Bowl complete .... $ 6.00

Automatic Sanitary Drinking Bowls (right or left) each 3.00

Clamps for Attaching Supply Pipe to Horizontal Top Rail each .16

120 1021 Louden Calf Pens:

121 1022 Plain Panel per lineal foot 1.80

For each Calf Stanchion built in panel, extra 50

Fittings for Gate — Hinges, Latches, etc 4.00

Pipe and Fittings for Arch Over Gate 2.25

Mangers for Calf Pens, per manger 5.85

124-125 995-996 Louden Maternity Pens:

Curb Construction, per lineal foot 1.80

Panel Construction, per lineal foot 2.05

Fittings for Gate — Hinges, Latches, etc 4.00

Pipe and Fittings for Arch Over Gate 2.25

Tilting Manger 12.60

Stanchions for Cow Pen Built into Panel 3.00

126 1164 Louden Tubular Steel Bull Pens:

Tubing and Fittings for sides of pen, per lineal foot 2.25

Fittings for Gate — Hinges, Double Latch, etc 5.00

Pipe and Fittings for Arch Over Gate 2.25

127 1165 Tiibing and Fittings for Regular Corner Manger with Stan-

chion and Manger 21.50

128 1301 Special Corner Manger -with Louden Outside Feed Manger 20.00

128 1300 Outside Manger for Bull Pen without Stanchion 4.50

Tilting Manger 19.80

Stanchion for Side of Bull Pen, not including top rail 3.00

129 1167 Louden Tubular Steel Hog Pens, Fillers spaced 4 inches:

Plain Panel, per foot 2.10

' Swinging Panel, 6-foot section 19.00

Swinging Panel, 8-foot section 23.10

Swinging Panel, 10-foot section 27.35

Fittings for Gate — Latches, Hinges, etc 4.00

Pipe and Fittings for Arch-Over Gate 2.25

Intermediate length of swinging panel take prices for next
longest sections.

For Galvanized Stalls and Parts Add 30% F. O. B. Cars, Fairfield, Iowa

FAIRFIELD, IOWA

Page 7

Page

131

132

135

Fig.
1286
1171

1185

Stalls, Stanchions, Mangers, Etc.— Continued

Price
Guard Rails for pens add 30c per foot to above price.
Louden Improved Alley Gate:

3 feet by 2 feet 11 inches $ 5.50

3 feet by 3 feet 5 inches 6.10

3 feet by 3 feet 11 inches 6.70

Louden Reinforced Building Columns:

Prices given in table are f. o. b. Chicago, 111., or Cam-
bridge, Mass.

Diam. of Column

Length of Columns in Feet, Including Caps and Bases

7' 7'-6"

8'

8'-6"

9'

9'-6"

10'

3"

$ 2.85$ 3.10
3.30 3.40

$ 3.50

3.80

5.60

8.55

12.85

12.80

$ 3.65

4.10

6.00

9.00

13.65

13.25

$ 4.00

4.50

6.45

9.60

14.65

14.80

$ 4.35

5.00

7.00

9.90

15.60

16.15

$ 4.55

Sl/i."

5.40

4"

4.75

6.85

11.00

11.00

5.15

7.80

12.10

11.85

7.55

4%"

10.30

5"

16.60

6"

17.60 -

In ordering be sure to give outside diameters.

136 Plate 15

Louden Dairy Bam Fittings,
meter.

Plate

No.
N-1

N-2

N-

N-4
N-5
N-6

N-7

N-8

N-9

N-10

N-11

N-1 2

Price

Single Piece Elbmv:

1% $ -48

1% 60

Interlocking "T" Coupling:

1% ? .48

1% 60

Cross Coupling:

ItV ? -44

1% 48

1% 60

Inverted "Y" Coupling:
l%xl% $ .48

Angle "T" Coupling:
l?8xl% $ .48

Right Angle Corner Coupling:

All sizes given for outside dia-

Plate

No.
N-13

Price

1%

178

.72
.85

72-Degree Comer Coupling:

1% $ .88

1% 96

120-Degree Comer Coupling:

1% $ .88

1% 96

straight Side Partition Coupling:

1% $ .88

1% 96

Angle Side Partition Coupling

1 =

1%

.96
1.15

Three-piece Center Partition
Coupling:

1% $ .96

1% 1.15

Four-piece Center Partition
Coupling:

1 % $1.08

1% 1.20

Five-piece Center Partition
Coupling:

1 % $1.45

1% 1.85

N-14 "T" Coupling for Large Posts:

l%x2% $ .60

l%x2% or 3 85

I%x3y2 96

l%x4 1.15

I%x4y2 1.35

l%x5 1.50

l%x5% or 5% 1.70

l%x6 1.90

l%x6% 2.05

l%x2% 72

178x2% or 3 92

178X31/2 1.10

178x4 1.30

178x4% 1.45

178x5 1.65

178x5% or 5% 1.85

178x6 2.05

178x6% 2.20

N-15 Cross Couplings for Large Posts:

l%x2% $ .60

l%x278 or 3 80

I%x3y2 96

l%x4 1.15

I%x4y2 1.35

l%x5 1.50

l%x5% or 5% 1.65

l%x6 1.90

l%x6% 2.10

178x2% 72

178x278 or 3 92

178x3y2 1.10

178x4 1.30

For Galvanized Stalls and Parts Add 30% F. O. B. Cars, Fairfield, Iowa

Page 8

THE LOUDEN MACHINERY COMPANY

Stalls, Stanchions, Mangers, Etc. — Continued

Plate

No.

N-16
N-17
N-18

N-20

N-21

N-22

N-23

N-24

N-25
N-26

N-27

N-28

Price

178x41/2 $1-45

178x5 1.65

I%x5y2 or 5% 1-85

178X6 2.00

l%x6% 2.20

Large Floor Flange $ .60

Wall Flange 48

Wall or Flat Post Flange:

1^ $ -40

1% 44

Interlocking Stanchion Holder:

Either size specified. $ .20

Collar, either size specified 20

Double Pivot for Manger Hinges:

1% ? .36

1% 40

Single Pivot for Manger Hinge:

24
.32

.12
.14
.16

Center Brace Rod Clamp 48

End Brace Rod Clamp 44

Right Angle Side Partition Coup-
lings for Large Posts or Col-
umns with Built-on Clamps.
Sixteen sizes as follows:

1%

178

Pressed Steel Clip:

lA

1%

1%

Small
End

1%

1%

1%

1%

1%

1%

1%

1%

178

178

178

1%

178

178

178

178

Center
.278 or 3..

..3% •

.4

..41/2

..5

$1.15

1.35

1.50

1.65

1.90

.51/2 or 5% 2.05

..6 2.20

.6% 2.45

..278 or 3 1.15

..31/2 1.45

..4 1.65

..4% 1.85

..5 2.00

..51/2 or 5% 2.20

..6 2.45

..6% 2.60

Right Angle Center Partition
Couplings for Large Posts or
Columns with Built-on
Clamps. Sixteen sizes as fol-
lows:

Small
End

1%

1%

1%

1%

Center
..278 or 3..

..3y2

.4

..472

..$1..55
,. 1.70
. 1.90
.. 2.05

Plate
No.

N-29

N-30

Price

Small
End

1%

1%

1%

1%

178

178

178

178

178

178

178

178

Center

.5 $2.20

-.5% or 5% 2.45

.6

..6%

..278 or 3

..3V2

.4

..41/2

..5

..B% or 5%.

.6

..6%

2.60
2.80
1.65
1.85
2.00
2.20
2.35
2.55
2.80
2.95

Acute Angle Cross Couplings for
Large Clamps, set at acute an-
gles to the "T" heads and to
themselves.

Small
End

1%

1%

1%

1%

1%.

Center Price

..278 or 3 $1.55

..31/2 1.70

.4 1.90

..472 2.05

.5 2.20

1% 51/2 or 5% 2.45

1%-.
1%..

178..
178..
178-
178..
178.
178..
178..
178..

.6

.6%

-278 or 3

-372

.4

..472

-5

..5Vz or 5%.,

-.6

..6%

2.60
2.80
1.65
1.85
2.00
2.20
2.45
2.65
2.90
3.10

Right Angle Corner Coupling for

Large Posts or Columns with

Built-on Clamps for 1% or

178 0. D. Tubing:

Small

End Large End Ihice

1%-
1%-
1%-
1%-
1%-
1%..
1%-
1%-

178-
178-
178-
178-
178-
178-
178-
178-

..2%
..372
..4 ..
..4%
.5 ..
..572
.6 ..
-6%
..278
-3%
..4 ..
..472
..5 ..
-5%

.6%

or 3 $1.15

1.35

1.55

1.70

1.90

or 5% 2.05

2.20

2.45

1.30

1.45

1.65

1.85

2.00

or 5% 2.20

2.30

2.55

or 3..

For Galvanized Stalls and Parts Add 30% F. O. B. Cars, Fairfield, Iowa

FAIRFIELD, IOWA Page 9

Stalls, Stanchions, Mangers, Etc. — Continued

Page Fig. Price

139 1150 Louden Grip Clamps (Illustrated also on page 136.)

No. 1—1 %xl % $ .36

No. 2—1 %xl-^ 36

No. 3—1 %xl A 32

No. 4— 1 %xl % 32

No. 5—1 % xl A 32

No. 6—1 % xl A 28

No. 7— lAxlA 28

No. 8— It^txItV 24

Hook Bolt, Ax7 12

Hook Bolt, t'iixT in lots of one dozen or more 1.12

Expansion Bolts, %x2 16

Expansion Bolts, ■^x2 16

Helical Anchor Bolt, %x2 16

Louden Parallel Clamps, four sizes as specified. .16

Louden Cupola, No. 4 size, galvanized, 20" throat each 38.00

Louden Cupola, No. 3 size, galvanized, 24" throat each 43.00

Louden Cupola, No. 2 size, galvanized, 27" throat each 46.50

Louden Cupola, No. 1 size, galvanized, 30" throat each 51.00

Louden Cupola, No. 100 size, galvanized, 36" throat each 60.00

Louden Cupola Lightning Rod Attachment, add $1.65 net to
above prices.
Lettering Louden Cupola Base in Zinc Letters 25c net per

letter.
Stenciling name in black letters, $1.00 net.

142 1268 Louden Ventilator, throat diameter 12 inches, galvanized each 13.00

Louden Ventilator, throat diameter 18 inches, galvanized each 20.00

Louden Ventilator, throat diameter 24 inches, galvanized each 33.00

Louden Ventilator, throat diameter 30 inches, galvanized each 46.00

146 988 Louden Window Ventilators each 1.75

147 1272 Louden Manger Drain, complete 2.00

1271 Louden Gutter Drain, complete with brass cover 5.00

Louden Gutter Drain, complete, less brass cover 3.80

139

727

727

139

879

879

139

1073

139

1190

141

1269

For Galvanized Stalls and Parts Add 30% F. 0. B. Cars, Fairfield, Iowa

Page 10 THE LOUDEN MACHINERY COMPANY

Litter Carriers, Feed Carriers, Mercliandise Carriers,
Steel Cranes, Tracks, Track Fittings, Etc.

Price

Louden Emancipator Litter Carrier each $35.00

Louden Standard Litter Carrier each 32.00

Louden Quick-out Litter Carrier each 26.00

Louden Self-Acting Litter Carrier each 17.50

Steel Track for Combination Litter Carrier per foot .15

Track Hangers for Combination Litter Carrier Track per doz. 1.95

Two-way Switch for Combination Track each 4.00

Three-way Switch for Combination Track each 4.50

Connecting Brace for Combination Steel and Rod Track 3.00

End Stop for Combination Carrier 24

Louden Double End Feed Carrier each 35.00

Louden Double End Feed Carrier, Standard Hoisting Gear

(not illustrated ) each 32.00

Louden Double End Feed Carrier with Adjustable Chain (not

illustrated) each 29.50

Louden Standard Feed Carrier _. each 29.00

Louden Single End Feed Carrier, Emancipator Hoisting

Gear (not illustrated ) each 31.00

Louden Single End Feed Carrier with Adjustable Chain each 26.00

Louden Wire Track Feed Carrier each 25.00

Louden Side Delivery Feed Carrier each 33.50

Louden Side Delivery Feed Carrier with Standard Hoisting

Gear (not illustrated) 32.00

Louden Side Delivery Feed Carrier with Adjustable Chain each 29.50

Louden Feed Truck (floor) 20 bushels each 27.00

Louden Feed Truck (floor) 25 bushels (not illustrated) each 32.00

Louden 12-hook Harness Carrier each 15.00

Louden 4-hook Harness Carrier. each 5.00

Louden Merchandise Carrier each 6.50

Louden Double Truck Merchandise Carrier each 16.60

Perfect Hoist No. 33 (no rope) each 5.00

Barrel Grabs each 2.00

Louden Platform Milk Can Carrier (steel track) each 9.80

Railroad Milk Can Carrier (steel track) emancipator Hoisting

Gear each 26.50

Railroad Milk Can Carrier with Standard Hoisting Gear (not

illustrated) each 23.00

Louden Wire Track Milk Can Carrier each 9.80

Louden Suspended Milk Can Carrier (wire track) each 8.50

Railroad Milk Can Carrier (wire track). each 17.00

Louden Platform Hay Carrier each 15.00

Louden Double Bead Steel Track per 100 feet 18.67

Regular Adjustable

Link Track Hangers, 5-inch per doz. $1.50 $1.90

Link Track Hangers, 7-inch per doz. 1.70 2.10

Link Track Hangers, 9-inch per doz. 1.90 2.30

Link Track Hangers, 11-inch per doz. 2.10 2.50

Link Track Hangers, 13-inch per doz. 2.30 2.70

Link Track Hangers, 15-inch per doz. 2.50 2.90

Link Track Hangers, 17-inch per doz. 2.70 3.10

Link Track Hangers, 19-inch per doz. 2.90 3.30

Link Track Hangers, 21-inch per doz. 3.10 3.50

Link Track Hangers, 23-inch per doz. 3.30 3.70

Link Track Hangers, 25-inch per doz. 3.50 3.90

Link Track Hangers, 27-inch per doz. 3.60 4.00

Link Track Hangers, 29-inch per doz. 3.70 4.10

Link Track Hangers, 31-inch per doz. 3.80 4.20

Link Track Hangers, 33-inch per doz. 3.90 4.30

Link Track Hangers, 35-inch per doz. 4.00 4.40

Link Track Hangers, 37-inch per doz. 4.10 4.50

175 424 Louden Rafter Brackets per doz. .66

175 465 Louden Ridge Pole Bracket per doz. .94

Page

Fig.

157

828

161

720

162

882

163

721

165

1287

165

1288

166

1297

166

1296

166

1290

166

167

845

804

903

168

763

904

169

886

169

887

170

1042

972

170

1044

171

973

1099

171

1276

171

1048

172

888

172

890

172

172

173

802

173

1045

173

766

174

767

174

1046

174

809

175

571

175

832

803

833

834

835

836

837

838

839

840

841

842

FAIRFIELD, IOWA Page 11

Litter Carriers, Feed Carriers, Etc. — Continued

Page Fig-. Price

175 675 Louden Side Rafter Bracket per doz. $ 1.12

175 725 Louden Beam Bracket per doz. 1.40

175 726 Louden Screw Eye per doz. 1.12

175 523 Louden End Stop Block each .24

178 1277 Track Support at End of Barn 24 feet long each 19.50

Track Support at End of Barn 30 feet long each 23.40

Track Support at End of Barn 36 feet long each 27.20

Track Support at End of Barn 42 feet long each 31.10

Track Support at End of Barn 48 feet long each 35.00

Track Support at End of Barn 54 feet long each 38.90

(For intermediate lengths, deduct 25c per foot from the next
longest length upon which price is mentioned.)

179 1279 Steel Post for Supporting Track in Yard, 8-foot post each 15.90

Steel Post for Supporting Track in Yard, 10-foot post each 18.35

Steel Post for Supporting Track in Yard, 12-foot post each 20.80

Steel Post for Supporting Track in Yard, 14-foot post each 23.20

Steel Post for Supporting Track in Yard, 16-foot post each 25.65

181 736 Louden Two-Way Switch each 4.45

181 795 Louden Three-Way Switch each 5.20

181 849 Louden Cross Track Switch each 5.20

182 1209 Louden Track Brace for Link Hangers each .60

182 859 Louden Track Opener each 4.00

183 639 Louden Bent Section for Curve each 1.80

183 633 Louden Removable Section, 2 feet long each 1.00

Louden Removable Section, 4 feet long .». each 1.40

185 974 Louden Swinging Steel Crane with Track, 12 feet each 18.50

185 976 Louden Swinging Steel Crane with Track, 22 feet each 25.00

185 978 Louden Swinging Steel Crane with Track, 30 feet each 37.50

185 980 Louden Swinging Steel Crane with Track, 40 feet each 45.00

For Swinging Crane less the vertebra hinge, deduct 5.00

(Prices on Steel Cranes include track and hangers.)

186 791 Fittings for Swinging Section at Driveway .each 6.00

187 No. 0000 Basic Steel Wire cut to length per 100 feet 4.50

187 No. 0000 Basic Steel Wire in unbroken coils per 100 feet 4.00

(Coils average 450 feet)

187 746 Louden Wire Track Suspender each 2.40

187 747 Louden Tackle Block Suspender, including pulley each 2.80

187 750 Louden Angle Iron for Wire Track each 1.25

188 745 Louden Wire Track Anchor (20 feet or under) ea<;h 3.20 ,

910 Louden Wire Tratfk Anchor (over 20 feet) each 3.65

188 1207 Tension Bolts, %x30 each .70

Tension Bolts, %xl5 each .45

Tension Bolts, %x 8 each .30

Tension Bolts, 78x30 each .85

189 892-893 Louden Wire Track Switches each 2.65

189 749 Louden Cross Track Holder each .20

190 797 Louden Wire Track Reverse Curve each 4.10

190 753 Louden Spring End Stop each 1.20

190 755 Anchor Loop each .65

190 756 Anchor Yoke each .75

190 757 Louden Clamp Loop per doz. 1.62

Hoisting Gear for Emancipator Carrier with trucks, wheels,

and 7-foot chains each 21.10

For each added foot of lift, add per foot 1.10

Hoisting Gear for Standard Litter Carrier with trucks, wheels

and hoisting cables each 16.65

Galvanized Box or Tub for Emancipator and Standard Litter

Carriers each 20.00

Double End Feed Box each 20.00

Trolley for Feed Carrier, adjustable chains each 9.45

Gear for Quick Out Litter Carrier, including trucks and

wheels each 15.00

Gear for Self-Acting Litter Carrier, including trucks and

wheels each 8.90

Page 12 THE LOUDEN MACHINERY COMPANY

Litter Carriers, Feed Carriers, Etc. — Continued

Price

Box or Tub for Quick-Out Litter Carrier each $15.00

Box or Tub for Self Acting Litter Carrier each 13.30

Anchor Bolt, % -inch by 6 feet each 1.65

Trip for Self-Acting Carrier each .40

Trip for Quick Out Litter Carrier each .55

Removable Splice Clamp each .30

Vertebra Hinge each 5.00

Hoisting Cables for Standard Litter Carrier each .45

1 Single Truck only (% set) for Litter Carrier each 3.05

1 Single Truck only (% set) for Wire Track Litter Carrier

each 1.65

FAIRFIELD, IOWA

Page 13

Page

> Fig.

198

1210

1211

1212

1213

1214

1215

1216

1217

1218

201

1225A

201

1225B

201

1225C

201

1226

202

1227

202

1227-1/2

202

1228

203

1229A

203

1229B

203

1229C

203

1230

203

1231

204

1232A

204

1232B

204

1232C

206

1234

206

1235

206

1236

206

1237

206

207 1251
1251
1251
1251
1251

207 1251
1251
1251
1251
1251
1251
1251
1251
1251
1251

207 1238

209 1242A
1242A
1242A
1242A

Horse Stable Equipment

All Horse Stable Equipment f. o. b. Chicago.
Automatic Hay Racks (Warren Patent)
Full Back-

Height

..36
.36
.36
.42
.30
.36

inches
inches
inches
inches
inches
inches

(Pony) 30 inches

(Sheep or Calf) 24 inches

(Cow Pen) 36 inches

Width
42 inches
48 inches
36 inches
36 inches
54 inches
72 inches
30 inches
54 inches
36 inches

Open Back

Fig.

1210 y2 ?

i2iiy2

I2i2y2

1213 Vz

12141/2

1215%
I2I61/2

12171/2

Price

$ 8.40

8.80

8.00

8.40

8.40

13.60

7.20

8.40

(Open front only

for cow pen)

Wrought Iron Center Hay Rack, 24 inches wide by 30 inches

high by 16 inches deep

Wrought Iron Center Hay Rack, 30 inches wide by 30 inches

high by 16 inches deep

Wrought Iron Center Hay Rack, 42 inches wide by 30 inches

high by 16 inches deep .'

Wrought Iron Comer Hay Rack

Extended Hay Rack for Hay Chute, 5 feet high by 33 inches wide
Extended Hay Rack for Hay Chute, 5 feet 6 inches high by 42

inches wide

Extended Comer Hay Rack for Hay Chute, 5 feet 6 inches wide....

Wrought Iron Center Hay Rack, 24x30x16 inches

Wrought Iron Center Hay Rack, 30x30x16 inches

Wrought Iron Center Hay Rack, 42x30x16 inches

Wrought Iron Comer Hay Raclc

Cast Iron Corner Hay Rack

Sanitary Steel Feed Box (Warren patent) 20x12x7 inches

Sanitary Steel Feed Box (Warren patent) 20x13x9 inches

Sanitary Steel Feed Box (Warren patent) 14x12x7 inches

Patent Slow Feed Comer Manger, Japaned

Roll Front Comer Manger, Japaned

Flange Front Corner Manger, 16x16x9% inches, Japaned

Flange Front Corner Manger, 17x17x10 inches, Japaned

Wall Manger, 18x12x8 inches, Japaned

Wall Manger, 24x14x11 inches, Japaned

Detachable Mounting Attachment for Wall Manger (not illus-
trated)

Wire Window Guards will be furnished any size tout in quoting
prices no guard will be considered as containing less than
8 feet square.

%-inch mesh. No. 14 wire,
1 -inch mesh. No. 13 wire
114 -inch mesh, No. 13 wire,
1 14 -inch mesh. No. 12 wire.
Wire Window Guards, li^-inch mesh. No. 11 wire, per square foot
Wire Window Guards, 1 %-inch mesh, No. 13 wire, per square foot
Wire Window Guards, 1 %-inch mesh. No. 12 wire, per square foot
Wire Window Guards, 1 %-inch mesh. No. 11 wire, per square foot
Wire Window Guards, 1%-ineh mesh. No. 10 wire, per square foot
Wire Window Guards, 1 %-inch mesh. No. 11 wire, per square foot
Wire Window Guards, 1%-inch mesh, No. 10 wire, per square foot
Wire Window Guards, 1%-inch mesh, No. 9 wire, per square foot
Wire Window Guards, 2 -inch mesh. No.
Wire Window Guards, 2 -inch mesh. No.
Wire Window Guards, 2 -Inch naesh. No.

Iron Drinking Fountain

Wrought Steel Stall Guards, 2 feet high by 6 feet long

Wrought Steel Stall Guards, 2 feet high by 5 feet long

Wrought Steel Stall Guards, 2 feet high by 7 feet long

Wrought Steel Stall Guards, special length to order, per lineal foot

Wire Window Guards,
Wire Window Guards,
Wire Window Guards,
Wire Window Guards,

per square foot
per square foot
per square foot
per square foot

10 wire, per square foot
9 wire, f)er square foot
8 wire, per square foot

Price
P 7.60
8.00
7.20
7.60
7.60

12.00
6.40
7.60

7.60

7.20

7.70

8.65

5.80

13.00

16.80
9.40
5.80
6.25
7.20
4.60
7.90
5.60
6.00
5.00
2.65
2.65
2.20
2.40
2.90
5.55

1.20

.38

.30

.28

.30

.34

.24

.26

.30

.34

.26

.30

.34

.26

.30

.34

46.80

6.60

5.40

7.80

1.32

Page 14

THE LOUDEN MACHINERY COMPANY

Horse Stable Equipment — Continued

Page Fig. Price

1242B Wrought Steel Stall Guards, any length to order, per lineal foot.... $ 1.32

210 1212C Wrought Steel Stall Guards, any length to order, per lineal foot. 1.20

210 1061 Louden Salt Rolls per doz. 2.00

210 1061 Louden Salt Roll Holders for attaching to horizontal timber. ..each .48

210 1061 Louden Salt Roll Holders for attaching to vertical timbers. ...each .48

210 1061 Louden Salt Roll Holders for attaching to tubular steel each .48

210 1260 Heavy Harness Hook (13-inch) Japaned per doz. 10.80

211 1245 Stall Partition Top or Base Rail with groove to hold 2-inch

board, per lineal foot 1.10

211 1245 Stall Partition Top or Base Rail with groove in top for Stall

Guard, per lineal foot 1.30

211 1246 Stall Posts (No. 1) 5-inch diameter by 5 feet 4 inches high 25.72

Additional height per inch .20

With 6-inch foundation base, extra 4.25

211 1246 Stall Posts (as above) with foundation 'base longer than 6

inches, add per inch 20

211 1246 Stall Posts (No. 2) 6%-inch diameter by 5 feet 4 inches high..: 32.86

Price per inch of additional length 26

211 1246 Stall Posts as above, with Foundation Base to go down in ce-
ment 6 inches, add 5.72

211 1246 Stall Posts as above, with Foundation Base to go down in ce-
ment more than 6 inches, add per inch .26

211 1247 Heavy Post Socket for 6-inch wood post, 3 1/2 inches high 2.86

211 1247 Heavy Post Socket for 6-ineh wood post, 5% inches high 3.25

211 1247 Heavy Post Socket for 6-inch wood post, 8 inches high 3.60

211 1248 Socket Plate for 6-inch post 2.20

212 1261 Heavy Carriage Wash Cess Pool, extra long spigot for calking, ea 7.00

212 1261A Heavy Carriage Wash Cess Pool, with short spigot each 5.80

212 1262 Heavy Stable Cess Pool, 15% inches square, with 4-inch outlet, ea. 5.30
212 1262 Heavy Stable Cess Pool, 15% inches square, with extra long

spigot each 6.35

212 1262 Heavy Stable Cess Pool, 12 inches square, 4-inch outlet each 4.80

212 1263 Basin Cess Pool, 4x 4 each .75

212 1263 Basin Cess Pool, 6x 6 each 1.00

212 1263 Basin Cess Pool, 8x 8 each 1.50

212 1263 Basin Cess Pool, 9x 9 each 2.40

212 1263 Basin Cess Pool, 12x12 each 3.20

213 1250 No. A Self- Acting Oats Cleaner (Higbie Patent), with V2 bu.

capacity per minute 40.00

213 1250 No. B Self-Acting Oats Cleaner (Higbie Patent), with 1 bu.

capacity per minute 40.00

213 1250 No. C Self-Acting Oats Cleaner (Higbie Patent), with 2 bu.

capacity per minute 40.00

Page

Page

210
210
210
210
210
210
211

211

211

211
211

211

21]

21:
21
21
21

21
21
21
21

2:

2
2
2
2

2
S

i«A^^.

Rand McNallv & Co.